Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 2014-R0029 - Contract 11647 With Allen Butler Construction - 01/23/2014 (4)BOND CHECK BEST RATING LICENSED IN TEXAS DATE BY: CONTRACT AWARD DATE: January 23, 2014 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR 34th Street Reconstruction of Roadway and Pedestrian Elements ITB # 14-11647-TF CONTRACT 11647 PROJECT NUMBER: 92217.9240.30000 Plans & Specifications may be obtained from THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY www.thereproductionco!qpany.com Phone: (806) 763-7770 City of tLubbock A CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING AND CONTRACT MANAGEMENT OFFICE This page intentionally left blank ity of ��ttub o 6k TEXAS DATE ISSUED: 12/17/2013 ADDENDUM #1 341h Street Reconstruction of Roadway and Pedestrian Elements ITB 14-11647-TF ORIGINAL CLOSE DATE & TIME: December 17, 2013 at 3:00 p.m. NEW CLOSE DATE & TIME: December 26, 2013 @ 3:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. Bidders are invited to review the following: 1. The close date for the bid has been extended to Thursday, December 26, 2013 at 3:00 P.M. 2. Bidders' attention is directed to the Engineers ADDENDUM NO. 1, attached. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to City of Lubbock Teofilo Flores Buyer P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to (806)775-2164 or Emailed to TKFlores@mylubbock.us THANK YOU, It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Director of Purchasing & Contract Management if any language requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Purchasing Manager no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid close date. A review of such notifications will be made. This page intentionally left blank PARKHILL SMITH & COOPER 4222 85th Street ' Lubbock, Texas 79423 806.473.2200 TO: ALL PLANHOLDERS ADDENDUM FROM. PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. N®' 1 PROJECT NAME: CITY OF LUBBOCK 34�H STREET PAVING____.____..__._.__ IMPROVEMENTS - QUAKER AVE TO INDIANA AVE PROJECT NO.: 01.2692.12 DATE: DECEMBER 11, 2013 Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Specifications and Drawings. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached to the Specifications, and modifies the original Specifications dated October 2013 as noted below: This Addendum consists of 1 page. I. CHANGES TO ADVERTISEMENT II. CHANGES TO DIVISION 0 — BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT INFORMATION A. BID SUBMITTAL FORM CHANGE 1. The following items will NOT be utilized during construction. Contractor shall bid a unit price and extension of $0 (zero dollars) for: a. Item 58, "Portable Water Barricades (Furnish and Install)" b. Item 59, "Portable Water Barricades (Move)" III. CHANGES TO DIVISION 1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. SECTION 01020 —MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1. Omit paragraph 3.58, "Portable Water Barricades (Furnish and Install)" 2. Omit paragraph 3.59, "Portable Water Barricades (Move)" IV. CHANGES TO DIVISIONS 2 THROUGH 16 (TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS): UM0ONC67P1 V. CHANGES TO DRAWINGS: A. NONE X:\2012\2692.12\CLERICAL\Specs\ADDEN\Addendum No 1\Addenda 1.docm Abilene Amarillo El Paso Las Cruces Lubbock Midland team-psc.com i Addendum No. 1 & coop 5 of .• •* /*: j L j KYLE W.JACKS N / ..0.. ....................0...E r -o':. 98310 ,�� fl 12/11/2013 Page 2 December 11, 2013 Respectfully submitted, PARKHILL, SMITH & CO ER, INC. By: Receipt of this addendum shall be acknowledged by the Bidder, below and on the bid Proposal. This entire addendum, or a copy thereof, shall be attached to the bid Proposal submitted. ACKNOWLEDGED: By: �I Contractor Checklist Before submitting your bid. please ensure you have completed and included the following documents in € the order they are listed. The contractor is only to submit (1) one original unbound copy of every item I isted. I . Carefully read and understand the plans and specifications and properly complete the BID SUBMITTAL FORM. Bid submittal for€n MUST be completed in blue or black ink or by typewriter. Signatures must be original, in blue or black ink, and by hand. The bidder binds himself on acceptance of his bid to execute a contract and any required bonds, according to the accompanying forms, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated below. In case of a discrepancy between the Unit Price and the Extended Total for a Bid item, the Unit Price will be taken."Include corporate seal and Secretary's signature. Identify addenda received (if any). Include Iirm's FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner's SOCIAL SECURITY number. 2. V/ Include BID BOND or CASHIER'S OR CERTIFIED CHECK. as your bid surety. f Failure to provide a bid surety WILL result in automatic rejection of your bid. 3. _V Complete and sign the CITY OF LU13BOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT. Contractor's signature must be original. 4. Clearly mark the bid number, title, due date and time and your company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. 5. Ensure your bid is RECEIVED by the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office prior to the deadline. Late bids will not be accepted. 6. Complete and sign the CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS. 7. V/ Complete and sign the SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE. All "YES" responses must be explained in detail and submitted with Bid. 8. V Complete and sign the SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION. Include firin's FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner's SOCIAL SECURITY number. 9. V/ Complete and submit the LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS. DOCUMENTS REQUIRED WITHIN SEVEN BUSINESS DAYS AFTER CLOSING: ld. _` Complete and submit the FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS. FAILURE TO PROVIDE ANY OF THE ABOVE MAY RESULT IN YOUR BID BEING DEEMED NON -RESPONSIVE AND, THEREFORE, NOT FURTHER EVALUATED. PLEASE INCLUDE THIS COMPLETED PAGE AS THE FIRST PAGE OF YOUR BID SUBMITTAL. -1 (Type or Print Company Name) t This page intentionally left blank 1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. NOTICE TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID SUBMITTAL — (must be submitted by published due date & time) 3-1. UNIT PRICE BID SUBMITTAL FORM 3-2. CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT 3-3. SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE 3-4. SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION 3-5. STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS PAYMENT BOND PERFORMANCE BOND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT DAVIS BACON WAGE DETERMINATIONS SPECIAL CONDITIONS (IF APPLICABLE) SPECIFICATIONS This page intentionally left blank 1 NOTICE TO BIDDERS ITB 14-11647-TF a Sealed bids addressed to Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing and Contract Management, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing and Contract Management Office, City Hall, 1625 13th Street, Room 204, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 3:00 P.M. on December 17, 2013, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: 34th Street Reconstruction of Roadway and Pedestrian Elements After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing and Contract Management Office and publicly read aloud. It is the sole 3 responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing and Contract Management Office for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. Bids are due at 3:00 P.M. on December 17, 2013, and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the bids on January 9, 2014, at the City Hall, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $50,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of "A" or better. THE BONDS MUST BE IN A FORM ACCEPTABLE TO THE CITY ATTORNEY AND MUST BE DATED THE SAME DATE THAT THE CONTRACT WAS AWARDED. The estimated budget for this project is $6,500,000. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) business days after notice of award of the contract to him. FAILURE OF THE BIDDER TO INCLUDE BID SECURITY WITH THE BID SUBMITTAL SHALL CONSTITUTE A NONRESPONSIVE BID AND RESULT IN DISQUALIFICATION OF THE BID SUBMITTAL. It shall be each bidder's sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre -bid conference on December 4, 2013 at 10:00 A.M., in City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office, Lubbock City Hall, Room 204, Lubbock, TX 79401. Bidders may view the plans and specifications without charge at The Reproduction Company, H1 2102 Avenue Q, Lubbock, Texas 79405 or at www.thereproductioncompany.com. ONE SET OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS MAY BE OBTAINED, AT THE CITY'S EXPENSE, FROM THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY WITH A $100 REFUNDABLE DEPOSIT, Phone: (806) 763-7770. Deposit Checks shall be made PAYABLE TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, and will be refunded if documents are returned in good condition within Six 60 days after the opening of bids. Additional sets of plans and specifications may be obtained at the bidder's expense. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing and Contract Management Office of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this Notice to Bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises shall be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you require special assistance, please contact the Purchasing and Contract Management Office at (806) 775-2572 or write to Post Office Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. ,!1(1was] l /1l11 ZlZNi Marta-ACvaYez DIRECTOR OF PURCHASING AND CONTRACT MANAGEMENT 2 i' l GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS -n 1 BID DELIVERY TIME & DATE 1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish 34th Street Reconstruction of Roadway and Pedestrian Elements per the attached specifications and F, contract documents. Sealed bids will be received no later than 3:00 P.M. on December 17 2013 at the office listed below. Any bid received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Each bid and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner: "ITB 14-11647-TF, 34th Street Reconstruction of Roadway and Pedestrian Elements" and the bid opening date and time. Bidders must also include their company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to: Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room 204 a Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing and Contract Management Office. Mailing of a bid does not ensure that the bid will be delivered on time or } delivered at all. If bidder does not hand deliver bid, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS. 1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an --. addendum. 2 PRE -BID MEETING 2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non- mandatoly pre -bid meeting will be held on December 4, 2013 at 10:00 A.M_ ., in the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office, Lubbock City Hall, Room 204, Lubbock, TX 79401. All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they represent. 2.2 It is the bidder's responsibility to attend the pre -bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre -bid meeting to bidders who do not attend the pre -bid meeting. ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by ADDENDA information available over the Internet at www.bidsync.com. We strongly suggest that you check for any addenda a minimum of forty-eight hours in advance of the response deadline. BUSINESSES WITHOUT INTERNET ACCESS may use computers available at most public libraries. 3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing and Contract Management Office. At F , the request of the bidder, or in the event the Purchasing and Contract Management Office deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing and Contract Management Office. Such addenda issued by the Purchasing and 1 c Contract Management Office will be available over the Internet at www.bidsync.com and will become part of the bid package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original ITB. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office in writing or in this ITB should be used in preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in preparing responses. 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to bidders. 4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Invitation to Bid. 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Purchasing and Contract Management Office and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing and Contract Management Office prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the bidder fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If bidder does not notify Purchasing and Contract Management Office before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the bid closing date. BID PREPARATION COSTS 5.1 Issuance of this ITB does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a bid. 5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder. TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. 2 �ry "' 6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under Section 552.110 of the Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be made available to the requester. 6.3 Marking your entire bid CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open Records Act. 7 LICENSES PERMITS TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the bidder is or may be required to pay. 8 UTILIZATION OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES Prospective bidders are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of local resources, and to outline in their bid submittal how they would utilize local resources. 9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 9.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 9.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this bid. 10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. 10.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 11 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 12 BIDDER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 12.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It I.. _= shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the Purchasing and Contract Management Office if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such notifications will -- be made. 12.2 NO BIDDER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS INVITATION TO BID (ITB) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN ri FIVE (5)`CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED ) TO: Teofilo Flores, Buyer City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office 1625 13th Street, Room 204 Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: 806-775-2164 Email: TKFlores@mylubbock.us Bidsync: www.bidsyne.com 13 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 13.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be substantially completed within 345 Calendar Days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. 13.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. 14 PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 15 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred .in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 16 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for I protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 4 € 17 GUARANTEES 17.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever 9 " resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 17.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 17.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub -contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its . rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 17.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its fschedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 18 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will, upon written request, be furnished up to five sets of plans and specifications and related contract documents for use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 19 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City _. reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one -' covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. t, (c) Equipment schedule. 20 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 20.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to ;I provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 20.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 21 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 22 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 23 EXPLOSIVES 23.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. 23.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. 23.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 24 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 25 INSURANCE 25.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized t. to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter i specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted before contract execution. 25.2 PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ALONG WITH A COPY OF THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS AN ADDITIONAL INSURED TO ON AUTO/GENERAL LIABILITY ON A PRIMARYAND NON CONTRIBUTORY BASIS TO INCLUDE PRODUCT-COMP/OP AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT SHALL INCLUDE PRODUCTS AND COMPLETE OPERATIONS. 26 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 26.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in the contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction 1 work under the contract requiring an inspector shall not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 26.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on Sunday or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to -` the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on Sunday or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 26.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 27 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily ' cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors shall keep a record showing the name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or subcontractor in the construction of the public work and the actual per diem wages paid to each worker. This record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the City. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, $200 for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. House Bill 2015, signed by the Governor on June 14, 2013 and effective on January 1, 2014, authorizes a penalty to be imposed on a person who contracts for certain services with a governmental entity and Fill who fails to properly classify their workers. This applies to subcontractors as well. Contractors and subcontractors who fail to properly classify individuals performing work under a governmental contract will be penalized $200 for each individual that has been misclassified (Texas Government Code Section 2155.001). 28 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 29 PREPARATION FOR BID 29.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City, and all blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in, stating the price in numerals for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the unit price and the extended total for a bid item, the unit price will be taken. A bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. 29.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. 29.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: 29.3.1 Bidder's name 29.3.2 Bid for ITB 14-11647-TF, 34th Street Reconstruction of Roadway and Pedestrian Elements" Bid submittals maybe withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 29.4 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE 1 BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. 11 30 BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and will include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. - (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bonds (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). ' (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates for Contractor and all Sub -Contractors. (j) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered 1 incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 31 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service �- specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The bidder's bid may be deemed not to meet specifications or the bid may be rejected (' if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: '' (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service 1-.. required. (b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. - (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. (e) The safety record of the Contractor and proposed Sub -Contractors Before contract award, the recommended contractor for this project may be required to show that he has experience with similar projects that require the Contractor to plan his work efforts and equipment needs with City of Lubbock specifications in mind. Demonstration of experience shall include a complete list of ALL similar municipal and similar non -municipal current and completed projects for the past three (3) years for review. This list shall include the names of supervisors and type of equipment used to perform work on these projects. In addition, the Contractor may be required to provide the name(s) of supervisor(s) that will be used to perform work on this project in compliance with City of Lubbock specifications herein. ` 32 BID AWARD 32.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole discretion. Unless otherwise specified herein, the City shall award the bid f based on the total bid for Bid Items 1 through 68 plus the sum of any Alternate Bids or Options the City may select. 32.2 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications before the bid price is considered. Response to specifications is primary in determining the best low bid. Failure to comply with the specifications may result in disqualification of the bid. 32.3 In case of tie bids, preference will be given to local bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to determine possible Anti -Trust violations. 32.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident bidders' home state. 32.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the State of Texas and under the laws of the State of Texas. In connection with the performance of work, the Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all other applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the same may be applicable. 32.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS INVITATION TO BID. 32.7 The estimated budget for this project is $6,500,000.00. 33 ANTI -LOBBYING PROVISION 33.1 DURING THE PERIOD BETWEEN THE BID CLOSE DATE AND THE CONTRACT AWARD, BIDDERS, INCLUDING THEIR AGENTS AND REPRESENTATIVES, SHALL NOT DIRECTLY DISCUSS OR PROMOTE THEIR BID WITH ANY MEMBER OF THE LUBBOCK CITY COUNCIL OR CITY STAFF EXCEPT IN THE COURSE OF CITY -SPONSORED INQUIRIES, BRIEFINGS, INTERVIEWS, OR PRESENTATIONS, UNLESS REQUESTED BY THE CITY. 33.2 This provision is not meant to preclude bidders from discussing other matters with City Council members or City staff. This policy is intended to create a level playing field for all potential bidders, assure that contract decisions are made in public, and to protect the integrity of the bid process. Violation of this provision may result in rejection of the bidder's bid. 34 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 34.1 Bidders are required to comply with Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, with respect to the payment of prevailing wage rates for the construction of a public work, including a building, highway, road, excavation, and repair work or other project development or improvement, paid for in whole or in part from public funds, without regard to whether the work is done under public supervision or direction. A worker is employed on a public work if the worker is employed by the contractor or any subcontractor in the execution of the contract for the project n 10 _. l 34.2 A worker employed on a public work by or on behalf of the City of Lubbock shall be paid not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for the work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed, and not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for legal holiday and overtime work. 34.3 The State of Texas has adopted the Federal Davis -Bacon wage rates for use in Texas pursuant to and in accordance with the Texas Government Code, Section 2258.022. Bidders may access the U. S. Department of Labor web site at the following web address to obtain the rates to be used in Lubbock County: htip://www.wdol.gov/dba.aspx 34.4 It shall be the responsibility of the successful bidder to obtain the proper wage rates from the web site for the type of work defined in the bid specifications. 34.5 A contractor or subcontractor who violates Texas Government Code Section 2258.023 shall pay to the City of Lubbock sixty dollars ($60) for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the contract. 11 This page intentionally left blank BID SUBMITTAL FORM This page intentionally left blank I I H BID SUBMITTAL, UNIT PRICE BID CONTRACT DATE: jQ•C1,--t.3 PROJECT NUMBER: ITB 14-11647-TF 341h Street Reconstruction of Roadway and Pedestrian Elements t Bid of , i- }01 Cc_ V%f ,Zr_ (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Ladies and Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for 34th Street Reconstruction of Roadway and Pedestrian Elements, having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The bidder binds himself on acceptance of his bid to execute a contract and any required bonds, according to the accompanying forms, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated below. BASE BID: ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT ESTIMATED QUANTITY UNIT PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT 1 Mobilization LS 1 )4 1-SQ tg w). 13 2 Pre are ROW STA 55 1 b - 41 3 Car c ``' 3 Asphalt Removal(Roadway) SY 39,138 S 1 l CY-),. 1. 4 Concrete Removal(Roadway) SY 6,037 I `� �`7 Ci 5 Asphalt Removal (Driveway/Parking Lot) SY 1,465 )0 6 Concrete Removal (Driveway/Parking Lot SY 3,154 .2) o 7 Sidewalk Removal SY 8,009 S Curb and Gutter Removal LF 11,349 s to 9 Sign Assembly Removal EACH 30 1 ' 7 `$ Li 12S- 10 Light Pole Removal EACH 39 11 Concrete Pipe Removal LF 64 12 Curb Inlet Removal EACH 7 r oc)' 0-2 a S OO•` 13 Embankment CY 195 3 ` J 14 Excavation CY 12,013 �� y 15 Over Excavation CY 200 i ©t, 16 Plowable Backfill CY 139 i0o 17 CRCP (9°) SY 38,669 a 1. - 4 1 9 i_ (fit case of a discrepancy between the Unit Price and the ettendcd total for a hid itcni, die unit price will he taken.) P ITEM FSTflNtATED EXTENDED NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY UNIT PRICE AMOUNT 18 _ Iligh-Early Strength CRCP (9") SY 4,296 -� 1 5ND �5 u r ,-Si-' 19 Pavement Junction Tertninal EACH 3 t ili l,)O. i_)_ (q)f 4" 20 Concrete Curb And Gutter LF 15,350 ( 3 (D Ito erg 21 Concrete Median SY 106 lE, 3 `' 22 Manhole Adjustment EACH 20 Y`"' ►Ca U-1a`" 23 Valve Adjustment EACH 26 c)4r s-4 24 ParkingLot Pavement Repair SY 150 e . ` T t O '3 )i' SO 25 HMAC TY C TON 105 j)0, 26 Curb Inlet TY C EACH 7 _ q &`' 27 Curb Inlet Extension EACH 4 tILtd'%' 28 Reinforced Concrete Pipe CL III LF 64 1 29 Concrete Drainage Flume SY 213 ')a ' ► 7 C-,g(, 30 Temporary Drives (Recycled Asphalt Pavement) SY 200 w 31 Alley and Driveway Returns SY 6,207 32 Decorative Concrete Sidewalk 5") SY 11,120 33 Decorative Concrete Sidewalk (6") t3 `1` (Reinforced) SY 599 34 Standard Concrete Sidewalk (5") SY 28 �l�• `'" 35 Concrete Sidewalk Curb LF 1,888 IL� '! � � � `r0 36 Accessible Curb Ram T 1) EACH 28 r7y a`` 37 Pedestrian Push Button Assembly EACH 2 3 3cr . c� 38 Sodding SY 100 _)a, v "' Permanent Pavement Markings (4") ( White) 39 Broken LF 2,661 M `` �� 40 Permanent Pavement Markings (8") (White) Y� ,10 Solid LF 1,790 41 Permanent Pavement Markings (24") 3, (White) (Solid) LF 522 0170. 42 Permanent Pavement Markings (4") (Yellow) (Broken) LF 2,030 I� 43 Permanent Pavement Markings (4")) Yellow Solid LF 11,359 4 1 44 Permanent Pavement Markings (Parking l0 Lot) 4") (Yellow) LF 100 110, 45 Permanent Pavement Markings Arrow EACH 48 (3 f 46 — _--1_{ry Permanent Pavement Markings (Raised) I-C) EACH 287 , -3 10 C1,Ij ---- ------- (In case of a discrepancy Mween the knit Price and the extended total for a bid item, the unit price will he taken.) 7 ,r Bidder's Initials r r ITEM ESTIMATED EXTENDED NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY UNIT PRICE AMOUNT 47 Permanent Pavement Markings (Raised) 3� (Ty If- -A) EACH 202 48 Small Sign Assembly EACH 35 7�5 I t )5 49 Barricades and "traffic Control h10 14 c�. - } c 50 Portable Changeable Message Board PCMB) EACH 2 17 lit Temporary Pavement Markings (4") (White) Solid LF 24,715 52 Temporary Pavement Markings (4") (White) 3P 40 (Broken) LF 5,105 7 04t-1. 53 Temporary Pavement Markings (24") (White) Solid LF 1,260 .� 54 Temporary Pavement Markings (4") 3 (Yellow) (Solid) LF 67,840 f �3 6 55 Temporary Pavement Markings (4") Yellow (Broken) LF 8,189 �' 1 56 Portable Water Barricades (Furnish) LF 5,000 57 Portable Water Barricades (Place and ct, Remove) LF 20,200 3, 58 Portable Water Barricades (Furnish and Install) LF 5,000 59 Portable Water Barricades (Move) LF 20,200 60 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan LS 1 ) ' 7 4y'U. 61 Decorative Illumination Pole Assembly EACH 52 ` 7 ) so, ` `3 3 � l &x), CO 62 PVC Conduit (2") LF 15,747 3. Sto 3 x1 63 Electrical Conductor (No. 6) (Bare) LF 10,573 1.10 tt 4'3v. 64 Electrical Conductor No.6 (Insulated) LF 20,936 a 1332_,�' 65 Junction Box Standard A EACH 51 Li I s" 66 Junction Box (Standard) D EACH 19 t i�, )• ' `�,' ,}� 67 Junction Box T l) Mod EACH 2 68 Electrical Service T A) (240/480) EACH 1 (in case or a discrepancy Detween the Unit Pace and the extended total for a Uut Item, the unit price will be taken.) TOTAL BASE BID, rrEiNIS #1 - #68: C'), "Q . ,, , MATERIALS: 7- h.f e� t`n s ,\ ���� `.y x ri u u:+; t•cI f� t�: � -I-�t �i`'tic,;,-�- ` _ r•� SERVICES: a TOTAL BID } — iTEiNIS #t -#68: T�z) kN ,,_9je O Sa )( `-'i. } /ic:v I$ 5t y s31 7, } (Unit Price .tmounts shall be shorn n in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, unit price .hall govern.) Bidder's Initials 3 Pi Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project in accordance with a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" from the Owner and to complete the project in compliance with the following schedule: Milestone A (Approximately from Station 150+44 to Station 156+00) -Bidder agrees to begirt Work within 5 working days of Notice to Proceed, reach Substantial Completion, as defined in the Special Conditions of the Contract, within 98 working days of beginning Work; and to complete Pedestrian and Lighting facilities within 128 working days of beginning of Work. Bidder also agrees to pay Owner Liquidated Damages in the amount of $3,999.50 per working day if either Substantial Completion is not reached or if Pedestrian and Lighting facilities are not complete within the time given, and continue to pay Liquidated Damages until the project is brought into compliance with the time given. Milestone B (Approximately from Station 156+00 to Station 181+00) - Bidder agrees to begin Work within 5 working days of Substantial Completion of Milestone A, and reach Substantial Completion, as defined in the Special Conditions of the Contract, within 88 working days of beginning Work; and to complete Pedestrian and Lighting facilities within 118 working days of beginning of Work. Bidder also agrees to pay Owner Liquidated Damages in the amount of $3,999.50 per working day if either Substantial Completion is not reached or if Pedestrian and Lighting facilities are not complete within the time given, and continue to pay Liquidated Damages until the project is brought into compliance with the time given. Milestone C (Approximately from Station 181+00 to Station 204+50) - Bidder agrees to begin Work within 5 working days of Substantial Completion of Milestone B, and reach Substantial Completion, as defined in the Special Conditions of the Contract, within 84 working days of beginning Work; and to complete Pedestrian and Lighting facilities within 114 working days of beginning of Work. Bidder also agrees to pay Owner Liquidated Damages in the amount of $3,999.50 per working day if either Substantial Completion is not reached or if Pedestrian and Lighting facilities are not complete within the time given, and continue to pay Liquidated Damages until the project is brought into compliance with the time given. Final Completion - Bidder agrees to reach Final Completion of the entire project, including establishment of all new vegetation and Contractor demobilization, within 345 working days of Notice to Proceed. Bidder also agrees to pay Owner Liquidated Damages in the amount of $1,362.50 per working day if Final Completion is not reached within the time given, and continue to pay Liquidated Damages until the project is brought into compliance with the time given. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of 70 calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than rive percent of the total amount of the bid 1 submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 business days after notice of award of the contract to him. r k1 - Bidder's initials 4 Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars (S ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of �7c� Dollars (S ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within 10 business days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shalt be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE NIUST BE MADE ON THE BID (Sea] if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: _ Secretary Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. _� _ Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Date: AuthorizedOinature (Printed or Typed Name) Company O y .5 �L czdos hore Ot "-e_ dress [ t City, County j eu 4 s .-7 9_36to State Zip Code Telephone: Fax: FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No. M/WBF, Fimi: woman Black American Native American Hispanic American Asian Pacific American I Other (Specify) Bid Bond Surety Department ICNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRE, SENTS, That we, Alien Butler Construction Inc., as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and the Colonial American Casualty and Surety Company, a corporation created and existing under the laws of the State of Maryland, whose principal office is in Schaumburg, IL, as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the pity of Lubbock, Texas, as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of Five percent (5%) of the greatest amount bid Dollars ($------ 5%------- ), for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. Whereas, the Principal has submitted a bid for 34" Street reconstruction of Roadway & Pedestrian Elements NOW THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or contract documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to retrain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 17th day of December, A.D. 2013. Attest: Allen Butler- Construction, Inc. t _ (Principal) By ��{ , f (SEAL) Witness: Form s-3266-4 Printed in U.S.A. 12-70 Colonial American Casualty and Surety Company By %`.. Kevin J. D nn, A/rney-in-1 9 I'l Power of Attorney FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, corporations of the S aryland, by THEODORE G. MARTINEZ, Vice President, and GERALD F. HALEY, Assistantc e� suance of authority granted by Article VI, Section 2, of the By -Laws of said Companies, e n side hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date her `n nn�at t ppoint Tracy TUCKER, Tobin TUCKER, W. Lawrence B �� . D 1 p rth, Texas, EACH its true and lawful agent and Attorney -in -Fact, to c ,Ls'ira nd v its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: any and all bonds and unftxt o ndependent Executors, Community Survivors and Community Guar i s�) he xecu ' or undertakings in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said Compani a tents and purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected �he pany at its office in Baltimore, Md., in their own proper persons. This power of attorney revokes that ' s on behalf of Tracy TUCKER, Tobin TUCKER, W. Lawrence BROWN, dated October 11, 2004. The said Assistant Secretary does hereby certify that the extract set forth on the reverse side hereof is a true copy of Article VI, Section 2, of the By -Laws of said Companies, and is now in force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice -President and Assistant Secretary have hereunto subscribed their names and affixed the Corporate Seals of the said FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY. this 20th day of April, A.D. 2009. ATTEST: *�9 OEPps,3 f° a SEAL W b State of Maryland I ss: City of Baltimore FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY Gerald F. Haley Assistant Secretary Theodore G. Martinez On this 20th day of April, A.D. 2009, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, duly commissioned and qualified, came THEODORE G. MARTINEZ, Vice President, and GERALD F. HALEY, Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Companies aforesaid, and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument is the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal the day and year first above written. `` `•lib} ;6 err )- t' + ! J7 01 ,�<<f114i til Maria D. Adamski Notary Public My Commission Expires: July 8, 2011 .. POA-F 168-2829 EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND P, "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as. the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,...and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, jr any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is still in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice -President who executed the said Power of Attorney was one of the additional Vice -Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney -in -Fact as provided in Article VI, Section 2, of the respective By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY. This Power of Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 10th day of Mqv. 1990 and of the Board of Directors of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of May, 1994. RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced seal of the company and facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Vice -President, Secretary, or Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, this 17th day of December 1 2013 1 Assistant Sic. eii, v 11 CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Bidder Must be submitted with Bid I, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me and my Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) business days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid. Contractor (Or'ginal Signature) Contractor (Print) CONTRACTOR'S BUSINESS NAME: ��� '� tl�� coy3l. , T, . (Print or Type) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: c31-4 S kcJc - 5��-- �,• NOTE TO CONTRACTOR If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Director of Purchasing & Contract Management Office for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2572. ITB 14-11647-TF, 34th Street Reconstruction of Roadway and Pedestrian Elements This page intentionally left blank I j SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE The City of Lubbock City Council desires to avail itself of the benefits of Section 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, and consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding bids on City contracts. Pursuant to Section 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, City of Lubbock has adopted the following written definition and criteria for accurately determining the safety record of a bidder prior to awarding bids on City contracts. The definition and criteria for determining the safety record of a bidder for this consideration shall be: The City of Lubbock shall consider the safety record of the bidders in determining the responsibility thereof. The City may consider any incidents involving worker safety or safety of the citizens of the City of Lubbock, be it related or caused by environmental, mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor. Specifically, the City may consider, among other things: a. Complaints to, or final orders entered by, the Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission (OSHRC), against the bidder for violations of OSHA regulations within the past three (3) years. b. Citations (as defined below) from an Environmental Protection Agency (as defined below) for violations within the past five (5) years. Environmental Protection Agencies include, but are not necessarily limited to, the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACOE), the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (USFWS), the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), the Texas Natural Resource Conservation Commission (TNRCC) (predecessor to the TCEQ), the Texas Department of State Health Services (DSHS), the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department (TPWD), the Structural Pest Control Board (SPCB), agencies of local governments responsible for enforcing environmental protection or worker safety related laws or regulations, and similar regulatory agencies of other states of the United States. Citations include notices of violation, notices of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments. Convictions of a criminal offense within the past ten (10) years, which resulted from bodily harm or death. d. Any other safety related matter deemed by the City Council to be material in determining the responsibility of the bidder and his or her ability to perform the services or goods required by the bid documents in a safe environment, both for the workers and other employees of bidder and the citizens of the City of Lubbock. In order to obtain proper information from bidders so that City of Lubbock may consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding bids on City contracts, City of Lubbock requires that bidders answer the following three (3) questions and submit them with their bids: QUESTION ONE Has the bidder, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the bidder, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of OSHA within the past three (3) years? YES NO If the bidder has indicated YES for question number one above, the bidder must provide to City of Lubbock, with its bid submission, the following information with respect to each such citation: Date of offense, location of establishment inspected, category of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. Bidder's Initials V QUESTION TWO Has the bidder, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the bidder, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of environmental protection laws or regulations, of any kind or type, within the past five years? Citations include notice of violation, notice of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses, or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments. YES NO — If the bidder has indicated YES for question number two above, the bidder must provide to City of Lubbock, with its bid submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: Date of offense or occurrence, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. QUESTION THREE Has the bidder, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by bidder, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership, or institution, ever been convicted, within the past ten (10) years, of a criminal offense which resulted from serious bodily injuiy or death? YES NO If the bidder has indicated YES for question number three above, the bidder must provide to City of Lubbock, with its bid submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: Date of offense, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, in any, and penalty assessed. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT THE STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK I certify that I have made no willful misrepresentations in this Questionnaire nor have I withheld information in my statements and answers to questions. I am aware that the information given by me in this questionnaire shall be investigated, with my full permission, and that any misrepresentations or omissions may cause my bid to be rejected. Signature P CStto� Title SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION Federal Law (A-102 Common Rule and OMB Circular A-110) prohibits non -Federal entities from contracting with or making sub -awards under covered transactions to parties that are suspended or debarred or whose principals are suspended or debarred. Covered transactions include procurement contracts for goods or services equal to or in excess of $50,000 and all non -procurement transactions (e.g., sub -awards to sub -recipients). Contractors receiving individual awards of $50,000 or more and all sub -recipients must certify that their organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. Before an award of $50,000 or more can be made to your firm, you must certify that your organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. I, the undersigned agent for the firm named below, certify that neither this firm nor its principals are suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. COMPANY NAME: 81 �Ie FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No. � 6 e2 Signature of Company Official: Vim, Printed name of company official signing above: t) k-"j �Pn Date Signed: 1 �1- ` ,:) G - f `5 This page intentionally left blank CONTRACTORS STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS Individual contractors and joint ventures submitting a proposal must complete the following evaluation information for the Project. Joint ventures shall be composed of not more than two firms and each firm must complete separate evaluations. Evaluation information must be submitted at time of proposal submittal. Failure to submit the following Proposal Evaluation information may result in the OWNER considering the proposal non -responsive and result in rejection of the proposal by the OWNER. Offerors are to provide any additional information requested by r.. the OWNER. In evaluating a firm's qualifications, the following major factors will be considered: A. FINANCIAL CAPABILITY: For this project, the CONTRACTOR'S financial capability to undertake the project will be determined by the CONTRACTORS ability to secure bonding satisfactory to the OWNER. B. EXPERIENCE: Do the organization and key personnel have appropriate technical experience on similar projects? 4411 6,,_ . E C. SAFETY: Does the organization stress and support safety as an important function of the work process? c_�M F D. QUALITY OF WORK: (1) Does the organization have a comm-itm�_ent to quality in every facet of their wort: - the process as well as the product? k-J 4(!kw Y + (2) Does the organization have a written quality philosophy and/or principles that exemplifies their work? If so, submit as Attachment "lid". t3) Has this organization ever received an award or been recognized for doing "quality" work on a project? If so, give details under Attachment'=. E. CONFORMANCE TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: t 1) Does the organization have a commitment and philosophy to construct projects as designed and as defined in the Contract Documents? !1`I`l�e darn t 5 The OWNER reserves the right to waive irregularities in determining the firm's qualifications and reserves the right to require the submission of additional information. e The qualifications of a firm shall not deprive the OWNER of the right to accept a proposal, which in its judgment is the lowest and best proposal, to reject any and all proposals, to waive irregularities in the proposals, or to reject nonconforming, nonresponsive, or conditional proposals. In addition, the OWNER reserves the right to reject any proposal where circurnstances and developments have in the opinion of the OWNER changed the qualifications or responsibility of the firm. \Material misstatements on the qualifications forms may be grounds for rejection of the firm's proposal oil this project. Any such misstatement, if discovered after award of the contract to such firm, may be grounds for immediate termination of the contract. Additionally, the firm will be liable to the OWNER for any additional costs or damages to the OWNER resulting from such misstatements, including costs and attorney's fees for collecting such costs and damages. Complete the following information for your organization: Contractor's General Information Organization Doing Business As ;� Business Address of Principle L-n "Ce, Office Telephone Numbers Main Number 4 06 --j 4 5- -14 Q B Fax Number 06- S - _151 Web Site Address LOWO .0164oullte'or� rr- Form of Business (Check One) A Corporation I I A Partnership An Individual Date of Incorporation I State of Incorporation Chief Executive Officer's Name President's Name kk\ D,n --p-1t �o;r- Vice President's Name(s) Secretary's Name Treasurer's Name Date of Organization State whether partnership is general or limited I Name I Business Address Average Number of Current Full Time Employees Average Estimate of Revenue ® for the Current Year ��l 5 Contractor's Organizational Experience Organization Doing Business As ;tq,, =AC- . Business Address of Region Office ta.k-eise, �- - a� ry, Name of Regional Office Manager Telephone Numbers A to-145--749 8 190 -- L45-- -1 151el Main Number Fax Number Web Site Address Wuxo- List of names that this organization currently, has or anticipates operating under over the history of the organization, including the names of related companies p sently doing business: Names of Organization From Date To Date List of companies, firms or organizations that own any part of the organization. Name of companies, firms or organization Percent Ownership Years experience in projects similar to the proposed project: As a General Contractor 1 1 As a Joint Venture Partner Has this or a predecessor organization ever defaulted on a project or failed to complete any work awarded to it? If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization been released from a bid or proposal in the past ten ears? If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization ever been disqualification as a bidder or proposer by any local, state, or federal agency within the last five ears? If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Is this organization or your proposed surety currently in any litigation or contemplating litigation? If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization ever refused to construct or refused to provide materials defined in the contract documents? If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. L Proposed Project Managers Organization Doing Business As e e Name of Individual N `��h r ° Pt�ct big I Years of Experience as Project Manager Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Project Manager (A Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date _ Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Name Title/ Position ; I �o' Title/ Position 5 'a i erg Organization t✓; bloocl<- Organization (_,{b Telephone Sib - Tele hone E-mail e-k Q m UJO 6 U-15 E-mail e (6cyKA us Project Project } q g I l Candidate role on Project �� C* Candidates role on Project L Name of Individual Years of Experience as Project Manager Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Project Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date * e of it !, a re Name _ a e e Name � e Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project 26 ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION, INC. #24 SOUTH LAKESHORE DRIVE 3 RANSOM CANYON, TEXAS 79336 PHONE:806-745-7498 FAX:806-745-7577 Robert Humphries has been employed with Allen Butler Construction, Inc. since 2002. Prior to 2002 he was regional operations manager at Safelite Auto Glass, where he oversaw the daily operations of 40 stores. While being at Allen Butler Construction, Inc., he has been project manager for projects that include schools at Lubbock Cooper ISD, Frenship ISD, Lubbock ISD, and Texas Tech University. He has overseen major projects for the City of Lubbock that include 98`' Street Widening and Drainage project and Slide Rd. and Erskine St. Improvements and Drainage. He is also overseeing 981h Reconstruction and Frankford 98`h to 114ch widening projects. Proposed Project Superintendent Organization Doing Business As Name of Individual vLru to cep ,e S Years of Experience as Project Superintendent Years of Experience with this organization / Number of similar projects as Superintendent Number of similar projects in other positions C� Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment 14 Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date 018 +o iv -^Lo t3 Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates ap oval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name AJe LLICJ� Name Ica l Title/ Position Title/Position Ty, g Q Organization a Organization R K Telephone to to — -t 3 1y LlTele hone p .- '? g'?-aka 35 E-mail E-mail Project 00 flnw Project Candidate role on Project o � Name of Individual A ,� -0 - Candidate role ` on Project Years of Experience as Project Superintendent Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Superintendent Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assigmnent Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Name Namer,.,ti p_ a Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization Organization Telephone Tele hone E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project 27 ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION, INC. 924 SOUTH LAKESHORE DRIVE RANSOM CANYON, TEXAS 79336 PHONE: 806-745-7498 FAX: 806-745-7577 Ronnie Stokes has been employed with Allen Butler Construction, Inc. since April 1996, Ronnie has worked his way up from the bottom and has proved to be a valuable asset to Allen Butler Construction, Inc. He not only knows how to run all the equipment he also is the head surveyor and has 4 employees under him. In 2006 he also became a foreman for projects around town. He was foreman on all our of Texas Tech projects. Rawls School of Business was our last project there. He has been foreman on several City of Lubbock projects such as MLK Reconstruction, 98`h Reconstruction, Frankford 981h to 1141h St. Improvements, and Indiana Ave Widening to 1585. Contractor's Proposed Key Personnel Organization Doing Business As Provide a brief description of the managerial structure of the organization and illustrate with an organizational cart. Include t _ e title a9d- names of key personnel. Include this chart at an attachment to this description. See attachment No. i o . (~ k " on +- 0- Provide a brief description of the managerial structure proposed for this project and illustrate with an organizational cart. Include the title and names of proposed key personnel and alternates. Include this chart at an attachment to this description. See attachment No. :110 o . O A+ 11 C—"6" t 71�-1 Provide information on the key personnel proposed for this project that will provide the following key functions. Provide information for candidates for each of these positions on the pages for each of these key personnel. Also provide biographical information for each primary and alternate candidate as an attachment. The biographical information must include the following as a minimum: technical experience, managerial experience, education and formal training, work history which describes project experience, including the roles and responsibilities for each assignment, and primary language. Additional information highlighting experience which makes them the best candidate for the assignment should also be included. Role I Primary Candidate TAIternate Candidate ProiectMana er 1/'� I.An -1 h,—.0 1 ►lp-�eI Project Superintendent c] Project Safety Officer 6114k rD u) Quality Control Manager eo;a [ A fvokl ► U I* If key personnel are to fulfill more than one of the roles listed above, provide a written narrative describing how much time will be devoted to each function, their qualifications to fulfill each role and the percentage of their time that will be devoted to each role. If the individual is not to be devoted solely to this project, indicate how time it to be divided between this project and their other assignments. 25 ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION, INC. #24 SOUTH LAKESHORE DRIVE RANSOM CANYON, TEXAS 79336 PHONE: 806-745-7498 FAX: 806-745-7577 Attaclunent C-1 Alien Butler, President of Allen Butler Const., Inc. is involved in all aspects of the operation. James J. Davis, Vice -President, oversees the construction andmaterials divisions from bidding through completion with Robert (Bobby Evans; in constr{{��uction and Douglas ()"Neil in materials. Each contract is appointed an estimator, project manager and job foreman, with these individuals working together to maintain production at optimum level. The shop foreman, Frank Groves, works directly with mechanics to insure proper care of vehicles and equipment. Cindy Riddle serves as office manager, overseeing all facets of the office operation. 0 w w w o C4 a aw U Z < 0U.71 20iw aapw� ocrZM max z °a¢ � �u<x H V W Q zC) Q e,1 w 0 Ey per, a w OU2 ® w ~ W � aw a WWw� C4NO a a Q W xWw t1a � moo° r-� z w C) w F- z CIO O c!n 7- 0 C4 z oz z ce w Q pz z zwz � z d ozRww wQWH �z z ��� 3w z� u wzua` 7-o C4 7- U M��oDI¢ V-) aw¢ EU �(-) M O ` < w L"<, U o i w -, O < v) o �Q62<<O¢U-2oa U a..>�Q� w u=¢LO UU¢p> > a�<o °u0o�o_5V)2C4�Q ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION, INC. #24 SOUTH LAKESHORE DRIVE RANSOM CANYON, TEXAS 79336 PHONE:806-745-7498 FAX:806-745-7577 Attachment D-1 Allen Butler, President of Allen Butler Const., Inc. is involved in all aspects of the projects. James Davis, Vice President, will oversee the construction and material divisions. Bobby Evans, General Superintendent, will oversee the construction. Ronnie Stokes will be the foreman onsite to oversee the project. Steve Moczygemba, Concrete Superintendent, will oversee the concrete construction. Rick Humphries, Project Manager, will be handling the daily aspect which includes scheduling, billing and coordination with subcontractors. Keith Carroway will handle safety issues and quality control of material being used in or for this project. ATTACHMENT D-2 PROJECT MANAGER RICK HUMPHRIES ALLEN BUTLER, PRESIDENT JAMES DAVIS, VICE PRESIDENT SUPERINTENDENT QUARRY SUPERINTENDENT RONNIE STOKES DOUG O'NEIL PROJECT FOREMAN RONNIE STOKES SAFTEY MANAGER KEITH CARROWAY CONCRETE SUPERINTENDENT STEVE MOCZYGEMBA QUALITY CONTROL KEITH CARROWAY ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION, INC. 24 S. LAKESHORE DR. RANSOM CANYON, TX 79366 (806)745-7498 FAX(806)745-7577 Allen Butler, President Allen Butler started Butler Construction in 1975. In 1995 Mr. Butler felt the need to incorporate as Allen Butler Construction, Inc. Mr. Butler as president oversees all equipment purchases, job bidding and job performance. The operation of the caliche pit, the asphalt and concrete plants are also under Mr. Butler's supervision. For the past twenty years Allen Butler Construction, Inc. has performed a large percentage of Lee Lewis Construction, Inc, site work. We have also been prevalent in grading and paving of City of Lubbock subdivisions and been involved in the major portion of expansion at Texas Tech University as well as City of Lubbock streets and Preston Smith International Airport. In the past few years the company has also expanded into performing TxDOT work & is currently working on its third project as the General Contractor. Allen Butler Construction, Inc. now owns and operates its own caliche pit, two concrete plants and an asphalt plant. Complimenting the asphalticoncrete plants is an in-house QA/QC program. The Corporation also owns the land and buildings which houses a seven bay shop and offices. The equipment inventory exceeds $15,000,000.00. With an employee average of 125-175, Allen Butler Construction, Inc. is able to consecutively serve numerous commercial projects. References: Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. Lee Lewis (806)797-8400 Hugo Reed & Associates Bernie Gradell (806)763-5642 ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION, INC. 924 SOUTH LAKESHORE DRIVE RANSOM CANYON, TEXAS 79336 PHONE: 806-745-7498 FAX: 806-745-7577 James Davis has been in the heavy equipment construction business since 1983. From 1992 to 1994, the Kenova Corp. of West Palm Beach, FL employed him. During this time Mr. Davis was involved in the construction of two major golf courses, one being in Guadalajara, Mexico and the other in Crofton, MD. In 1994 Mr. Davis relocated to Lubbock, TX. At that time Allen Butler Construction, Inc. hired him as General Superintendent. He quickly proved himself and was promoted to Vice President. In the capacity of Vice President, Mr. Davis assists the estimation department with technical advice. Along with Bobby Evans, Mr. Davis coordinates the job crews and equipment for the numerous projects performed. by Allen Butler Construction, Inc. ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION, INC. 424 SOUTH LAKESHORE DRIVE RANSOM CANYON, TEXAS 79336 PHONE:806-745-7498 FAX: 806-745-7577 Bobby Evans has been in construction for 34 years. He was employed with Granite Construction from 1989 through 1991. During this time he was a foreman on the I-27 project where he oversaw the constructions of the e�cavadonl and'oitilduig of tixe roadway. He ti�en'oecaine superintendent on the I-30 expansion in Rockwell, TX. He scheduled and managed the no.w. prep, flexible base placement, and the asphalt and concrete paving. He oversaw the building of the overpass and bridge headers including retaining walls and stiucthare backfilling. He moved back to Lubbock and formed Evans Excavation, doing local backhoe, dirt work, and paving Since 1998 Mr. Evans has been employed in the capacity of General Superintendent for Allen Butler Construction, Inc. Mr. Evans has been involved in overseeing the physical application of all major undertaking since that date including most of the Texas Tech projects, TXIDOT projects, and City of Lubbock projects such as 98t' Street Improvements, LIA Taxiway in-iprovenlents, fir_ Slide Rd. & Erskine Inmprovements. ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION, INC. #24 SOUTH LAKESHORE DRIVE RANSOM CANYON, TEXAS 79336 PHONE:806-745-7498 FAX:806-745-7577 Robert Humphries has been employed with Allen Butler Construction, Inc. since 2002. Prior to 2002 he was regional operations manager at Safelite Auto Glass, where he oversaw the daily operations of 40 stores. While being at Allen Butler Construction, Inc., he has been project manager for projects that - include schools at Lubbock Cooper ISD, Frenship ISD, Lubbock ISD, and Texas Tech University. He has overseen major projects for the City of Lubbock that include 98`h Street Widening and Drainage project and Slide Rd. and Erskine St. Improvements and Drainage. He is also overseeing 98"' Reconstruction and Frankford 98"' to 114"' widening projects. ji i) J ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION, INC. #24 SOUTH LAKESHORE DRIVE RANSOM CANYON, TEXAS 79336 PHONE: 806-745-7498 FAX:806-745-7577 Ronnie Stokes has been employed with Allen Butler Construction, Inc. since April 1996. Ronnie has worked his way up from the bottom and has proved to be a valuable asset to Allen Butler Construction, Inc. He not only knows how to -run all the equipment he also is the head surveyor and has 4 employees under him. In 2006 he also became a foreman for projects around town. He was foreman on all our of Texas Tech projects. Rawls School of Business was our last project there. He has been foreman on several City of Lubbock projects such as MLK Reconstruction, 98"' Reconstruction, Frankford 98`h to 1141h St. Improvements, and Indiana Ave Widening to 1585. J�4`TTALhme�-t �� ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION, INC. 924 SOUTH LAKESHORE DRIVE RANSOM CANYON, TEXAS 79336 PHONE: 806-745-7498 FAX: 806-745-7577 Keith Carroway has been a full time safety coordinator for two years at Allen Butler Construction, Inc. He has worked for us almost 6 years accumulatively. His first 4 years with us he oversaw the quality control of the asphalt and concrete division. He has filled the role of both safety coordinator and assistant safety officer. He administers safety orientations to all new hires, gives weekly safety meetings to all personnel, and investigates any accidents on the job. He has completed several training courses pertaining to his role including but not limited to; Fall Protection, Scaffolding, Nuclear safety, Personal Protective Equipment inspection, Ladder Safety and Inspection, Forklift Training, Fire Safety, Hazard and Exposure j Identification, Fleet Safety, Lifting and Rigging, Trenching and Barricading, Traffic Control, Emergency Evacuation Plans, First Aid, and Work Zone Analysis. Before coming back to Allen Butler Construction; t Inc. in 2009, he was employed as a lab technician for a company out of New York from 2007 to 2009. His primary role was performing testing with a secondary role in safety. Iw ''. ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION, INC. 24 SOUTH LAKESHORE DRIVE RANSOM CANYON, TX 79366 (806 )745-7498 (806 )i45-7577 — FAX RE: QUALIFYING STATEMENTS D. I — COMIMIITNIENT TO QUALITY Allen Butler Const., Inc. is highly dedicated to producing a quality product in each and every facet of operation. If you will note the organization chart, we have quality control officers which inspect and approve projects — from start to finish. We also have in house lab testing to insure quality of materials. A T L EN BUTLER CONST., INC. #24 SOUTH LAKESHORE DRIVE RANSOM CANYON, TX 79-366 (806)745-7498 (806)745-7577 — FAX RE: QUALIFYING STATEMENTS D.2 - QUALITY OF WORK Duties of Project Managers and Quality Control Personnel: The reputation of this company relies on you performing your duties to insure the highest quality of performance on each and every project. Communication between yourself and all foremen is necessary to obtain this goal. ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION, INC. 924 SOUTH LAKESHORE DRIVE RANSOM CANYON, TEXAS 79336 PHONE: 806-745-7498 FAX: 806-745-7577 Attachment: I Allen Butler Construction, Inc. has been recognized by the City of Lubbock for the construction of Westchester Park Lots 414-481. Texas Chapter American Public Works Association awarded Allen Butler Construction, Inc., Public Works Project of the Year 2008. Texas Mutual Insurance Co. has recognized Allen Butler Construction, Inc. for our dedication to employee health and safety for the past 2 years. Jewel Davis, Orchard Park, offered to buy lunch for the entire company for the excellent job that was done on Orchard Park. ALLEN BUTLER CONST., INC. #24 SOUTH LAKESHORE DRIVE RANSOM CANYON, TX 79366 (806)745-7498 (806)745-7577 — FAX RE: QUALIFYING STATEMENTS E.I —CONFORMANCE TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Allen Butler Const., Inc. takes the commitment to conformance of contract documents seriously. Before any project is begun the entire staff comes together to be informed as to what is expected of them. Not only the project manager, but the team from quality control, continues the inspection of each project on a regular basis. if �1 I Proposed Project Safety Officer Organization Doing Business As lied Name of Individual EM Years of Experience as Project Safety Officer S Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Safety Officer 3 © V Number of similar projects in other positions 30 -+ Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date cam' e�fi:Ltt tE� Reference Contact Information(listing names indicates ap oval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name } Name Title/ Position Title/ Position CO3J14.1 S C-i c. , T- Or anization ► 4,vtcp5 Organization CN ,vs�tcfrt Telephone jq3� - ltp Telephone E-mail ,Jc s r .CJ M E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project Name of Individual Years of Experience as Project Safety Officer Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Safety Officer Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date •MM W.1.11511101111M.M. I• • Name Name Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION, INC. � #24 SOUTH LAKESHORE DRIVE RANSOM CANYON, TEXAS 79336 PHONE:806-745-7498 FAX:806-745-7577 1 Keith Carroway has been a full time safety coordinator for two years at Allen Butler Construction, Inc. He has worked for us almost 6 years accumulatively. His first 4 years with us he oversaw the quality control of the asphalt and concrete division. He has filled the role of both safety coordinator and assistant safety officer. He administers safety orientations to all new hires, gives weekly safety meetings to all personnel, and investigates any accidents on the job. He has completed several training courses pertaining to his role including but not limited to; Fall Protection, Scaffolding, Nuclear safety, Personal Protective Equipment Inspection_, Ladder Safety and Inspection, Forklift Training, Fire Safety, Hazard -and Exposure Identification, Fleet Safety, Lifting and Rigging, Trenching and Barricading, Traffic Control, Emergency Evacuation Plans, First Aid, and Work Zone Analysis. Before coming back to Alen Butler Construction, Inc. in 2009, he was employed as a lab technician for a company out of i�7e Y� Fork from 2;;0 7 to 2009. His primary role was performing testing with a secondary role in safety. Proposed Project Quality Control Manager Organization Doing Business As Candidate Name of Individual CU ,/ fi. Jt prt_ Years of Experience as Quality Control Manager Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Quality Manager 36 4 Number of similar projects in other positions $d't Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date COM �c . t Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates ap roval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Name Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization -Organization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project Name of Individual Years of Experience as Quality Control Manager Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Quality Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Name Name Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization Organization Telephone -Telephone E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION, INC. #24 SOUTH LAKESHORE DRIVE RANSOM CANYON, TEXAS 79336 PHONE: 806-745-7498 FAX: 806-745-7577 Keith Carroway has been a full time safety coordinator for two years at Allen Butler Construction, Inc. He has worked for us almost 6 years accumulatively. His first 4 years with us he oversaw the quality control of the asphalt and concrete division. He has filled the role of both safety coordinator and assistant safety officer. He administers safety orientations to all new hires, gives weekly safety meetings to all personnel, and investigates any accidents on the job. He has completed several training courses pertaining to his role including but not Iimited to; Fall Protection, Scaffolding, Nuclear safety, Personal Protective Equipment Inspection, Ladder Safety and Inspection, Forklift Training, Fire Safety, Hazard and Exposure Identification, Fleet Safety, Lifting and Rigging, Trenching and Barricading, Traffic Control, Emergency Evacuation Plaits, First Aid, and Work_ Zone Analysis. Before coming back to Allen Butler Construction, Inc. in 2009, he was employed as a lab technician for a company out of Nevv York from 2007 to 2009. His primary role was performing testing with a secondary role in safety, 1,3 r I Contractor's Project Experience and Resources Organization Doing Business As 1 140 eN 604-),q 4 CG,,vs 4. _l+ ^R-- e Provide a list of major projects that are currently underway, or have been completed within the last ten years on Attachment A Provide a completed Project Information form (Attachment B) for projects that have been completed in the last five ears which specifically illustrate the organizations capability to provide best value to the Owner for this project, Include a completed Project Information form (Attachment B) for projects which illustrate the experience of the proposed key personnel. Provide a description of your organizations approach to completing this project to provide hest value for the Owner. Including a description of your approach in the following areas: I . Contract administration 2. Management of subcontractor and suppliers 3. Time management 4. Cost control 5. Quality management �� ���`�`��� ,2 6. Project site safety 7. Managing changes to the project 8. Managing equipment 9. Meeting HUB / MWBE Participation Goal Provide a list of major equipment ro osed for use on this project. Attach Additional Information if necessary Equipment Item Primary Use on Project Own BWiill Lease ! • e . e- i e e e What work will the organization complete using.its own resources? CZ1 6J fit.' he ) G—,�) 1"Gt (I What work does the organization propose to subcontract on thisproject? 0- te,,- - -"-� ) 3 fi� ;P,�) ) --J-tQP- C-CN*,-,�- 1 J 0 -,, 1, �:�5 Attachment A Current Projects and Project Completed within the last 10 Years Project Owner Tf, 30--r Project Nanie ")6 ' i QQ;t, cx General Description of Project: tjtl Project Cost Lltl a 1. V 6ate Project Completed 10 Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name A, G,-vcic Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Designer q03 Construction Manager 3V ,ye-c, i-5r4s-weel^ V OCT 4ya & _620 I -TO I ■ Project Owner 4.11\ S aM o L) e, me A& _4 General Description of Project: Project Cost f b Cs ILI) Date Project Completed 10 - 30-0 e Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name o$ (")o A'J.,4N Ca"tk,"J, cte; Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner •I I —7'-)S- 2-14 1 C) ft 4VU4,os Designer PC V V-V\i kl 3M i 4 (q4r 6d. 4f ­3 — -Aaco PMC4A I I I Construction Manager Project Owner I C, cc,,&A5�1-t V, 4, to General Description of Project: of Pro j ect Cost Date Project Conn T to /a Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Namec.�r+e,�-, I--,, Cc, t f S�� 'icy ^ CGrt"a Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner "\)Q. C. L o f �6,t �Z las_q IM Designer 'P, F_ (u Oc."P,i Ll - L"40 _s�o Construction Manager :�:z Z= C_ZZ C= =7> ......... . . Attachment A Current Projects and Project Completed within the last 10 Years Project Owner t64 Project Name General Description of Project: W j '�r,'A, C)0_0-t Project Cost Date Project Completed 1 -511 1 fo Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name Lb tk s 0,&ri � % Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contactingthe names individuals as a reference) Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner -Name w ii6 ec-+ �Allzt_r C1;AA,, Designer U Construction Manager Project Own Project Name General Description of Proye—ct. Project Cost Date Project Completed C> Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name Kick &_M0&rfW _§,uperintendent Inuni -Rr , - - -F"i' " Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name . Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner .30,0 - Designer Construction Manager Project ectOwner p Project General Description of Project: Project Cosh fib Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Mana2er Name k e- 66 Va MaL &trMSLCM Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names il - --(- - A uals as a rVference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Cl cf L.v_66,,_K '206-1416- Ba6l Designer _93a6b, [Construction Manager Zo6w-, D14 x- - I A-aR I -yxI &- ; I 14 Y." Attachment A Current Projects and Project Completed within the last 10 Years Project Owner-,.,. TXIo7- Project Nane I J C, General Description of Project: Acw"A V,wEa7/c,.V Project Cost Date Project Completed Ao Key Project Personnel Project Manager 0 Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name 6� JF:rZ-R r- — N."I Y Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) y Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner t- ?VIMAJ E 7"r TY bo w­ 5, 414 46, Designer Construction Manager I Project Owner I —fx tea E General Description ofProject: e_V_ �Ide_ A,Id .7W,?14X& r sr Project Cost Date Project Completedqq Key Project Personnel Manager Pro J g ect Superintendent Project Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name DAIII/6- ow,51e- Yc"'w Y girWrAl _b,0t)6 Reference Contact information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner g ALz_ AuzAzezrn kla.,'• 6AJ(,,W,962 V Designer Construction Manager Project Owner I L /,5 1) Project Name General Description of Project: Project Cost I --W,Lr Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control I Manager Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Owner Designer Construction Manager Naive JUry �g 7 Title/ Position Organization psc, Telephone 9(%. - '4 _f3, 2 a6 E-mail 14 t�� C_7 Z77. Attachment A Current Projects and Project Completed within the last 10 Years $ -_ - - I 1 Project Owner 76 Project Nam�-= 0 � �W_U_) 1\V e�-6+,ZA 41Lmi: General Description of Project: —Date Project completed Project Cost 42, qD10, 0 1 a-5- D1, Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Safety Officer Quality Control Superintendent Manager a Ir, Name V , Q60tr- A^ rr� i4_ Okpco tA)� Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individrials as a 4erence) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner e ckltjea. _ ag a -I e04 I Designer Construction Manager Project Name "/.ees: OiL pv�_, Project Owner General Description Project: Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project § dent Safety Officer Quality Control Mana2er Name fy*,) ojosl- i 4-K V-, Cnvlo -V% Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names indiviWMals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner 5 0A, c eq 4 , ql\� C - A 6bu- , D-, 4 6 xW,\ Designer Construction Manager Owner 'I'x 60-T- Project Name 776 _26Zs' c6s,.i� .Project General Description of Project: c CON Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name � oe) k�9_6)-eolk rpeo.""r L)u.Q4A,) 1-k, (Ir-efoAx,-� Reference Contact information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner C 3?S-�-S7a :5 te (x-, A i;2- '9, Designer Construction ManagerL 14 N) . 440,Ck Mt44- B I Project Information Project Owner Lv­66-oc-K Project Name General Description of Projectl u dget History — f Bid Amount Schedule Performance Date Days Bid B Notice to Proceed 8/.;L I laq Change Orders Contract Substantial Completion Dale at Notice to Proceed it IAS Dq Owner Enhancements Contract Final Completion Date at Notice to Proceed C)q Unforeseen Conditions aCl.tAX . 3 Change Order Authorized Substantial Completion Date y 1 -1.1 L71 02 Design Issues Change Order Authorized Final Completion Date A Al 1.1101 Total Actual I Estimated Substantial Completion Date Actual / Estimated final Completion Date Project Manager Project Sup Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Final Cost OEM Narne Percentage of Time Devoted to the Project Proposed for this Project Did Individual Start and Complete the Project? g s e5 If not, who started or completed the project in their place. Reason for change. Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Designer j90,6A, (;v�ete � c-koI5 Construction—M`ana—qe­r— Number of Issues Total Amount involved in Pendina Resolved Issues Suret • Number of Issues Resolved Total Amount involved Resolved Issues I () Project Information Project Owner (., _u, fq �o cK Project Name General Description of Project t l (�.il(�ri.1R� �� �'�"t n� �-vJ'em.�t�G, 'S'�cm. �°trwP.Y' £.5'��e•r� y S�We�r `tr•�e. p`L--tet�-err • Budget History Schedule Performance Amount % of Bid Amount Date Days __ •_.._ Btd — 1►)q$ ® �. Notice to Proceed -5- 0 fp 14BU Change Orders Contract Substantial Completion Date at Notice to Proceed Owner Enhancements Contract Final Completion Date at Notice to Proceed Unforeseen Conditions Change Order Authorized Substantial Completion Date Design issues _ Change Order Authorized Final Completion Hate Total Actual / Estimated Substantial Completion Date - 8 q a J Final Cost 1 IN i Pill Actual / Estimated Final Completion Date /m-3t-© 514 7ProjectManager Project Sup Safety Officer Quality Control Manager krie,5�p%► &rveAtjsaa C� Name Percentage of Time Devoted to the Project y'p 'p r� Proposed for this Project , ¢ �,2pU Did Individual Start and Complete the Project? If not, who started or completed the project in their place. ; ;GK rre Reason for change. -Nance Title/ Position Organization7Telephone - &WhNe'+ E-mail f Owner E ��.ub�_��-Z'1'5--±Ak �E : ,ci Designer Gtllen — �}— •"•�=�`r �a1v ?�-'fit _ i am.-px. Construction Manager Sure[ V P LA_ n _ } -- — y & Number of Issues Total Amount involved in Pendin Resolved Issues Number of Issues Resolved �` Total Amount involved in Resolved Issues 16 Iu Project Information Project Owner 6I � Y, IRt Jowl WJ I -� Project Name General Description of Project I Budget History Amount Bid Change Orders Owner Enhancements Unforeseen Conditions Design Issues Total Final Cost :S t Schedule Performance % of Bid Date Days Amount Notice to Proceed J0_q Contract Substantial Completion Date at Notice to Proceed Contract Final Completion Date at Notice to Proceed Change Order Authorized Substantial Completion Date Change Order Authorized Final Completion Date Actual / Estimated Substantial Completion Date ­A-c—tual't Estimated Final Completion Date Project Manager Project Sup Safety Officer Quality Ccntrol Manager game Percentage of Time Devoted to the Project Proposed for this Project Did Individual Start and Complete the Project? If not, who started or completed the project in their place. Reason for chance. Naine Owner Designer Construction Manager Title/ Position Number of Issues Total Amount involved in Resolved I i Resolved Issues 16 Organization Number of Issues Telephone E-mail Total Amount involved in Resolved Issues C= r7; C=1 1107.= =75 C-0 C7 f:77� Prniprt Jnfnrmat;nn Project OwnerProject Name General Description Of Project Budget History Schedule Performance Amount % of Bid Amount Date Days Bid Notice to Proceed t,:t Change Orders Contract Substantial Completion Date at Notice to Proceed Owner Enhancements Conti -act Final Completion Date at Notice to Proceed Unforeseen Conditions Change Order Authorized Substantial Completion Date Dc-,ign Issues Change Order Authorized Final Completion Date Total ACLU31 t Estimated Substantial Completion Date Final Cos( I'l Actual / Estimated Final Completion Date Project Manager Project Sup Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name 1IN411 fE-- tv'r-T Z- E i- �M­'.JA Y A9-17-rf Percentage of Time Devoted to the Project ?& -,,, /4, N /0 -f Proposed for this Project Did Individual Start and Complete the Project? 9S If not. who staned or completed the project in their place. Reason for change. MEMO= Name Title/ Position_. Organization Telephone E-mail Owner t" C: s f'No14 Designer Construction Manager Surety Number of Issues Total Aniount, involved Number of Issues Total Amount involved i e i 7n N Total n 'Sues Resolved Issues Number of is Resolved Issues 11"ending Resolv;dl Resolved I I g 16 ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION, 1s0N, INC. 924 SOUTH LAKESHORE, DRIVE RANSOM CANYON, TEXAS 79336 PHONE:806-745-7498 FAX: 806-745-7577 Attachment L Allen Butler Construction, Inc. owns over 900 pieces of equipment to handle any type of project. We are proposing to use the following for this project. 2 — 140H Motor graders 3 — 815 Cat Compactors 2 — Dynapac Vibratory Compactors 2 — 4000 gallon Water Trucks 2 — Dynapac 25 ton Rubber Tire Roller 1 — Dynapac Steel Wheel Roller 1 — 4 yd Cat Loader 3 — Excavators 2 — Dynapac Sheepfoot 2 — Gomaco Paving machine (concrete) 1 — Gomaco Placer 1 — Gomaco Cure & Tine Machine 2 — Rubber Tire Backhoe/Loader 1 — Central Mix Concrete Plant 2 — Front End Loaders 3 — 623 Scrapers 15 — Belly Dump Tractors and Trailers 10 — Tandem Axle Dump Trucks 10 — Concrete Mixer Trucks 10 — Dump Ti ticks for Concrete Placement N ORGANIZATIONAL APPROACH ATTACHMENT K 1. CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION: Contract and Subcontract Award James Davis, vice President, and Jerry Colburn, Comptroller, will review/approve all contracts and subcontracts for the project. RFI's and Submittals Rick Humphries, project manager, will oversee all RFI's and submittals for the project. Billing and Payroll Rick Humphries, project manager, will draft and summit all payment requests to the owner. Cindy Riddle, office manager, will oversee all certified payrolls and accounting documents for the project. 2. MANAGEMENT OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS Rick Humphries, project manager, will oversee all scheduling and payment requests for all subcontractors and suppliers. Ronnie Stokes, project superintendent, will manage subcontractor operations onsite. 3. TIME MANAGEMENT Rick Humphries, project manager, will create and maintain a Primavera P6 schedule for the project. This schedule will be submitted and discussed at the project progress meetings with all parties. Project schedule will be communicated daily with James Davis, vice president, and Ronnie Stokes, project superintendent. 4. COST CONTROL Internal cost control will be recorded by Jerry Colburn, comptroller, and managed by Allen Butler, President, and James Davis, Vice President. External cost controls, _ including change orders, will be the responsibility of James Davis and Rick Humphries. 5. QUALITY MANAGEMENT Keith Carroway, quality control/assurance manager, will oversee all work items to ensure they meet or exceed all plans specifications. Rick Humphries and Ronnie Stokes _- will be knowledgeable of all plans and specifications for the project and act a further layer of inspection for all items of work. F; 6. PROJECT SITE SAFETY Ronnie Stokes, Project Superintendent, will be the first line of safety inspection for the project as he will be onsite at all times. Keith Carroway, Safety Manager, and Rick Humphries, project manager, will make daily visits to the site. All employees and subcontractors will be made aware and trained on wearing all personal protective equipment, haul routes, trench protection, and first aid. All Allen Butler Construction, Inc. pickups also carry first aid kits as well as fire extinguishers. 7. MANAGING CHANES TO THE PROJECT James Davis and Rick Humphries will draft, negotiate, and approve all change orders for the project. 8. MANAGING EQUIPMENT Rick Humphries, project superintendent, will handle and schedule all equipment operations, haul routes, maintenance, and repairs for the project. 9. MEETING HUB/MWBE PARTICIPATION GOAL Allen Butler Construction, Inc. solicits HUB/DBE every month through advertising in the local newspaper. Any quotes that are received from HUB/DBE contractors are given the same attention as all contractors. Contractor's Subcontractors and Vendors Provide information on the proposed key personnel, project experience and a description of past relationship and work experience for each subcontractor listed above using the Project Information Forms. MENE Provide a list of major equipment ro osed for use on this project. Attach Additional Information if necessary Furnish Furnish HUB/M Vendor Name Equipment / Material Provided Only and WBE Install I Firm Hi This page intentionally left blank LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS This page intentionally left blank 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. p7. O. 9. to. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. ITB 14-11647-TF - 34th Street Reconstruction of Roadway and Pedestrian Elements LIST OF SUB CONTRACTORS Company Name Location Services Provided L'}ecl'r.c +a,CCcAs..lct(n,1,` � "� '� .Pit rf 00 IT)( (Hilt, , � tf Company ddress t Sri Cc K J6'j c (c City, County 1 P/c. `7 r-lb(, State Zip Code Telephone:' Fax: Oki Minority Owned Yes No ❑ ❑ /x ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Cl ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ THIS FORM SHALL BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED ALONG WITH YOUR PROPOSAL IF NO SUB —CONTRACTORS WILL BE USED PLEASE INDICATE SO ITB 14-11647-TF - 34th Street Reconstruction of Roadway and Pedestrian Elements FINAL LIST OF SUB CONTRACTORS Minority Owned Company Name Location Services Provided Yes No D{ 2. %r, ��.rr.. %�i C?YJ�� �1eS iccfti% }.v�6,-,try ?c t���r�:i �i"'.t. 2c, t'Sjs"ir�t n6 rCaJ�j ❑ �q�( 3. jLgSW (41 k #1:,,x TCedexr} 4. _�gx oA cNo, V. ` n5pl\r.14'1):1JL ❑ 6. Pcrr�c� �2 ie,.sj , f`�rlva�c:��11 C�ac =�cu✓ �'5" ck:ti ❑ 7. ❑ ❑ 8. ❑ ❑ 9. ❑ ❑ 10. ❑ ❑ 11. ❑ ❑ 12. ❑ ❑ 13. Cl ❑ 14. — _ ❑ ❑ 15. ❑ ❑ 16. ❑ ❑ Company Address City, County - Tz � G� • 7 li'u State Zip Code Telephone:o Fax: THIS FORM SHALL BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED WITHIN 7 DAYS OF BID CLOSING. IF NO SUB ---CONTRACTORS WILL BE USED PLEASE INDICATE SO. PAYMENT BOND This page intentionally left blank Bond No. PRF09147031 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a). OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE. (CONTItACTS MORE THAN $50,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that Allen Butler Construction, Inc. (hereinafter called the Principals) as Principal(s), and Colonial American Casualty and Surety Company and Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland (hereinafter called, the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called tlse Obligee, in the amount of Five -Million Four -Hundred Fifty -Three Thousand Two -Hundred and Sixth Seven Dollars G$5 453,267) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 23rd day of LanuaW-, .2014, to ITB 14-11 b47-TF 30 Street Reconstruction of Roadway and Pedestrian Elements and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION ISSUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the- work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond, is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. I., IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 5th day of February 2014. Colonial American Casualty and Surety Company and Fidelih and Deposit Company of Maryland Allen Butler Construction, Inc. Surety (Company Naine) i' *ByBy Allen Butler (Title) Kevin J. In (Printed Na e) Attorn -In-Fact (Signature President (Title) i No Text No Text No Text Bond No. PRF09147031 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN 1$100,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that Allen Butler Construction, Inc. (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and Colonial American Casualty and Surety Company and Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s),are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of Five -Million Four -Hundred Fifty -Three Thousand Two -Hundred and Sixty Seven Dollars (aS453,267) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns; jointly and severally, firmly by these. presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 23rd day of January, 2014, to ITB 14-11647-TF 34`hStreet Reconstruction of Roadway and Pedestrian Elements and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a band in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and 'contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253,02 1 (a) of E . the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this Mond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 5th day of February 2014. € : Colonial American Casualty and Surety Company and Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland Allen Butler Construction, Inc. Surety (Company Name) *By �By Allen Butler (Title) KeviZ-ln-Fact unn (Printed Name) Attor (Signature) President (Title) No Text Power of Attorney FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY . KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, corporations of the S aryland, by THEODORE G. MARTINEZ, Vice President, and GERALD F. HALEY, Assistajpgl c suance of authority granted by Article VI, Section 2, of the By -Laws of said Companies, n t side hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date her 't in ppoint Tracy TUCKER, Tobin TUCKER, W. Lawrence BR . D 1 rth, Texas, EACH its true and lawful agent and Attorney -in -Fact, to c d v its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: any and all bonds and un t�u or under o ndependent Executors, Community Survivors and Community Guar ' � Q e xec' takings in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said Compani a tents and purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected h mpany at its office in Baltimore, Md., in their own proper persons. This power of attorney revokes that * s behalf of Tracy TUCKER, Tobin TUCKER, W. Lawrence BROWN, dated October 11, 2004. The said Assistant Secretary does hereby certify that the extract set forth on the reverse side hereof is a true copy of Article VI, Section 2, of the By -Laws of said Companies, and is now in force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice -President and Assistant Secretary have hereunto subscribed their names and _ affixed the Corporate Seals of the said FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, this 20th day of April, A.D. 2009. ATTEST: ',gyp 9EPpS�I CJ1Sf:'%. mob SEALW � ••,..� A0 State of Maryland I ss: City of Baltimore FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY Gerald F. Haley Assistant Secretary By: Theodore G. Martinez On this 20th day of April, A.D. 2009, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, duly commissioned and qualified, came THEODORE G. MARTINEZ, Vice President, and GERALD F. HALEY, Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Companies aforesaid, and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument is the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal the day and year first above written. Maria D. Adamski Notary Public My Commission Expires: July 8, 2011 POA-F 168-2829 EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and. Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is still in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice -President who executed the said Power of Attorney was one of the additional Vice -Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney -in -Fact as provided in Article VI, Section 2, of the respective By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND - DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY. This Power of Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 10th day of May, 1990 and of the Board of Directors of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of May, 1994. RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced seal of the company and facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Vice -President, Secretary, or Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, this 5th day of February 1 2014 Assistant Secretary Fidelity and Deposit Companies Home Office: 3910 Keswick Road Baltimore, MD 21211 IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint: You may call the Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland, Colonial American Casualty and Surety Company, and/or Zurich American Insurance Company's toll -free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at: 1-800-654-5155 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights, or complaints at: 1-800-2S2-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 FAX 4 (512) 47S-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning the premium or about a claim, you should first contact Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland or Colonial American Casualty and Surety Company. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACK THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. S8543f(TX) (08/01) CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE This page intentionally left blank It is understood and agreed that this endorsement amends the COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART as follows: SCHEDULE (OPTIONAL) Name of Additional Insured Persons Or Organizations (As required by `written contract' per Paragraph A. below.) Locations of Covered Operations (As per the "written contract", provided the location is within the "coverage territory" of this Coverage Part.) A. Section II - Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an additional insured: 1. and 2. The particular person or organization, if any, scheduled above. B. The insurance provided to the additional insured is limited as follows: 1. The person or organization is an additional insured only with respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property damage", or "personal and advertising injury" caused in whole or in part by: a. Your acts or omissions, or the acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf, in the performance of your ongoing operations specified in the "written contract"; or b. "Your work" that is specified in the "written contract" but only for "bodily injury" or "property damage" included in the "products -completed operations hazard", and only if: (1) The "written contract' requires you to provide the additional insured such coverage; and (2) This Coverage Part provides such coverage. 2. 3. We will not provide the additional insured any broader coverage or any higher limit of insurance than: a. The maximum permitted by law; b. That required by the "written contract; c. That described in B.1. above; or d. That afforded to you under this policy, whichever is less. `A G-140331-D (Ed. 01/13) Policy No: C 4013609294 Page 1 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Allen Butler Construction, Inc. 0 CNA All Rights Reserved. CNA 4. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in Condition 4. Other Insurance (Section IV), this insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured whether on a primary, excess, contingent or any other basis. But if required by the "written contract" to be primary and non-contributory, this insurance will be primary and non-contributory relative to insurance on which the additional insured is a Named Insured. 5. The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to "bodily injury", `property damage", or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of: a. The rendering of, or the failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering, or surveying services, including: (1) The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; and (2) Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities; or b. Any premises or work for which the additional insured is specifically listed as an additional insured on another endorsement attached to this Coverage Part. C. SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS is amended as follows: 1. The Duties In The Event of Occurrence, Offense, Claim or Suit condition is amended to add the following additional conditions applicable to the additional insured: An additional insured under this endorsement will as soon as practicable: (1) Give us written notice of an "occurrence" or an offense which may result in a claim or "suit" under this insurance, and of any claim or "suit" that does result; (2) Except as provided in Paragraph B.4. of this endorsement, agree to make available any other insurance the additional insured has for a loss we cover under this Coverage Part; (3) Send us copies of all legal papers received, and otherwise cooperate with us in the investigation, defense, or settlement of the claim or "suit'; and (4) Tender the defense and indemnity of any claim or "suit" to any other insurer or self insurer whose policy or program applies to a loss we cover under this Coverage Part. But if the "written contract" requires this insurance to be primary and non-contributory, this provision (4) does not apply to insurance on which the additional insured is a Named Insured. We have no duty to defend or indemnify an additional insured under this endorsement until we receive from the additional insured written notice of a claim or "suit'. D. Only for the purpose of the insurance provided by this endorsement, SECTION V — DEFINITIONS is amended to add the following definition: 'Written contract" means a written contract or written agreement that requires you to make a person or organization an additional insured on this Coverage Part, provided the contract or agreement: 1. Is currently in effect or becomes effective during the term of this policy; and 2. Was executed prior to: a. The "bodily injury" or `property damage'; or b The offense that caused the "personal and advertising injury", for which the additional insured seeks coverage under this Coverage Part. All other terms and conditions of the policy remain unchanged. This endorsement, which forms a part of and is for attachment to the Policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect on the effective date of said Policy at the hour stated in said Policy, unless another effective date is shown below, and expires concurrently with said Policy. Material used with permission of ISO Properties, Inc G-140331-D (Ed. 01/13) Policy No: C 401 Page 2 Endorsement No: Effective Date: I._: Insured Name: Allen Butler Construction, Inc. 0 CNA All Rights Reserved. POLICY NUMBER: 4013609280 COMMERCIAL AUTO CA 20 48 02 99 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. 0 1 This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM GARAGE COVERAGE FORM MOTOR CARRIER COVERAGE FORM TRUCKERS COVERAGE FORM With respect to coverage provided by this endorsement, the provisions of the Coverage Form apply unless modified by this endorsement. This endorsement identifies person(s) or organization(s) who are "insureds" under the Who Is An Insured Provision of the Coverage Form. This endorsement does not alter coverage provided in the Coverage Form. This endorsement changes the policy effective on the inception date of the policy unless another date is indicated below. Endorsement Effective: 04/01/2013 Countersigned By: Named Insured: ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION INC Authorized Representative SCHEDULE Name of Person(s) or Organization(s): ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATON THAT YOU ARE OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE INSURANCE WHERE REQUIRED BY A WRITTEN CONTRACT OR AGREEMENT IS AN INSURED, BUT ONLY WITH RESPECT TO LEGAL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACTS OR OMISSIONS OF A PERSON FOR WHOM LIABILITY COVERGE IS AFFORDED UNDER THIS POLICY. (If no entry appears above, information required to complete this endorsement will be shown in the Declarations as applicable to the endorsement.) Each person or organization shown in the Schedule is an "insured" for Liability Coverage, but only to the extent that person or organization qualifies as an "insured" under the Who Is An Insured Provision contained in Section II of the Coverage Form. CA 20 48 02 99 Copyright, Insurance Services Office, Inc., 1998 Page 1 of 1 POLICY NUMBER: C 4013609294 Named Insured: Allen Butler Construction, Inc. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 24 04 05 09 F RECOVERY This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Person Or Organization: Blanket as required by written contract or agreement. Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. The following is added to Paragraph S. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us of Section IV — Conditions: waiver applies only to the person or organization shown in the Schedule above. CG 24 04 05 09 Copyright, Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2008 Page 1 of 1 This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM BUSINESS AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE FORM GARAGE COVERAGE FORM MOTOR CARRIER COVERAGE FORM TRUCKERS COVERAGE FORM With respect to coverage provided by this endorsement, the provisions of the Coverage Form apply unless modified by the endorsement. This endorsement changes the policy effective on the inception date of the policy unless another date is indicated below. lamed Insured: Allen Butler Construction, Inc. ndorsement Effective Date: 04/01/2013 SCHEDULE Name(s) Of Person(s) Or Organization(s): Blanket as required by written contract or agreement. I Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. I � ! • a •oa • di• ! !n ! o • !e • o ®• ! ! i a •m i CA 04 44 03 10 Copyright, Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2009 Page 1 of 1 r WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS e xzM UtuaLIABILITY INSURANCE POLICY Insurance Company WC 42 03 04 A TEXASlMK#N01AWffAff2ffJMMJ11=FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the Insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in Item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but this waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the Schedule where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule. Schedule 1. ( ) Specific Waiver Name of person or organization 2. Operations: ALL TEXAS OPERATIONS 3. Premium The premium charge for this endorsement shall be - percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed for the above person(s) or organization(s) arising out of the operations described. 4. Advance Premium INCLUDED, SEE INFORMATION PACE. This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the Inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following "attaching clause' need be completed only when this endorsement Is Issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement, effective on at 12:01 A.M. standard time, forms a part of fPolicy No. TSF-0001074270 of the Texas Mutual Insurance Company Issued to ALLEN BUTLER CONSTRUCTION INC Endorsement No. Premium $ r Authorized Representative WC420304A (ED.1-01-2000) INSURED'S COPY This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART LIQUOR LIABILITY COVERAGE PART OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE PART POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCT WITHDRAWAL COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART RAILROAD PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE PART In the event of cancellation or material change that reduces or restricts the insurance afforded by this Coverage Part, we agree to mail prior written notice of cancellation or material change to: SCHEDULE 1. Name: Blanket as required by written contract or agreement. 2. Address: 3. 1 Number of days advance notice: 3 0 Information required to complete this Schedule if not shown above will be shown in the Declarations. L. CG 02 0512 04 Copyright, ISO Properties, Inc., 2003 Page 1 of 1 l_ Q-300ss0- (Ed. 06/08) Endorsement Effective 04/01/2013 Policy Number 4013609280 Named Insured Allen Butler Construction, Inc.e4 Countersigned b ty,- k { (AuthonzeC ibpresentative) In the event of cancellation or material change that reduces or restricts the insurance afforded by this Coverage Part, we agree to mail prior written notice of cancellation or material change to: E1W,11491111111z 1. Number of days advance notice: 30 2. Name: Blanket as required by written contract or agreement. 3. Address: 0-300660-A Page 1 of 1 (Ed. 06/08) This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in Item 3,A, of the Information Page. In the event of cancellation or other material change of the policy, we will mail advance notice to the person or organization named in the Schedule. The number of days advance notice is shown in the Schedule. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. Schedule 1. Number of days advance notice: 30 2. Notice will be mailed to: "AS REQUIRED IN WRITTEN CONTRACT CERTIFICATE HOLDER IS BEING ENDORSED ON POLICY" This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following "attaching clause" need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement, effective on at 12:01 A.M. standard time, forms a part of Policy No. TSF-0001074270 of the Texas Mutual Insurance Company Issued to Allen Sutler Construction, Inc. Endorsement No. Premium $ fAuthorized Representative WC420601 (ED.1-94) a /Rr 7 0 /�C 4.40 CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) 1/28/2014 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER IBTX Risk Services Hurst 6363 N. State Hwy 161, Suite 100 CONTACT NAME: Dianne Link PHONE (214) 989-7100 A/C No;(214) 596-9030 E-MAIL ADDRESS: service@ib-tx.com Irving TX 75038 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURERA:Starr Indemnity & Liability Cc INSURED Allen Butler Construction, Inc. INSURER B: Nat'l Fire Ins. Company of Hartf 12238 INSURER C:continental Insurance Company 35289 INSURER D: Texas Mutual Insurance Company 22945 24 South Lakeshore Drive INSURERE: 22945 Ransom Canyon TX 79366 INSURER F : COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: Cert ID 14992 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF MM/DD/YYYY POLICY EXP W MM/DD/YY LIMITS A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 CLAIMS -MADE 51OCCUR C 4013609294 4/ / 1 2013 4/1/2014 DAPREMISESMAGETOEa RENTED occurrence $ 300,000 MED EXP (Any one person) $ 15,000 PERSONAL BADVINJURY $ 11000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 POLICY a PRO LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG $ 2,000,000 $ OTHER: AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT Ea accident $ 11000,000 X BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ B ANY AUTO 4013609280 4/1/2013 4/1/2014 ALL OWNED SCHEDULED AUTOS AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ X PROPERTY DAMAGE Per accident $ NON -OWNED HIRED AUTOS X AUTOS C UMBRELLA LIAS X OCCUR SISCCCLO2003213 4/1/2013 4/1/2014 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 51000,000 X AGGREGATE $ 51000,000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS -MADE DED RETENTION $ $ D WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY Y/N ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory In NH) N I A TSF-0001074270 12/1/2013 12/1/2014 PER OTH- X STATUTE ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 11000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE $ 11000,000 If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 S S DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) The General Liability and Automobile policies include a blanket automatic additional insured endorsement [G-140331-D 01/13, G-18652-I 07/09 & CA2048 02/991 that provides this feature only when there is a written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires such status. The General Liability, Automobile, and Workers' Compensation policies include a blanket automatic waiver of subrogation endorsement [CG2404 05/09, CA0444 03/10 & WC420304A] that provides this feature only when there is a written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires such status. Primary Non -Contributory wording per endorsement [G-140331-D 01/131. Cancellation per attached [CG0205 12/04, G300660A 06/08, & WC4206011. RE: ITB 14-11647-TF, Contract #11647, Project #92217.9240.30000; 34th Street Reconstruction of Ur-K I II'IL;A 1 It MULLILK City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000, Room 204 Lubbock TX 79457 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZEDj�DRREPRESENTATIVE� 1:51 l ACORD 25 (2013104) ©1988-2013 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS SECTION CONTINUED I 1/28A/ 014 City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000, Room 204 Lubbock TX 79457 Roadway and Pedestrian Elements Allen Butler Construction, Inc. 24 South Lakeshore Drive Ransom Canyon TX 79366 DOC (10/2003) CONTRACTORCHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERFICATE OF INSURANCE ALONG WITH A COPY OF THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A ADDITIONAL INSURED ON AUTO/GENERAL LIABILITY ON A PRIMARY AND NON CONTRIBUTORY BASIS TO INCLUDE PRODUCT-COMP/OP AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKER'S COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT SHALL INCLUDE PRODUCTS AND COMPLETE OPERATIONS. REQUIREDWORKERS'WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512-305-7238 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and U (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; 0 (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perfonn as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they (I are providing services. CONTRACT This page intentionally left blank CONTRACT 11647 STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 23rd day of January, 2014, by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Allen Butler Construction Inc of the City of Ransom Canyon, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: t ITB 14-11647-TF 34th Street Reconstruction of Roadway and Pedestrian Elements and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Conditions of Agreement. Allen Butler Construction Inc.'s bid dated December 26, 2013 is incorporated into and made a part of this agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. CONTRACTOR: .,., l By: PRINTEAM I TITLL COMPLETE ADDRESS: Company AIA 1�dki cf �, 17t C- ` Address ; ,J-4 , City', State, Zi s AT 'I Corporate Seeetary CITY OF LUBBOC T WNER): By: Glen ert n, Mayor AT YkST: _L:') u,,- , 3-47 Rebec a Garza, City Secretary APPROVE A TO NTENT: Neil Welch, P.E., CFM, Assistant City Engineer APPR . AST FORM: Chad Weaver, Assistant City Attorney r_. This page intentionally left blank GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT This page intentionally left blank GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER 2. 9 5 Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit Allen Butler Construction Inc., who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative Neil Welch, P.E., CFM, Assistant City Engineer, so designated who shall inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular manner under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors shall act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificates, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors shall look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. The City reserves the right to approve or disapprove the selection of any subcontractor(s). - 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an Office of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 10. 12 Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative shall 1 check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative shall not be required to snake exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor shall Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative shall not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES I] All lines and grades shall be furnished whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension shall be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades are needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. !e 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the - contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) 1 calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be i deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any Office, agent, or employee of the Owner, or _ Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all ' modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. j I' Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. l , 18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment are permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work shall be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests shall be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. in In If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or i consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be_� uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the s I requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such I 4 �_i tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS c. The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in __. the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in ( said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The teen "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been �- charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. 25 In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind shall be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C) (1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its Offices, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change shall be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self- insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverage's shall be submitted prior to contract execution. PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS ADDITIONAL INSURED ON AUTO/GENERAL LIABILITY ON A PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY BASIS TO INCLUDE PRODUCTS OF COMPLETE OPERATIONS. PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. COPIES OF THE ENDORSEMENTS ARE REQUIRED. a ME C. 0 E Commercial General Liability Insurance (Primary Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required) The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Personal Injury & Advertising Injury W/ Heavy Equipment Endorsement XCU To Include Products of Complete Operation Endorsement Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, - NOT REQUIRED. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation Required) The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance - NOT REQUIRED. Umbrella Liability Insurance - NOT REQUIRED. Worker's Compensation or Employers Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation required) Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $1,000,000 Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC- 82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity shall have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and 9 G. c (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who shall provide services on the project shall be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: 10 (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; - (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental i- entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the i current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee. " "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 800-372-7713 or 512-804- 4000 (www.tdi.state.tx.us) to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage; " and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll L- amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; 11 i 29 U, (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: `By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage Ll showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; H (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES C Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its Offices, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, material men and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract 12 i and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its Offices, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its Offices, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its Offices, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. i 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are _ essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. 13 111 Kra 37 If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $1,362.50 PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in 14 M !il _ 42. which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its Offices, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall 15 43. 44 45. determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condenmed work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. 16 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time 17 become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 18 50. BONDS r' The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $50,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so p furnished. 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. �F? 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to detennine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP f The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and z condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form shall not i be utilized in any way,manner or form in the construction of or incorporation into the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the ' City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If 19 I the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or ' asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 56. NONAPPROPRIATION All funds for payment by the City under this contract are subject to the availability of an annual appropriation for this purpose by the City. In the event of non -appropriation of funds by the City Council of the City of Lubbock for the goods or services provided under the contract, the City will terminate the contract, without termination charge or other liability, on the last day of the then -current fiscal year or when the appropriation made for the then -current year for the goods or services covered by this contract is spent, whichever event occurs first. If at any time funds are not appropriated for the continuance of this contract, cancellation shall be accepted by the Seller on thirty (30) days prior written notice, but failure to give such notice shall be of no effect and the City shall not be obligated under this contract beyond the date of termination. 57. THE CITY RIGHT TO AUDIT At any time during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years thereafter the City or a duly authorized audit representative of the City, or the State of Texas, at its expense and at reasonable times, reserves the right to audit Contractor's records and books relevant to all services provided under this Contract. In the event such an audit by the City reveals any errors/overpayments by the City, Contractor shall refund the City the full amount of such overpayments within thirty 30 days of such audit findings, or the City, at its option, reserves the ' Y( ) Y g� tY� P .3 right to deduct such amounts owing the City from any payments due Contractor. 58. NON -ARBITRATION The City reserves the right to exercise any right or remedy available to it by law, contract, equity, or otherwise, including without limitation, the right to seek any and all forms of relief in a court of competent jurisdiction. Further, the City shall not be subject to any arbitration process prior to exercising its unrestricted right to seek judicial remedy. The remedies set forth herein are cumulative and not exclusive, and may be exercised concurrently. To the extent of any conflict between this provision and another provision in, or related to, this document, this provision shall control, 20 Y r- DAVIS BACON WAGE DETERMINATIONS This page intentionally left blank EXHIBIT A General Decision Number: TX130007 01/04/2013 TX7 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20120007 j State: Texas { Construction Types: Heavy and Highway Counties: Armstrong, Carson, Crosby, Ector, Irion, Lubbock, Midland, Potter, Randall, Taylor and Tom Green Counties in Texas. j {' HEAVY & HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/04/2013 * SUTX2011-002 08/02/2011 Rates Fringes CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER (Paving & Structures) ... $ 13.55 ELECTRICIAN ...................... $ 20.96 y2' FORM BUILDERMORM SETTER Paving & Curb ............... $ 12.36 Structures ..................$ 13.52 LABORER Asphalt Raker ............... $ 12.28 Flagger.....................$ 9.30 Laborer, Common ............. $ 10.30 Laborer, Utility ............ $ 11.80 Work Zone Barricade Servicer....................$ 10.30 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR: Asphalt Distributer ......... $ 14.87 Asphalt Paving Machine ...... $ 13.40 Broom and Sweeper ........... $ 11.21 Crane, Lattice Boom 80 Tons or Less ................$ 16.82 Crawler Tractor Operator .... $ 13.96 Excavator, 50,000 lbs or less ........................ $ 13.46 -j Front End Loader Operator, Over 3 CY................... $ 12.77 Front End Loader, 3CY or less ........................ $ 12.28 Loader/Backhoe.............. $ 14.18 Mechanic .................... $ 20.14 Milling Machine .............$ 15.54 Motor Grader, Rough ........ $ 16.15 Motor Grader, Fine .......... $ 17.49 Pavement Marking Machine .... $ 16.42 Reclaimer/Pulverizer........ $ 12.85 Roller, Asphalt ............. $ 10.95 Roller, Other ............... $ 10.36 Scraper ..................... $ 10.61 Spreader Box ................ $ 12.60 Servicer ......................... $ 13.98 Steel Worker (Reinforcing) ....... $ 13.50 TRUCK DRIVER Lowboy -Float ................ $ 14.46 Single Axle ................. $ 12.74 Single or Tandem Axle Dump..$ 11.33 Tandem Axle Tractor with Semi ........................ $ 12.49 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is union or non -union. 2 1 Union Identifiers An identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" denotes that the union classification and rate have found to be prevailing for that classification. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2011. The first four letters , PLUM, indicate the international union and the four -digit number, 0198, that follows indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. The date, 07/01/2011, following these characters is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate/collective bargaining agreement which would be July 1, 2011 in the above example. Union prevailing wage rates will be updated to reflect any changes in the collective bargaining agreements governing the rates. 0000/9999: weighted union wage rates will be published annually each January. Non -Union Identifiers Classifications listed under an "SU" identifier were derived from survey data by computing average rates and are not union rates; however, the data used in computing these rates may include both union and non -union data. Example: SULA2004-007 5/13/2010. SU indicates the rates are not union majority rates, LA indicates the State of Louisiana; 2004 is the year of the survey; and 007 is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. A 1993 or later date, 5/13/2010, indicates the classifications and rates under that identifier were issued as a General Wage Determination on that date. Survey wage rates will remain in effect and will not change until a new survey is conducted. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on f-. i a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis -Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION 4 Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT C Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. G1 This page intentionally left blank SPECIFICATIONS This page intentionally left blank 1) Specifications 1 Cl OF ubbo tl, k iFY15 City of Lubbock 34t" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue Lubbock, Texas October 2013 PSC Project # 01269212 I' Specifications ticityub ck TEXAS City of Lubbock 34th Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue Lubbock, Texas Jed � �l �' �f�aH.a1M►►►►►i.�F►► ►.�N� Q: October 2013 171� PSC Project # 01269212 10/07/13 PARKHILL MITH&COOPED �- 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT INFORMATION SCSpecial Conditions..................................................................................................................... 9 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01020 Measurement and Payment......................................................................................................11 01027 Applications for Payment.......................................................................................................... 2 01028 Change Order Procedures.......................................................................................................... 3 01039 Coordination and Meetings........................................................................................................ 2 01100 Summary of Work..................................................................................................................... 2 01140 Work Restrictions...................................................................................................................... 3 01310 Progress Schedules.................................................................................................................... 2 01322 Photographic Documentation..................................................................................................... 2 01330 Submittal Procedures................................................................................................................. 5 01356 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWP3) ....................................................................... 4 01400 Quality Requirements................................................................................................................ 5 01420 References................................................................................................................................. 5 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls......................................................................................... 5 01555 Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling..................................................................................... 2 01576 Waste Material Disposal............................................................................................................ 2 01600 Product Requirements................................................................................................................ 3 01700 Contract Closeout...................................................................................................................... 2 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02050 Removal, Demolition and Salvage............................................................................................. 4 02083 Adjusting Manholes and Valves................................................................................................ 3 02084 Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers............................................................................................ 3 02151 Trench Safety Systems............................................................................................................... 3 02221 Removing Existing Pavements.................................................................................................. 2 02300 Earthwork.................................................................................................................................. 9 02317 Excavation and Backfill for Structures...................................................................................... 7 02318 Borrow.......................................................................................................................................3 02320 Backfill Materials for Structures............................................................................................ 5 02513 Pavement Markings................................................................................................................... 5 02518 Interlocking Concrete Pavers..................................................................................................... 4 02631 Storm Sewer.............................................................................................................................. 5 02633 Extending Culvert and Storm Drain Pipe.................................................................................. 1 02665 Water Works Piping, Valves and Fittings................................................................................10 02730 Sanitary Sewer Line Construction............................................................................................. 7 02741 Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving.......................................................................................................... 13 02751 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement...................................................................................... 21 02764 Pavement Joint Sealants............................................................................................................. 5 02900 Seeding...................................................................................................................................... 5 01269212 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 1 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork.............................................................................. 03200 Concrete Reinforcement....................................................................... 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete........................................................................ 03410 Precast Concrete................................................................................... 03412 Reinforced Concrete Pipe..................................................................... 03414 Inlets and Junction Boxes..................................................................... DIVISIONS 4 —16 Not Used APPENDICES APPENDIX A - TxDOT SPECIFICATIONS Item 300 Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions Item 401 Flowable Backfill Item 416 Drilled Shafts Item 421 Hydraulic Cement Concrete Item 432 Riprap Item 585 Ride Quality for Pavement Surfaces Item 610 Roadway Illumination Assemblies Item 618 Conduit Item 620 Electrical Conductors Item 624 Ground Boxes Item 628 Electrical Services Item 636 Aluminum Signs Item 644 Small Roadside Sign Supports and Assemblies Item 662 Work Zone Pavement Markings Item 668 Prefabricated Pavement Markings Item 672 Raised Pavement Markers ................................. 4 ................................. 2 ...............................13 ................................. 6 ................................. 4 ................................. 2 01269212 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 2 10/13 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following: DIVISION 2 — SITE WORK 02518 Interlocking Concrete Pavers 10/07/13 01269212 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY 10/13 BNC-1 341h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SPECIAL CONDITIONS 341h STREET PAVING IMPROVEMENTS QUAKER AVENUE TO INDIANA AVENUE SC-1 SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED Add the following to paragraph 9, Substantially Complete, of the General Conditions of the Agreement: For this project, any given Milestone will not be considered Substantially Complete until all traffic lanes not affected by temporary transitions into the next Milestone and all driveways within the given Milestone are fully striped with temporary or permanent pavement markings and opened to traffic. SC-2 CONTRACTOR'S LAYOUT OF WORK Add the following to paragraph 10, Layout, of the General Conditions of the Agreement: The Contractor is responsible for supplying the appropriate equipment and services to adequately layout the work in a timely manner. Vertical and horizontal control points and benchmarks are provided in the Plans. SC-3 COORDINATION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND SPECIAL PROVISIONS The specifications, accompanying plans (including additional plans for non -site specific work), special provisions, change orders, and supplemental agreements are intended to work together and be interpreted as a whole. Numerical dimensions govern over scaled dimensions. Special provisions govern over plans, (including general notes), which govern over standard specifications and special specifications. Job - specific plan sheets govern over standard plan sheets. Notify the Engineer promptly of any omissions, errors, or discrepancies discovered so that necessary corrections and interpretations can be made. Failure to promptly notify the Engineer will constitute a waiver of all claim for misunderstanding or ambiguities that result from the errors, omissions, or discrepancies discovered. SC-4 KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE Add the following to paragraph 11, Keeping of Plans and Specifications Accessible: The Contractor will be furnished five (5) half size and one (1) full size copies of the plans and specifications. Additional sets of plans and specifications may be purchased by Contractor at Contractor's expense. 01269212 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 10/13 SC_ 1 (_ r� t, t 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SC-5 LINES AND GRADES Add the following to Paragraph 13, Lines and Grades: Lines and grades are indicated in the drawings for the Contractor's layout of the work, therefore the Owner's Representative has furnished lines and grades to the Contractor. SC-6 SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION Add the following to paragraph 15, Superintendence and Inspection, of the General Conditions of the Agreement: The Owner's Representative may also appoint contracted individuals and business entities to serve in the capacity of subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors. Such subordinate inspectors are defined as Resident Project Representatives (RPR). For the purpose of this paragraph, ENGINEER is defined as a contracted licensed engineer, or engineering firm, subordinate to Owner's Representative. RPR is the ENGINEER'S agent during construction, will act as directed by and under the supervision of ENGINEER, and will confer with ENGINEER regarding RPR's actions. RPR's dealings in matters pertaining to the on -site work shall in general be with ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR keeping OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE advised as necessary. RPR's dealings with subcontractors shall only be through or with the full knowledge and approval of CONTRACTOR. RPR shall generally communicate with OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE with the knowledge of and under the direction of ENGINEER. SC-6.1 Liaison: Serve as ENGINEER's liaison with CONTRACTOR, working principally through CONTRACTOR's superintendent and assist in understanding the intent of the Contract Documents, and assist ENGINEER in serving as OWNER's liaison with CONTRACTOR when CONTRACTOR's operations affect OWNER'S on -site operations. Assist in obtaining from OWNER additional details or information, when required for proper execution of the Work. SC-6.2 Shop Drawings and Samples: Receive samples which are furnished at the site by CONTRACTOR, and notify ENGINEER of availability of samples for examination. Advise ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR of the commencement of any Work requiring a Shop Drawing or sample if the submittal has not been approved by the ENGINEER. SC-6.3 Review of Work, Rejection of Defective Work, Inspections and Tests: Conduct on -site observations of the Work in progress to assist ENGINEER in determining if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract y' Documents. =' 01269212 SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC-2 10/13 _ I 341h Street Paving Improvements 1 Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue t- Report to ENGINEER whenever RPR believes that any Work is unsatisfactory, faulty or defective or does not conform to the Contract Documents, or has been damaged, or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, test or approval required to be made; and advise ENGINEER of Work that RPR believes should be corrected or rejected or should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval. Verify that tests, equipment and systems startups and operating and maintenance training are conducted in the presence of appropriate personnel, and that CONTRACTOR maintains adequate records thereof; and observe, record and report to ENGINEER appropriate details relative to the test procedures and startups. Accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies having jurisdiction over the Project, record the results of these inspections and report to ENGINEER. SC-6.4 Reports: Furnish ENGINEER periodic reports as required of progress of the Work and of CONTRACTOR's compliance with the progress schedule and schedule of Shop Drawing and sample submittals. Consult with ENGINEER in advance of scheduled major tests, inspections or start of important phases of the Work. Report immediately to ENGINEER and OWNER upon the occurrence of any accident. SC-6.5 Payment Requests: Review applications for payment with CONTRACTOR for compliance with the established procedure for their submission and forward with recommendations to ENGINEER, noting particularly the relationship of the payment requested to the schedule of values or unit price bid items. Work completed and materials and equipment delivered at the site but not incorporated in the Work. SC-6.6 Limitations of Authority: Resident Project Representative: Shall not authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials or equipment, unless authorized by ENGINEER. Shall not exceed limitations of ENGINEER's authority as set forth in the General Conditions of the Agreement or the Contract Documents. Shall not undertake any of the responsibilities of CONTRACTOR, subcontractors or f CONTRACTOR's superintendent. i� Shall not advise on, issue directions relative to or assume control over any aspect of the { means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction unless such advice or directions are specifically required by the Contract Documents. J5 01269212 SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC-3 10/13 E� 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue Shall not advise on, issue directions regarding or assume control over safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Shall not accept Shop Drawing or sample submittals from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. Shall not authorize OWNER to occupy the Project in whole or in part. Shall not participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted by others except as specifically authorized by ENGINEER. SC-7 CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor will be required to maintain all existing roadway surfaces within project limits throughout the duration of the project. This item will not be a pay item. Add the following to paragraph 16, Contractor's Duty and Superintendence, of the General Conditions of the Agreement. The person representing the Contractor (i.e., superintendent) shall be considered the single, authorized point of contact between the Owner's Representative and the Contractor. Designations of different persons of contact, or contact designations that divide, or attempt to divide, the Contractor's accountability and responsibility under the contract documents shall be grounds for suspending the operations of the Contractor without recourse on the part of the Contractor. The Contractor's designated superintendent shall be physically and locally present until such time as the Owner issues notice of final completion. f.Y 11 14 5F.11 TK11i:1X63aMytel - 114 517.y Add the following to paragraph 18, Character of Workers, of the General Conditions of the Agreement: The provisions regarding the character of workmen shall also include persons of female gender wherever the words "man" or "men" are used. The provisions for character of workmen shall be construed to include, but not be limited to, the Contractor's superintendent, Contractor's subcontracted work forces, subcontractor superintendents, laborers, and supervisors. When such workmen are discharged from the work, such workmen shall not be associated with the work in any capacity or function whatsoever. SC-9 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION General Condition Paragraph 21 is retained in its entirety. Add the following to Paragraph 21, Observation and Testing of the General Conditions of the Agreement: The Contractor shall make available, or leave in place, for the Owner's observing or testing party equipment for the safe ingress and egress pertaining to the item of work. Such equipment shall include, but not be limited to, oxygen monitors, toxic gas monitors, flammable gas indicators, hoists, harnesses, ladders, excavation shoring, lighting, and ventilation. Failure to make sufficient 01269212 SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC - 4 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue equipment and monitors available for Owner's observation of the work shall be prima facie evidence that the work does not comply with the Contract Documents, specifications, or drawings. SC-10 DEFINITIONS For the following paragraphs of these Special Conditions, ENGINEER shall be defined as the Owner's primary consultant which is "Prime Consultant" and consultants to "Prime", namely "Sub -Consultant". SC-11 DOCUMENT OWNERSHIP Contractor, and any Subcontractor or Supplier or any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Owner (i) shall not have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the drawings, specifications or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer, and (ii) shall not reuse any of such drawings, specifications, other documents or copies on extensions of the project or any other project without written consent of the Owner and ENGINEER and specific written verification or adaptation by ENGINEER. M*Blp .Yi1:31.11 7VNITO1XII101a II AIftVski 11CONN 9[ORI The ENGINEER conducted subsurface utility investigations through Rios Group, Inc. The existing utilities layout included in the Plans is, in part, developed from the findings of this investigation. The subsurface investigations, samples and reports were prepared for design purposes, and any reliance on the samples and report data by the Contractor is at the sole risk of the Contractor. Any conclusions, interpretations or opinions based on samples and reports data are the sole province of the Contractor. Neither the Owner nor the ENGINEER assumes any liability or responsibility for the various differing subsurface utilities that may be encountered, whether or not shown in samples or soil subsurface utility reports. Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer with respect to: ■ the completeness of such drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes, including but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR and safety precautions and program incident thereto, or ■ other data, interpretations, opinions and information shown or indicated in such drawings, or ■ any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such data, interpretations, opinions or information. 01269212 SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC - 5 10/13 i j 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue s SC-13 UNDERGROUND FACILITIES For the purpose of this Special Provision, Underground Facilities shall be defined as all pipelines, conduits, ducts, wires, cables, manholes, vaults, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal, traffic or other control systems or water. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to OWNER or ENGINEER by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the General Conditions of the Agreement: ■ OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and ■ The cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility for: ■ (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, ■ (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, ■ (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and ■ (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities as provided in paragraph 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders and repairing, to the satisfaction of the facility owner, any damage thereto resulting from the Work. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the site which was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby of performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required to prevent injury, loss of life, or damage to property), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to OWNER and ENGINEER. SC-14 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR -EQUAL" ITEMS 01269212 10/13 SC-14.1 Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or -equal" item, or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer under the following circumstances: SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC-6 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SC-14.2 "Or -Equal": If in ENGINEER'S sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by ENGINEER as an "or - equal" item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in ENGINEER's sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for acceptance of proposed substitute items. SC-14.3 Substitute Items: If in ENGINEER's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR does not qualify as an "or -equal" item under subparagraph SC-14.2, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow ENGINEER to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. The procedure for review by the ENGINEER will include the following as supplemented in the General Requirements and as ENGINEER may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. Requests for the review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by ENGINEER from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. If CONTRACTOR wishes to furnish or use a substitute item of material or equipment, CONTRACTOR shall first make written application to ENGINEER for acceptance thereof, certifying that the proposed substitute will perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, be similar in substance to that specified and be suited to the same use as that specified. The application will state the extent, if any, to which the evaluation and acceptance of the proposed substitute will prejudice CONTRACTOR's achievement of Substantial Completion on time, whether or not acceptance of the substitute for use in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute and whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. All variations of the proposed substitute from that specified will be identified in the application and available maintenance, repair and replacement service will be indicated. The application will also contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from acceptance of such substitute, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by the resulting change, all of which will be considered by ENGINEER in evaluating the proposed substitute. ENGINEER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute. SC-14.4 CONTRACTOR'S Expense: All data to be provided by CONTRACTOR in support of any proposed "or -equal" or substitute item will be at CONTRACTOR's expense. SC-14.5 Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of consti action is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of 01269212 SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC- 7 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue construction acceptable to ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information to allow ENGINEER, in ENGINEER's sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The procedure for review by ENGINEER will be similar to that provided in subparagraph ' SC-14.3. SC-14.6 Engineer's Evaluation: ENGINEER will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to paragraphs SC-14.3 and SC-14.5. ENGINEER will be the sole judge of acceptability. No "or -equal" or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized without ENGINEER's prior written acceptance which will be evidenced by either a Change Order or an approved Shop Drawing. OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR's expense a special performance guarantee of other surety with respect to any "or -equal" or substitute. ENGINEER will record time required by ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants in evaluating substitutes proposed or submitted by CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraphs SC-14.3 and SC-14.5 and in making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) occasioned thereby. Whether or not ENGINEER accepts a substitute item so proposed or submitted by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for the charges of ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants for evaluating each such proposed substitute item. SC-15 RECORD DOCUMENTS CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show all changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to ENGINEER for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, Samples and Shop Drawings will be delivered to ENGINEER for OWNER. Failure to maintain and safeguard these required documents shall be grounds for the Owner to issue a non-compliance directive to the Contractor and withhold all payments until such non-compliance is remedied. SC-15 SUBMITTAL REVIEW One initial submittal of shop drawings, samples, "or -equal" items and other required submittals and one resubmittal of the same item will be reviewed by the Engineer at no cost to the Contractor. Subsequent reviews for resubmittals of the same item will be reviewed at a cost to the Contractor of $100.00 per man-hour. Such cost shall be deducted from progress payments to the Contractor and result in a reduction of total contract price. 01269212 SPECIAL CONDITIONS SC - 8 10/13 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SC-16 PARTIAL PAYMENTS Add the following to paragraph 42, Partial Payments, of the General Conditions of the Agreement: Partial payments requested by the Contractor may include materials delivered, but not yet incorporated into the project. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the work but delivered and suitably stored at the site, or at another location agreed to in writing, then the application for payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale or invoice warranting that the equipment and materials are free and clear of all liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by the appropriate property insurance and other arrangements to protect the Owner's interest therein. Materials and equipment shall not be considered for partial payment if stored where the Owner can not confirm the quantities or otherwise seize and secure the equipment and materials in the event that the Contractor defaults on the work. Materials and equipment that are eligible for partial payment will be carried as "Materials on Hand" on the partial pay estimates and then moved from "Materials on Hand" to completed items of the work once those materials and equipment are incorporated into the work. Partial payments for completed items of work will reflect adjustments for prior partial payments made to the Contractor, for the same completed items of work, for "Materials on Hand". Partial payments for "Materials on Hand" shall be subject to the five -percent retainage. Only actual invoice amounts and actual freight invoice amounts for delivered items to the locations stated above will be eligible for partial payment as "Materials on Hand". Materials on hand shall be limited to materials manufactured at a manufacturing facility such as precast reinforced concrete pipe, fiberglass pipe, precast manholes, manhole frames and covers, check valves, grates, signal masks, light poles, and so forth. Items not considered as materials on hand are those items which require further processing for use in the project such as cements, aggregates, asphalts, fill materials, concrete, riprap, topsoil, sod, seed, earthen materials, paint, glass beads, raised pavement markers, etc. The final determination of whether a substance or item qualifies as materials on hand is the sole province of the Owners representative under General Conditions Paragraph 14. SC-17 WORKING DAY A Working Day is defined as any day, Monday through Friday, excluding national holidays when weather or other conditions permit, as determined by the Engineer, the performance of Work for a continuous period of at least 7 hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. If work requiring supervision is performed on a non Working Day, and weather or other conditions permit, as determined by the Engineer, the performance of work for at least 6 hours between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., a Working Day will be charged. Refer to Specification Section 01140 for work restrictions. END SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01269212 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 10/13 SC-9 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01020 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. The following sections shall be used to define measurements and payments for this project. The unit price bid on each item as stated in the bid proposal shall include furnishing all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment, and materials except as otherwise specified, necessary or incidental to complete the various items of work in accordance with the plans and specifications. Cost of work or materials shown on the plans or called for in the specifications and on which no separate payment is made shall be included in the bid prices on the various pay items. Payment will not be made for any item that is not complete, including all associated incidental work. Only those items indicated on bid documents and plan sheets will be included for construction and payment. B. References to "OWNER" within this section shall include OWNER'S representatives. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOBILIZATION A. Mobilization shall include costs associated with move -in related equipment and labor, bid bond, performance and construction bonds and insurance related for this project. This would include the establishment and removal of offices, plants and facilities, movement of personnel, equipment, and supplies to and from the project or the vicinity of the project site to begin work or complete work on Contract Items. This Item will be measured by the lump sum as the work progresses. B. Payment. Partial payments of the lump sum bid for mobilization will be as follows. The adjusted Contract amount for construction Items as used below is defined as the total Contract amount less the lump sum for mobilization. 1. Payment will be made upon presentation of a paid invoice for the payment bond, performance bond, and required insurance. The combined payment for bonds and insurance will be no more than 10% of the mobilization lump sum. 2. Payment will be made upon verification of documented expenditures for plant and facility setup. The combined amount for all these facilities will be no more than 10% of the mobilization lump sum. 3. When 1% of the adjusted Contract amount for construction Items is earned, 50% of the mobilization lump sum bid will be paid. Previous payments under this Item will be deducted from this amount. 4. When 5% of the adjusted Contract amount for construction Items is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid will be paid. Previous payments under the Item will be deducted from this amount. 01269212 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01020 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 5. When 10% of the adjusted Contract amount for construction Items is earned, 90% of the mobilization lump sum bid will be paid. Previous payments under this Item will be deducted from this amount. 6. Payment for the remainder of the lump sum bid for "Mobilization" will be made on the final estimate after final acceptance of the project. 3.2 PREPARE RIGHT-OF-WAY A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per station for preparing right-of-way for construction, including the removal and proper disposal of all items necessary for construction that are not specifically shown on the plans to be paid for under other items. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all work, materials, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work, and the repair of any damage made to items intended to remain. 3.3 ASPHALT REMOVAL (ROADWAY) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per square yard for the area of existing asphalt pavement actually removed, regardless of thickness. Existing pavement structure will be considered all layers of material between existing roadway surface and top of existing subgrade. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for sawing, milling, separating for salvage, hauling to City of Lubbock Stockpile location as specified, all materials, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work, and the repair of any damaged items to remain in place. The Contractor shall ensure that the Owner has the opportunity to measure the square yards of pavement surface prior to removal. If pavement surface is removed without measurement by the Owner, no payment will be made for that removal. 3.4 CONCRETE REMOVAL (ROADWAY) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per square yard for the area of existing concrete pavement actually removed, regardless of thickness. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for sawing, breaking, loading, hauling and salvaging or legally disposing of the material, all labor and equipment necessary to complete the work, and the repair of any damaged items to remain in place. The Contractor shall ensure that the Owner has the opportunity to measure the square yards of sidewalk prior to removal. If concrete is removed without measurement by the Owner, no payment will be made for that removal. 3.5 ASPHALT REMOVAL (DRIVEWAY/PARKING LOT) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per square yard for the area of existing asphalt parking lot actually removed, regardless of thickness. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for sawing, loading, hauling and salvaging or legally disposing of the material (milling of parking lots is not necessary), all labor and equipment necessary to complete the work, and the repair of any damaged items to remain in place. The Contractor shall ensure that the Owner has the opportunity to measure the square yards of concrete prior to removal. If concrete is removed without measurement by the Owner, no payment will be made for that removal. 1 01269212 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01020 - 2 10/13 t, j 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue Ir., E i3.6 CONCRETE REMOVAL (DRIVEWAY/PARKING LOT) ll A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per square yard for the area of existing concrete driveways (or alleys) and parking lots actually removed, regardless of thickness. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for sawing, breaking, loading, hauling and salvaging or legally disposing of the material, all labor and equipment necessary to complete the work, and the repair of any damaged items to remain in place. The Contractor shall ensure that the Owner has the opportunity to measure the square yards of areas to be removed prior to removal. If concrete is removed without measurement by the Owner, no payment will be made for that removal. 3.7 SIDEWALK REMOVAL A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per square yard for the area of existing concrete sidewalk (including ADA ramps), actually removed, regardless of thickness. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for sawing, breaking, loading, hauling and salvaging or legally disposing of the material, all labor and equipment necessary to complete the work, and the repair of any damaged items to remain in place. The Contractor shall ensure that the Owner has the opportunity to measure the square yards of concrete prior to removal. If concrete is removed without measurement by the Owner, no payment will be made for that removal. 3.8 CURB AND GUTTER REMOVAL A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per linear foot for the length of existing concrete curb and gutter actually removed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for sawing, breaking, loading, hauling and salvaging or legally disposing of the material, all labor and equipment necessary to complete the work, and the repair of any damaged items to remain in place. The Contractor shall ensure that the Owner has the opportunity to measure the length of curb and gutter prior to removal. If concrete is removed without measurement by the Owner, no payment will be made for that removal. 3.9 SIGN ASSEMBLY REMOVAL A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price for each sign assembly actually removed, regardless of size. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for removal and legal disposal of complete sign, including mount and foundation, repair of removal area where necessary, and all labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. The Contractor shall ensure that the Owner has the opportunity to count the number of sign assemblies prior to removal. If sign assemblies are removed without counting by the Owner, no payment will be made for that removal. 3.10 LIGHT POLE REMOVAL A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price for each light pole actually removed, regardless of size. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for removal and legal disposal of complete light pole, including fixture and foundation, repair of removal area where necessary, proper disconnection from and treatment of power source, and all labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. The Contractor shall ensure that the Owner 01269212 10/13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01020 - 3 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue has the opportunity to count the number of light poles prior to removal. If light poles are removed without counting by the Owner, no payment will be made for that removal. 3.11 CONCRETE PIPE REMOVAL A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per linear foot for the length of existing concrete pipe actually removed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for breaking, loading, hauling and salvaging or legally disposing of the material, all labor and equipment necessary to complete the work, and the repair of any damage to items intended to remain in place. The Contractor shall ensure that the Owner has the opportunity to measure and examine the length and condition of pipe prior to removal. Any pipe that is removed without measurement by the Owner will not be paid for. A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price for each existing curb inlet, including extensions, actually removed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for sawing, breaking, loading, hauling and salvaging or legally disposing of the material, all labor and equipment necessary to complete the work, and the repair of any damage made to items intended to remain in place. Compacted embankment for inlets that are to be relocated will be paid for under item 3.13 "Embankment". 3.13 EMBANKMENT A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price, per cubic yard for embankment installed, as quantified on the plans. Limit of payment for embankment is finished subgrade elevation for all roadway surfaces. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all borrow material, hauling, shaping, density controlled subgrade preparation, testing, and all labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.14 EXCAVATION A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per cubic yard for excavation, as quantified on the plans. Limit of payment for excavation is finished subgrade elevation for all roadway surfaces. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all hauling, shaping, density controlled subgrade preparation, materials, testing, and all labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.15 OVER EXCAVATION A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per cubic yard for excavation beyond the limits shown in the plans, as directed by the Engineer, to treat or replace deficient subgrade. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for subgrade removal and replacement with suitable material, or approved treatment of unsuitable material, all borrow material, compaction, testing, and all labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 01269212 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01020 - 4 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue is 3.16 FLOWABLE BACKFILL A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per cubic yard for flowable backfill actually installed at the direction of the Engineer. Where the Contractor chooses on his own accord to install flowable fill, payment will not be made directly, but will be subsidiary to the pertinent item(s). The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all materials, testing, materials, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.17 CONTINUOUSLY REINFORCED CONCRETE PAVEMENT (CRCP) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per square yard for the continuously reinforced concrete paving actually installed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all materials, testing, reinforcing, finishing, curing, sawing, sealing, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.18 HIGH -EARLY STRENGTH CONTINUOUSLY REINFORCED CONCRETE PAVEMENT (HES) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per square yard for high -early strength continuously reinforced concrete cement actually installed, where directed by the Engineer. Where the Contractor chooses, on his own accord, to install high -early strength concrete, payment will be made under Item 3.17, "Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavement." The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all materials, testing, reinforcing, finishing, curing, sawing, sealing, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.19 PAVEMENT JUNCTION TERMINAL A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per Pavement Junction Terminal (Ty 1) actually installed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for materials (including concrete and asphalt), testing, reinforcing, finishing, curing, sawing, sealing, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. Separate payment for Ty 2 Pavement Junction Terminals will not be made directly, but shall be considered subsidiary to 3.17, "Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavement." 3.20 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per linear foot for curb and gutter actually installed. At intersections and driveways, or where curb and gutter is placed monolithically with the pavement, the limits of curb and gutter will be from the theoretical lip to the theoretical back of curb. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all materials, testing, finishing, curing, sawing, sealing, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.21 CONCRETE MEDIANS A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per square yards for concrete median actually installed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all materials, testing, reinforcing, finishing, curing, sawing, sealing, painting of median nose, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 1 01269212 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01020 - 5 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.22 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price for each manhole adjusted to meet proposed grades, regardless of the size or extent of adjustment. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for all excavation and flowable backfill as required, repair of adjusted area where necessary, and all materials, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.23 VALVE ADJUSTMENT A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price for each valve adjusted to meet proposed grades, regardless of the size or extent of adjustment. Removal of abandoned valves will not be paid for by the Owner, but will be subsidiary to pavement removal. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for all excavation and flowable backfill as required, repair of adjusted area where necessary, and all materials, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.24 PARKING LOT PAVEMENT REPAIR A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per square yard for parking lot pavement repair actually completed, where directed by the Engineer. Parking lot pavement damaged by the Contractor will not be paid for by the Owner, but will be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for sawing, breaking and removal of the damaged area to the depth indicated in the plans and replacement base and surface material detailed in the plans. Where the Engineer determines further removal depth is necessary, the additional depth of removal and replacement will be paid for under Item 3.15, "Over Excavation". The unit bid price for parking lot repair shall also include all materials, testing, hauling, sealing, traffic control, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per ton for HMAC Ty C actually installed to construct temporary ramps for traffic control, to level -up parking lots for positive drainage, or at other locations as directed by the Engineer. Measurements will be based on weights printed on truck tickets or by multiplying the measured volume by 110 lb/sy-in, as applicable to the location. The unit price bid shall include all materials, testing, sawing, sealing, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.26 CURB INLET (TY C) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price for each curb inlet actually installed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all materials, testing, finishing, curing, excavation, compacted backfill (including flowable backfill), sealing, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.27 CURB INLET EXTENSION A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price for each curb inlet extension actually installed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all materials, testing, finishing, 01269212 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01020 - 6 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue curing, excavation, compacted backfill (including flowable backfill), sealing, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.28 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE (CL III) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per linear foot for reinforced concrete pipe actually installed. The unit price bid shall include all materials, connections (including junction boxes as necessary), jointing, sealing, bedding, excavation, compacted backfill, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. Flowable backfill around the pipe, as shown on the plans, will be paid for under item 3.16 "Flowable Backfill". 3.29 CONCRETE DRAINAGE FLUME A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per square yard for concrete drainage flume actually installed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all materials, testing, finishing, curing, sawing, sealing, patching behind the flume, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.30 TEMPORARY DRIVES (RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per square yard for temporary driveways constructed of recycled asphalt pavement actually installed, where directed by the Engineer. Where the. Contractor chooses, on his own accord, or to satisfy the requirements of the contract, to install temporary drives, no payment will be made by the Owner. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all materials, shaping, compacting, hauling, constructing, maintaining, traffic control, removal of the temporary driveway, and all labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.31 ALLEY AND DRIVEWAY RETURNS A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price, per square yard for concrete alley and driveway returns actually installed. Concrete intersection returns will be paid for at the unit bid price for under Item 3.17, "Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavement." The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all materials, testing, reinforcing, finishing, curing, sawing, sealing, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.32 DECORATIVE CONCRETE SIDEWALK (5") A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per square yard for 5-inch thick decorative concrete sidewalk (including the brick paver portion and concrete portion of the decorative pattern) actually installed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all materials, testing, fiber reinforcing, finishing, curing, jointing, sealing, traffic control, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.33 DECORATIVE CONCRETE SIDEWALK (6") (REINFORCED) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per square yard for 6-inch thick decorative reinforced concrete sidewalk (including the brick paver portion and concrete portion of the decorative pattern) actually installed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for -' 01269212 10/13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01020 - 7 t- 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue all materials, testing, steel reinforcing, finishing, curing, jointing, sealing, traffic control, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.34 STANDARD CONCRETE SIDEWALK (5") A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per square yard for 5-inch thick standard concrete sidewalk actually installed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all materials, testing, fiber reinforcing, finishing, curing, jointing, sealing, traffic control, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.35 CONCRETE SIDEWALK CURB A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per linear foot for concrete sidewalk curb actually installed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all materials, testing, reinforcing, finishing, curing, jointing, sealing, traffic control, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.36 ACCESSIBLE CURB RAMP (TY 1) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price for each accessible curb ramp of the various types actually installed. The general limits of payment are indicated on the plans, but no additional compensation will be made by the Owner for slight modifications necessary to meet field conditions. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all materials, testing, reinforcing, finishing, curing, jointing, sealing, concrete pavers, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.37 PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON ASSEMBLY 1 A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price for each pedestrian push button assembly actually installed. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for foundation, mounting hardware, electrical connections and testing, repair of damaged areas, and all labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.38 SODDING A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per square yard for sodding actually installed where shown on the plans. Sod required to backfill the edges of construction will not be paid for by the Owner, but will be considered subsidiary to the pertinent items. No more than 50% of the unit bid price shall be paid until sod has established to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Price shall be complete compensation for soil preparation, sodding, mulching, fertilizing, watering, mowing until final completion of the associated Milestone, and all other incidentals necessary to establish grasses where, and as specified on the plans. 3.39 PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS (STRIPE) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per linear foot for actual stripe (excluding skips) of permanent pavement markings, of the various widths and colors actually installed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for approved removal of all conflicting r markings, all materials, testing, preparation, traffic control, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. -1 E 01269212 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01020 - 8 t- 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.40 SEE "PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS (STRIPE)" ABOVE. 3.41 SEE "PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS (STRIPE)" ABOVE. 3.42 SEE "PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS (STRIPE)" ABOVE. 3.43 SEE "PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS (STRIPE)" ABOVE. 3.44 SEE "PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS (STRIPE)" ABOVE. 3.45 PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS (ARROW) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price for each permanent pavement marking arrow, of the various types, actually installed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all materials, testing, preparation, traffic control, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.46 PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS (RAISED) (TY I-C) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price for each permanent raised pavement marking of the various types actually installed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for all materials, testing, preparation, traffic control, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.47 SEE "PERMANENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS (RAISED)" ABOVE. 3.48 SMALL SIGN ASSEMBLY A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price for each small sign assembly actually installed, regardless of the number of placards or posts. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for foundations, mounting hardware, and all other materials, testing, preparation, traffic control, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.49 BARRICADES AND TRAFFIC CONTROL A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per month for barricades and traffic control devices provided in conformance with the plans and the 2009 Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). Failure to meet the requirements of the plans or the 2009 �- MUTCD during any month may forfeit payment from the Owner for that month. No additional payment will be made for traffic control required for remediation of work, or where the Contractor elects, and is allowed by the Engineer, to set up an alternative traffic ._: control plan. Where field or safety conditions warrant additional devices, the Contractor shall provide these devices for no additional compensation. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for all traffic control devices not included in separate items, erecting and implementing, maintaining, and removal of the traffic control devices. 01269212 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01020 - 9 10/13 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.50 PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE BOARD (PCMB) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price for each PCMB actually provided. The unit price bid shall include delivery, insurance, maintenance, set-up, moving, programming, and all labor and equipment necessary. The PCMB shall become the property of the City of Lubbock upon completion of the project. 3.51 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per linear foot for actual stripe (excluding skips) of the temporary pavement markings of the various widths and colors actually installed. The unit price bid shall include full compensation for approved removal of all conflicting markings, all materials, testing, preparation, traffic control, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work, including the removal of the temporary stripe upon completion of its use. 3.52 SEE "TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS" ABOVE. 3.53 SEE "TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS" ABOVE. 3.54 SEE "TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS" ABOVE. 3.55 SEE "TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS" ABOVE. 3.56 PORTABLE WATER BARRICADES (FURNISH) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per linear foot for water barricade actually provided. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for providing the water barricades, and the replacement of the barricades, if necessary. Payment for furnishing water barricades will be made as the barricades are implemented into the project in accordance with the traffic control plan. 3.57 PORTABLE WATER BARRICAES (PLACE & REMOVE) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per linear foot for water barricade actually placed in accordance with the traffic control plan at the beginning of each phase of construction. Barricade movement within any particular phase (for example, to open or close a driveway) will not be paid for by the Owner, but will be subsidiary to this item. Neither will removal of the barricades be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this lu item. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for all materials, connection, filling and draining, set up, maintaining, removing, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.58 PORTABLE WATER BARRICADES (FURNISH AND INSTALL) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per linear foot for water barricade actually installed. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for all materials, connection, filling and draining, set up, maintaining, labor and equipment necessary to complete the 11 work, including the removal of the barricades upon completion of the project. 01269212 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01020 - 10 ij 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.59 PORTABLE WATER BARRICADES (MOVE) A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per linear foot of water barricade actually moved between phases of construction. Barricade movement within any particular phase (for example, to open or close a driveway) will not be paid for by the Owner, but will be subsidiary to this item. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for all materials, connection, filling and draining, set up, maintaining, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.60 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN A. Payment will be made at the lump sum bid price for the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SW3P) management. Partial payments will be made on a pro-rata basis as a percentage of the construction contract duration. The sum of the partial payments made for SW3P shall not exceed 90% of the lump sum price until final cleanup and removal of all SW3P measures is completed. Failure to properly implement or maintain adequate SW3P measures may forfeit payment from the Owner for this item. No additional payment will be made where SW3P measures are required because of work being remedied due to not meeting the requirements of the plans and specifications. Where field conditions warrant additional devices, the Contractor shall provide these devices for no additional compensation. The unit price bid shall include furnishing and installing all materials, filing Notice of Intent/Termination forms, inspections, maintenance, and all measure and/or incidentals required for compliance with NPDES Permit. 3.61 DECORATIVE ILLUMINATION POLE ASSEMBLY A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per each decorative illumination pole assembly actually installed. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for furnishing and installing complete light pole assembly, including internal conductors and foundation; testing and all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.62 PVC CONDUIT A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per linear foot for PVC conduit actually installed. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for furnishing, installing, boring, trenching, compaction -controlled backfilling, repair of disturbed areas, and all other materials, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.63 ELECTRICAL CONDUCTOR A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price per linear foot for electrical conductor of the various types actually installed. Conductors internal to roadway illumination assemblies or wiring equipment will not be paid for directly but will be considered subsidiary to the pertinent bid items. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for furnishing and installing, repair of disturbed areas, and all other materials, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. �y 01269212 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01020 - 11 10/13 t; 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.64 SEE "ELECTRICAL CONDUCTOR" ABOVE. 3.65 JUNCTION BOX A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price for each electrical ground junction box of the various types and sizes actually installed. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for furnishing and installing the boxes, repair of disturbed areas, and all other materials, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. 3.66 SEE "JUNCTION BOX" ABOVE 3.67 SEE "JUNCTION BOX" ABOVE 3.68 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. Payment will be made at the unit bid price for each electrical service connection made for roadway illumination. The unit bid price shall include full compensation for furnishing and installing necessary connectors, switches, etc.; fees, permits, and coordination with utility companies; testing, repair of disturbed areas, and all other materials, labor and equipment necessary to complete the work. END OF SECTION 01269212 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01020 - 12 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01027 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 1�'71-1E�1� �I►`I-� 7� �I 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of Applications for Payment. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Agreement: Contract Sum/Price and unit prices. B. General Conditions: Progress Payments and Final Payment. C. Section 01020 — Measurement and Payment. D. Section 01028 - Change Order Procedures: Procedures for changes to the Work. E. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. F. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.4 FORMAT A. EJCDC 1910-8-E - Application for Payment including continuation sheets when required, or Owner forms, or Owner -approved form of the Contractor. B. For each item, provide a column for listing: Item Number; Description of work; Scheduled Value, Previous Applications; Work in Place; Authorized Change Orders; Total Completed; Percentage of Completion; Balance to Finish; and Retainage. 1.5 PREPARATION OF APPLICATIONS A. Present required information in typewritten form or computer generated Excel Spreadsheet. B. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. C. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored products. D. List each authorized Change Order as an extension on continuation sheet, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. E. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified in Section 01700. 1.6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit four copies of each Application for Payment. B. Submit an updated construction schedule with each Application for Payment. Payment will not be made until an up-to-date schedule is received. C. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. r 01269212 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENTS 01027 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 1.7 SUBSTANTIATING DATA A. When Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. B. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show Application number and date, and line item by number and description. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used 10,21 ] 63114"190 01269212 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENTS 01027 - 2 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01028 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittals. B. Documentation of change in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time. C. Change procedures. D. Stipulated Price change order. E. Unit price change order. F. Time and material change order. G. Execution of change orders. H. Correlation of Contractor submittals. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01027 - Applications for Payment. B. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. C. Section 01600 - Product Requirements. D. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit name of the individual authorized to receive change documents, and be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes to the Work. B. Change Order Forms: EJCDC 1910-8-B Change Order, Owner's form, or other form approved by Owner. 1.5 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT SUM/PRICE AND CONTRACT TIME A. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of changes in the Work. B. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of the quotation. C. Provide additional data to support computations: 1. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. 2. Taxes, insurance and bonds. 3. Overhead and profit. 4. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 5. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. 01269212 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01028 - 1 10/13 l_. 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 6. If subcontracted, provide subcontractor documentation according to General Contract Conditions and this specification. Show Contractor markup on subcontractor changes. D. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time and material basis, with additional information: 1. Origin and date of claim. ' 2. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 3. Time records and wage rates paid. 4. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. Show Contractor markup on subcontractor work. 1.6 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. The Engineer will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as authorized by the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions by letter. B. The Engineer may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications and a change in Contract Time for executing the change. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within 7 days. C. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to the Engineer, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION A. Engineer may issue a document, signed by the Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. B. The document will describe changes in the Work, and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. C. Promptly execute the change in Work. 1I1:�Iy1IN:�►C��I'7.-�1 A. Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's maximum price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Engineer. 1.9 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER 0 A. For pre -determined unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis. Eli B. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not pre -determined, execute Work under a Construction Change Authorization. C. Changes in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and [- Material Change Order. r� 01269212 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01028 - 2 10/13 F 1_� 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 1.10 TIME AND MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER A. Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. B. Engineer will determine the change allowable in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. C. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. D. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work. 1.11 EXECUTION OF CHANGE ORDERS A. Execution of Change Orders: Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. 1.12 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum/Price. B. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub -schedules to adjust time for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. C. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used 01269212 10/13 END OF SECTION CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01028 - 3 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01039 L01103717i►/_rI19MV.111e17►51DIpyVIffi y PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. B. Progress meetings. C. Preconstruction meeting. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various Sections of the Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. B. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. C. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Engineer will schedule a meeting with the required attendees. B. Attendance Required: Owner, Engineer, Contractor and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Distribution of executed Contract Documents. 2. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products and progress schedule. 3. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract and the Engineer. 4. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures. 5. Schedules. 6. Scheduling activities of construction testing lab. 7. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 8. Owner's requirements. 9. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 10. Survey layout. 11. Security and housekeeping procedures. 12. Procedures for testing. 13. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 01269212 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039 - 1 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 14. Inspection and acceptance of equipment or improvements put into service during construction period. 15. Other items as deemed necessary by Owner or Engineer. D. Engineer will record minutes and distribute copies to participants. 1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum bi-weekly intervals. B. Engineer will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, and preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. E. Engineer will record minutes and distribute copies to participants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used 01269212 10/13 END OF SECTION COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039 - 2 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01100 E.Yij►� 105, 1F.11 W 9] 5[1a11 t7 C14 PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work covered by Contract Documents B. Contractor use of site. C. Owner occupancy. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures. 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Identification: City of Lubbock, Lubbock, Texas. Project consists of paving improvements to 34`' Street from Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue. 1. Location: Lubbock, Texas. 2. Owner: City of Lubbock, Texas. B. Verbal Summary: Without force or effect on requirements of the Contract Documents a brief description of the Project is as described in 1.4(A). 1.5 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have full use of the premises for construction operations, including use of the site. The Contractor's use of the premises is limited only by the Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of the Project. B. Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Confine operations to areas within contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy. 2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner, the Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used 01269212 SUMMARY OF WORK 01100 - 1 10/13 34`" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01269212 SUMMARY OF WORK 01100 - 2 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Use of premises. B. Special scheduling requirements. C. Working period. D. Utility cutovers and interruptions. E. Noise restrictions. F. Occupancy requirements. 1.3 USE OF PREMISES A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. B. Driveways and Entrances: 1. Provide occupants a minimum of 5 days notice before closure or alterations to occupant's driveways or parking lots. 2. Provide Engineer with driveway construction plan, and evidence of occupant's approval, prior to closure or alteration. 3. Provide occupants with at least one (1) driveway suitable to traffic in and out of the location and readily accessible to 34`' Street at all times. Certain conditions may require more than the minimum number of driveways to function properly. 4. Schedule construction to minimize obstruction of driveways and entrances. 5. Refer to the Traffic Control Plan for further limitations. C. Contractor Access: 1. Provide access for Contractor's employees from/to Site. Private property shall not be used by the Contractor, its employees, suppliers, or subcontractors for parking or material storage without written approval from the property owner. 1.4 SPECIAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS A. Have materials, equipment, and personnel required to perform the work at the site prior to the commencement of the work. B. Permission to interrupt any utility service shall be requested in writing a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to the desired date of interruption. C. Identify on the construction schedule each factor which constitutes a potential interruption to operations. 01269212 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 1.5 WORKING PERIOD A. Working Hours - Regular working hours shall be within an 11 hour period between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, and a nine hour period between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. on Saturday. Saturday work shall be restricted to those activities that do not require observation by the Owner. The Owner reserves the right, at the Owner's discretion, to not allow work when it interferes with holiday times and traffic. No work shall be performed on the following holiday periods or days: 1. New Year's Day (observed) 2. Memorial Day Holiday (observed) 3. Independence Day Holiday (observed) 4. Labor Day Holiday (observed) 5. Thanksgiving Day Holiday plus the three days following Thanksgiving Day. 6. Christmas Day (observed) plus the day preceding Christmas Day. B. Work Outside Regular Hours - Work outside regular working hours requires Owner's approval. Make application 7 Calendar days prior to such work to allow arrangements to be made by the Owner for inspecting the work in progress, giving the specific dates, hours, location, type of work to be performed, contract number and project title. Based on the justification provided, the Owner may approve work outside regular hours. During periods of darkness, the different parts of the work shall be lighted in a manner approved by the Owner. Lighting shall be such that it does not cause nuisance conditions. 1.6 NOISE RESTRICTIONS A. 75 dB limit at face of nearest structure during normal daylight hours. B. 65 dB limit at face of nearest structure during evening and nighttime hours in or near residential areas and for 24-hour working conditions that have received Owner approval. Evening and nighttime hours shall be defined as 6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. C. Contractor shall keep on site OSHA -approved hand portable sound measurement equipment for both the Owner's and the Contractor's use for measuring noise levels. 1.7 ADVANCE NOTICE A. Contractor shall provide a minimum of five business days advance written notice of construction to businesses and residences along the construction route. 1. The advance written notice shall be in the form of a single -page flyer to be placed by hand by the Contractor's forces in door handles or handed to applicable individuals at each route building. 2. The text for the advance written notice will be provided by the Owner in written form and electronic form. 3. Reproduction shall be at the Contractor's expense. 4. Distribution shall be at the Contractor's expense. 5. Single -page flyers shall be of a paper or post -card color other than white to direct the recipient's attention to the information. 6. The text shall contain the anticipated beginning date of inconvenience to the recipient and the anticipated duration of that inconvenience. 7. The dates shall encompass the duration of driveway inconveniences and potential noise to the recipients on a single city block (i.e., the dates and durations shall reflect the time that the city block of interest will be affected by non-trafficability). 01269212 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 - 2 10/13 t. 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue B. Prior to closing any street or thoroughfare for any length of time, the Contractor shall notify the following a minimum of 5 business days in advance: 1. All Emergency Services - Fire, Police, EMS 2. City of Lubbock Solid Waste Department 3. Lubbock Independent School District 4. Durham Transportation 5. Citibus 6. TxDOT 7. Mail Carrier 8. Lubbock Avalanche Journal 9. Press release for local radio and television stations 1.8 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Obtaining water for construction is Contractor's sole responsibility. B. Water is available from the potable water system of the City of Lubbock for construction purposes. The Contractor is responsible for all charges and arrangements for water consumption from the potable water system. The Contractor shall make such arrangements directly with the City of Lubbock Water Utilities Department. The City will not furnish potable water free of charge for the construction work. Contractor is responsible for any required metering and hauling. C. Water from park area lakes shall not be used for construction. D. This section does not preclude Contractor from seeking other water sources for use in construction. Such water sources shall meet the purity requirements for the intended use. Such arrangements for water from other sources are the responsibility of the Contractor. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORK AREA LIMITS A. Prior to any construction, the Contractor shall mark the areas that need not be disturbed under this contract. Isolated areas within the general work area which are to be saved and protected shall also be marked or fenced. Monuments and markers shall be protected before construction operations commence. Where construction operations are to be conducted during darkness, the markers shall be visible. The Contractor's personnel shall be knowledgeable of the purpose for marking and/or protecting particular objects. END OF SECTION 01269212 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 - 3 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01310 PROGRESS SCHEDULES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Format. B. Content. C. Revisions to schedules. D. Submittals. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01027 - Applications for Payment. B. Section 01100 - Summary of Work. C. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. 1.4 FORMAT A. Sequence of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of Work. B. Scale and Spacing: To provide space for notations and revisions. C. Sheet Size: Minimum 8 1/2 x 11 inches. D. Maintain monthly updates to schedule. 1.5 CONTENT Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. A. Identify each item by specification Section number. B. Provide sub -schedules to define critical portions of the entire Schedule. C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month. D. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, samples, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Engineer. 1.6 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each activity. B. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes. 01269212 PROGRESS SCHEDULES 01310 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue C. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit initial Schedules within 10 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. After review, resubmit required revised data within 10 days. B. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment. C. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by Engineer. 1.8 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of reviewed Schedules to Engineer's project file, Subcontractors, suppliers, and other concerned parties. B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated in Schedules. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01269212 PROGRESS SCHEDULES 01310 - 2 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: I. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Preconstruction videotapes. 4. Periodic construction videotapes. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures for submitting construction photographs. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit three complete sets of preconstruction photographs or videotape to Engineer. Produce photographs or videotapes as close to beginning of construction as practicable. All three sets will be retained by the Owner and the Engineer. 1. Identification: On back of each print, videotape, or CD, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of photographer. C. Name of Engineer. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. 2. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files with each submittal of prints. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit images that have the same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used 01269212 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PHOTOGRAPHS, GENERAL A. Field Office Prints: Retain one set of prints of preconstruction photographs in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs the same as for those submitted to Engineer. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take color photographs of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, or as directed by Engineer. 1. Take photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to the property before starting the Work. 2. Take photographs of existing structures either on or adjoining the property to accurately record the physical conditions at the start of construction. B. Periodic Construction Photographs: As needed to document damage either directly related to or inadvertently related to the Contractor's operations, photograph the area in question and provide to Engineer. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION VIDEOS, GENERAL A. Narration: Describe scenes on video by audio narration by microphone while video is recorded. Include description of items being viewed, recent events, and planned activities. Describe vantage point, indicating location, and direction (by compass point). 3.4 CONSTRUCTION VIDEOS A. Preconstruction Video: Before starting construction, record video of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, or as directed by Engineer. 1. Show existing conditions on and adjacent to Project site before starting the Work. 2. Show existing structures either on or adjoining Project site to accurately record the physical conditions at the start of construction. 3. Existing condition videos shall cover the entire project route. 4. Show protection efforts by Contractor. B. Periodic Construction Documentation: As needed to document damage either directly related to or indirectly related to the Contractor's operations, video the area in question and provide to Engineer. END OF SECTION 01269212 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 10/13 01322 - 2 �_ j 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Owner's or Engineer's responsive action. Submittals maybe rejected for not complying with requirements. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Owner's or Engineer's approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Owner and Engineer reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Progress Schedules" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Owner's or Engineer's receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Owner or Engineer will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. If more than five submittals are transmitted for review within any five-day period, the time allowed for review will be increased to 21 days. 3. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Engineer's consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 01269212 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 4. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 5. Allow 15 days for processing each resubmittal. Each resubmittal will count toward the submittal count in any five-day period in paragraph 1 A.C.2 above. 6. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. D. Format 1. Submit all submittals digitally using .PDF file extension. Each submittal shall be a single .PDF file including transmittal letter. Multiple files for the same submittal will not be accepted. 2. Submittals in any other format, including .ZIP files, will be rejected. 3. Hard copies will not be accepted. 4. To ensure each page is legible, .PDF pages of drawings shall be the same size/scale as a hard copy. Where applicable, scale symbols should be provided to indicate scale. Illegible submittals will be rejected. 5. Submittals shall be uploaded to Engineer's Info Exchange website. E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. F. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a consecutively numbered transmittal form. Owner and/or Engineer will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Owner or Engineer on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal. 2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Transmittal Form: Use Contractor's business transmittal form. Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Submittal number. d. Destination (To:). e. Source (From:). f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. j. Remarks. k. Signature of transmitter. G. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. H. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Owner or Engineer in connection with construction. 01269212 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit five copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. The five copies will be retained by the Owner or Engineer. Any additional copies that the Contractor may need for his operations will be in addition to the five copies required. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's product specifications. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Standard color charts. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Printed performance curves. f. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. g. Application of testing agency labels and seals. h. Notation of coordination requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Schedules. e. Design calculations. f. Compliance with specified standards. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 2. Sheet Size: Submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 11 x 17 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit five copies of each shop drawing submittal. Owner and Engineer will retain all five copies. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 01269212 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory -authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory -authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. D. Construction Videotapes: Comply with requirements in Section 01322 - Photographic Documentation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Owner or Engineer. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 OWNER'S AND ENGINEER'S ACTION A. General: Owner or Engineer will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Owner or Engineer will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Owner or Engineer will provide an action review sheet and will mark appropriately to indicate action to be taken, as follows: 1. No exception taken. 2. Make corrections noted. 3. Revise and resubmit. 4. Rejected. 5. The submittal review by the Engineer indicates that the Engineer checked for: a. General conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Any action shown is subject to the requirements of the plans and specifications. Contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and 01269212 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; and performing his work in a satisfactory manner. C. Informational Submittals: Owner or Engineer will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01269212 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 5 10/13 341" Street Paving Improvements , Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01356 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWP3) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall implement the Storm Water Pollution Prevention measures specified in the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWP3) in a manner which will meet the requirements of the Texas Pollution Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000. The Contractor shall be responsible for any fines or penalties assessed by the appropriate regulatory agency for failure to make required inspections, failure to properly document those inspections, failure to adequately implement and adjust the storm water pollution prevention measures specified in the SWP3 to adequately control pollutants, and/or any other fines or penalties assessed by TCEQ or EPA for failure to comply with any part of the permit requirements. The Contractor shall submit a Notice of Intent and a Notice of Termination independently of the Owner. B. The document provided in the plans is to serve as a skeleton for the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and is provided only as a convenience to the Contractor. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that his Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan is in full compliance with the TPDES permit. The Contractor shall modify the document as necessary to show implementation plans, dates of construction activities, best management practices, inspection reports, and any other information pertinent to the plan or otherwise required to ensure that the plan remains in compliance with permit. C. Fines levied against the Owner by the TCEQ for the Contractor's failure to comply with and maintain the SWP3 shall be paid by the Contractor. D. Storm water must be adequately routed during construction operations in the same general direction as currently occurs. 1.3 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS A. General 1. Structural measures shall be implemented to divert flows from exposed soils, temporarily store flows, or otherwise limit run-off and the discharge of pollutants from exposed areas of the site. Structural practices shall be implemented as specified in the SWP3 and in a timely manner during the construction process to minimize erosion and sediment run-off. B. Stabilized Ingress/Egress 1. Stabilized access to and from the construction site shall be installed as soon as practical and in accordance with the SWP3. 2. In all cases, Contractor shall ensure that any soil tracked off -site is cleaned from existing roads, alleys, and any adjacent properties as soon as possible. The Contractor or other responsible parry shall check for any pollutants (mud, silt, sand, cement, construction materials, etc.) tracked or washed off -site and perform necessary clean-up measures at the end of each work day. 01269212 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWP3) 01356 - 1 10/13 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue C. Silt Fences/Diversion Berms 1. The Contractor shall provide silt fences and/or diversion berms as a temporary structural practice to minimize erosion and sediment runoff. Silt fences and/or diversion berms shall be properly installed to effectively retain sediment - immediately after completing each phase of work where erosion would occur in the form of sheet and rill erosion (e.g. clearing and grubbing, excavation, embankment, j and grading). 4 D. Sand/Gravel Bags 1. The Contractor may provide sand/gravel bags as a temporary structural practice to minimize erosion and sediment runoff. Bags shall be properly placed to effectively retain sediment immediately after completing each phase of work (e.g., clearing and grubbing, excavation, embankment, and grading) in each independent runoff area (e.g., after clearing and grubbing in an area between a ridge and drain, bags shall be placed as work progresses, bags shall be removed/replaced/relocated as needed for work to progress in the drainage area). Sand/gravel bags must remain in good condition, or they shall be replaced. E. Site Stabilization 1. Contractor shall disturb the least amount of site area as possible. -- 2. Stabilization measures may include, but are not limited to, any of the following measures: a. Temporary or permanent seeding or sodding. b. Mulching. C. Geotextiles. d. Vegetative buffer strips. e. Paving. Stabilization measures shall be implemented in accordance with the SWP3. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS FOR SILT FENCES A. Filter Fabric 1. The geotextile shall comply with the requirements of ASTM D 4439, and shall consist of polymeric filaments which are formed into a stable network such that filaments retain their relative positions. The filament shall consist of a long -chain synthetic polymer composed of at least 85 percent by weight of ester, propylene, or amide, and shall contain stabilizers and/or inhibitors added to the base plastic to make the filaments resistant to deterioration due to ultraviolet and heat exposure. Synthetic filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of six months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 to 120 degrees F. The filter fabric shall meet the following requirements: L 01269212 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWP3) 01356 - 2 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue FILTER FABRIC FOR SILT FENCE PHYSICAL PROPERTY TEST PROCEDURE REQUIREMENT Grab Tensile ASTM D 4632 100 lbs. min. Elongation ASTM D 4632 30% max. Trapezoid Tear ASTM D 4533 55 lbs. min. Permittivity ASTM D 4491 0.2 sec-1 AOS (U.S. Std. Sieve) ASTM D 4751 20-100 B. Silt Fence Stakes and Posts 1. The Contractor may use either wooden stakes or steel posts for fence construction. Wooden stakes utilized for silt fence construction shall have a minimum cross section of 2 inches by 2 inches when hardwood is used and 2 inches by 4 inches when pine is used, and shall have a minimum length of 4 feet. Steel posts (standard "U" or "T" section) utilized for silt fence construction shall have a minimum weight of 1.33 pounds per linear foot and a minimum length of 4 feet. C. Identification Storage and Handling 1. Filter fabric shall be identified, stored and handled in accordance with ASTM D 4873. 2.2 COMPOUNDS FOR STRAW BALES A. Straw Bales 1. The straw in the bales shall be stalks from oats, wheat, rye, barley, rice or from grasses such as Byhalia, Bermuda, etc., furnished in air dry condition. The bales shall have a standard cross section of 14 inches by 18 inches. All bales shall be either wire -bound or string -tied. The Contractor may use either wooden stakes or 3/8" rebar to secure the straw bales to the ground. Wooden stakes utilized for this purpose shall have minimum dimensions of 2 inches x 2 inches in cross section and shall have a minimum length of 3 feet. Rebar utilized for securing straw bales shall have a minimum diameter of 3/8" and a minimum length of 3 feet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN A. The Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWP3) will be provided by the Contractor. Contractor must keep a copy of the SWP3 on site at all times. B. A completed Notice of Intent (NOI) form must be submitted a minimum of 48 hours prior to start of construction. No work will be permitted until NOI is filed. C. Contractor shall maintain SWP3 in accordance with the TPDES permit to ensure that the SWP3 reflects current project conditions and remains in compliance with the TPDES permit. 01269212 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWP3) 01356 - 3 t 10/13 [I 3ƒhStreet Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue m Indiana Avenue D. Acompleted Notice of Termination (NOT) form must be submitted prior to finalization 0 this contract. E. The Contractor sha!! ftim&§ Owner with copy of NOIand NOT £\D OFSECTION 0129 12 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN( WP) 01356-4 1RI3 34`h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY Conditions and A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Construction materials testing services are required by the Contractor in order for the Engineer to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Materials Testing (CMT): CMT includes collecting of samples, performing well-defined test procedures, and reporting of such data. The Contractor will provide CMT for this project. 1. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions performed by the Contractor during and after execution of the Work with results provided to the Engineer to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Engineer. B. Construction Materials Engineering (CME): The assessment of a construction material for quality, appropriateness and acceptability is considered an engineering activity. The Contractor will not provide CME services for this project. CME services will be performed by the Engineer. 1. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions and procedures performed by the Contractor before and during execution of the Work. Engineer will determine if the results of the Contractor's activities, actions and procedures are acceptable in guarding against defects and deficiencies and in ensuring that proposed construction complies with requirements. 01269212 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1 10/13 J 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue r_. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For individuals employed by Contractor who will perform testing as required by the various specification Sections, submit at least 30 days prior to being used on the project the capabilities and experience of such individuals and the types of tests that the individual is qualified to perform. For outside testing agency employed by Contractor, submit at least 30 days prior to being used on the project the name, address and manager of such testing agency and the types of tests that the agency is qualified to perform. Such testing agency shall be acceptable to Owner prior to being used on the project. B. Reports: Prepare and submit written reports within 14 days following the date of the test that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency. If individual employed by Contractor, use Contractor's name, address and telephone number. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests. 5. Names of individuals making tests. 6. Description of the work and test method. 7. Identification of material, product and specification Section. 8. Complete test data. 9. Test results. 10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing. 11. Provide a statement indicating if the test passed or failed according to the specified Contract Document requirements and the applicable specification Section. 12. Name and signature of individual performing the test if employee of Contractor, or name and signature of testing agency responsible person. C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Where a Professional Engineer is required in the specification Sections, this means a Professional Engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. D. Testing Agency or Contractor Employee Qualifications: An agency or Contractor Employee with the experience and capability to conduct testing indicated, according to reference standards, and that has the capability and experience in the types of tests to be performed. E. Preconstruction Testing: Testing agency shall perform preconstruction testing with specified requirements for performance and test methods. The Contractor shall not perform preconstruction testing except through a third -party testing agency. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit written report containing the results of each test to Contractor. State in each report whether tested work passes or fails the specified Contract Document requirements and the applicable specification section. 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's or Engineer's responsibility, such services may be performed by Owner's own forces or by a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner or Engineer will furnish Contractor with names, addresses and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged by Owner. 01269212 10/13 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 2 : t 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2. Owner may elect to have own forces, or a third -party testing agency, observe and report on competency of Contractor's personnel performing quality control testing, inspect and report on Contractor's quality control testing equipment and the calibration of that equipment, and inspect and report on Contractor's procedures for quality assurance of construction materials tests and test reports. 3. Results from tests performed by Owners forces or third party testing agency remain the property of the Owner. The third party agency personnel are obligated to report results of such tests only to the Owner or Engineer, not the Contractor. The Owner or Engineer shall inform the Contractor of such results at their discretion. 4. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of reported deficiencies revealed by the above inspections and observations. The Contractor shall correct such deficiencies. Should such deficiencies remain uncorrected, then the amount of the work represented by the deficiencies will be deemed as not conforming to the requirements of the - contract documents and the specifications. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Provide quality control services required in the various specification Sections. 1. Where third -party testing agency is engaged by Contractor, notify testing agency sufficiently in advance of the time and date when work that requires testing will be performed. 2. Contractor shall not engage the same testing agencies as the Owner, unless the Owner agrees in writing to such engagement. 3. Where testing is indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit written reports in duplicate of each testing service, whether performed by Contractor's personnel or Contractor -engaged testing agency. Such reports shall include failing tests and retests. 4. Testing requested by Contractor and not required by Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 1 5. Cooperate with Owner and Engineer for Owner's testing of work. Once the Owner or Engineer has given prior notification to the Contractor that confirmation testing by the Owner is to be performed, the Contractor shall provide or leave in place trench shields, ladders, elevators, lifts, or other equipment or temporary construction related to safety, access, and ingress -egress such that the Owner's testing representative can have safe accessibility to the specific site to be tested. Failure to provide these items when confirmation testing is scheduled shall be considered prima facie evidence that the work does not meet specifications and the Owner has the option of withholding payment for the work quantity that the test would represent. 6. Where Contractor's personnel are performing tests, provide individuals with appropriate equipment to perform the tests in accordance with the test method requirements. Provide alternate equipment where the specified test method cannot be applied, and where alternative test methods and equipment must be employed to provide the necessary quality control. C. Retesting: Regardless of whether original tests were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting, for construction that revised or replaced work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents." D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel and necessary equipment to perform required tests and inspections. i 1. Notify Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the work during performance of its services. f i 01269212 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 3 l 10/13 f 3 S 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2. Prepare a test report and state in each report whether tested and inspected work passes or fails the specified requirements. 3. Submit a written report, in triplicate, of each test. 4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field -curing of test samples. 5. Additional associated services required of Contractor for testing access are listed in the specification Sections. 6. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 7. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 8. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality assurance and quality control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 2. Notify Owner's Representative at least 1 day prior to when testing of any kind is to be performed. G. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a preliminary schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality -control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for Notice to Proceed. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Engineer, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching. 01269212 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 4 10/13 'i 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality -control services. 01269212 10/13 END OF SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS r, 01400 - 5 Lj _i 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01420 REFERENCES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Summary of Industry Standards. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": The term "approved," when used to convey Owner's or Engineer's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to Owner's or Engineer's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" mean directed by Owner or Engineer, requested by Owner or Engineer, and similar phrases. D. "Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on Drawings or to other paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the user locate the reference. E. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. G. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. H. "Project site" is the space available for performing construction activities. 1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. 01269212 REFERENCES 01420 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue B. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Owner or Engineer for a decision before proceeding. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Owner or Engineer for a decision before proceeding. C. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.aashto.org ACI American Concrete Institute/ACI International (248) 848-3700 www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org Al Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org AISC American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (212) 642-4900 www.ang,gM ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asee.org (703) 295-6300 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials (610) 832-9585 www.astin.org 01269212 REFERENCES 01420 - 2 10/13 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.com CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.oM CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org FM Factory Mutual System (See FMG) FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com GRI Geosynthetic Research Institute (610) 522-8440 www.drexel.edu/pri NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (301) 587-1400 www.nrinca.org NSA National Stone, Sand and Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.ajZgre ate es.org (703) 525-8788 PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.s&.= TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 705-9898 UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 704-405C www.ul.com (847) 272-880C 01269212 10/13 REFERENCES 01420 - 3 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (800) 214-4321 www.bocai.org (708) 799-2300 CABO Council of American Building Officials (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and (909) 472-4100 Mechanical Officials (The) www.iapmo.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (800) 284-4406 www.icbo.org (562) 699-0541 ICC International Code Council (703) 931-4533 (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.iccsafe.or SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, (205) 591-1853 Inc. www.sbcci.org E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers (601) 634-2355 CRD Standards www.usace.anny.mil CFR Code of Federal Regulations (888) 293-6498 www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr (202) 512-1530 EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 260-2090 www.epa.gov FED -STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (Available from DOD, GSA, and NIBS) 01269212 REFERENCES 01420 - 4 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 (See CFR 29) (202) 219-5000 www.osha.M TCEQ Texas Commission on Environment Quality (806) 796-7092 www.tceq.state.tx.us (512) 239-1000 TxDOT Texas Department of Transportation (806) 745-4411 www.dot.state.tx.us PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used 01269212 10/13 END OF SECTION REFERENCES 01420 - 5 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Drainage water service. 2. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water facilities. 3. Electric power service. 4. Telephone service. 5. Cellular telephone service. 6. High speed internet service. C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Temporary roads and paving. 2. Project identification and signs. 3. Field offices. 4. Storage and fabrication sheds. 5. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. D. Protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Environmental protection. 2. Stormwater control. 3. Barricades, warning signs and lights. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01356 — Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWP3). B. Section 01555 - Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling. C. Section 02741 - Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving for construction and maintenance of asphalt paving for temporary roads and paved areas. 1.4 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Engineer and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Owner. 2. Owner's forces. 3. Engineer. 4. Resident Project Representative. 5. Testing agencies. 01269212 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 1 10/13 z 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 6. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all parties engaged in construction at project site if Contractor connects to City sewer system. C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for water used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. Relocate or remove temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Owner or Engineer. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Portable Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain -link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts. C. Water: Potable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. 01269212 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 2 10/13 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations. 1. Provide adequate capacity. 2. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements or property cannot be used for that purpose. B. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off -site in a lawful manner. 1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge. 2. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by sewer department officials. 3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material. D. Electric Power Service: Install electric power service underground, unless overhead service must be used. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location in conformance with National Electrical Code. E. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common -use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate telephone line for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. In field office with more than two occupants, install a telephone for each additional occupant. b. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's field office. e. Contractor's emergency contact number. f. "On -call" personnel. g. Engineers' office. h. Owner's office. i. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide an answering machine or voice mail service on field office telephone. F. Cellular Telephone Service: Furnish RPR a portable cellular telephone with voice mail capability for use in making and receiving telephone calls when away from field office. 01269212 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 3 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue l G. High Speed Internet Service —Provide temporary high speed internet connection throughout the construction period. Connection can be through cable modem or DSL. (' Provide all equipment necessary for a single point connection to the project computer. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. B. Traffic Controls: Provide temporary traffic controls at junction of temporary roads with public roads. Include warning signs for public traffic and "STOP" signs for entrance onto public roads. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections for temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. D. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification signs with the information listed below. Install signs to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. Submit the layout and dimensions of the sign to the Owner. The sign and lettering shall be of sufficient size to be visible and legible at 100 feet distance. 1. Provide project signs to be placed at both ends of corresponding project limits. 2. Project sign to include the following information. List all items on separate lines of the sign. a. City of Lubbock, Texas b. Capital Improvements C. Project Logo 34th Street _ REcONUVOON f (A digital format will be provided by the Engineer for reproduction). d. Contractor: (include name of contractor and location of their main headquarters) e. Engineer: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc., Lubbock, Texas f. Project Serving the Citizens of Lubbock, Texas 3. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs. 4. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. 5. Construct signs of exterior -type Grade B-B high -density concrete form overlay plywood. Support on posts or framing of preservative -treated wood or steel. 6. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior -grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. 7. Maintain project signs until acceptance of the project. ` 01269212 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 4 10/13 { 34`n Street Paving Improvements .t Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste -collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. 1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited. F. Common -Use Field Office: Provide an insulated, weathertight, air-conditioned and heated field office for use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel and meetings of 10 persons at Project site. Contractor shall provide weekly housekeeping service. 1. Furnish and equip office as follows: a. Desk and four chairs, four -drawer file cabinet, a plan table, a plan rack, and .' bookcase. b. Water cooler for drinking water and private toilet complete with water closet, lavatory with hot and cold water, and medicine cabinet with mirror. C. Drinking water for water cooler, disposable cups, toilet paper, paper towels, hand soap, first aid kit, and fire extinguisher. 2. Maintain field office and repair, as necessary, in a timely manner until acceptance of the project by the Owner. G. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services as needed. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces on -site. 3.4 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Prevent water -filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, or no later than Substantial Completion. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements. END OF SECTION 01269212 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 10/13 's 01500 - 5 #n } 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01555 BARRICADES, SIGNS AND TRAFFIC HANDLING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. This Item shall govern for providing, installing, moving, replacing, maintaining, cleaning and removing upon completion of work, all barricades, portable barriers, signs, portable changeable message signs, cones, lights and other such type devices and of handling traffic as indicated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer or Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BARRICADES, SIGNS AND DEVICES A. All barricades, signs and other types of devices listed above shall conform to details shown on the plans or those indicated in the Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD). All traffic control devices shall be crashworthy according to the guidelines set forth in the National Cooperative Highway Research Program (NCHRP) Report 350. 2.2 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Materials, handling and installation shall be in accordance with Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 2004 (TxDOT) Item 662. B. Layout, color and placement shall conform to the TMUTCD and be verified by the Owner's representative before installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. For this project a Traffic Control Plan (TCP), responsive to the TMUTCD, has been established by the Engineer. The Contractor may propose his own TCP. Contractor - proposed major modifications to the Traffic Control Plan shall bear the seal of a Registered Professional Engineer. If the plan is approved in writing by the Engineer or Owner, it may be used. Prior to beginning work, the Contractor shall designate, in writing, a competent person who will be responsible and available on the project site or in the immediate area to insure compliance with the TCP. 01269212 BARRICADES, SIGNS AND TRAFFIC HANDLING 01555 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.2 MAINTENANCE A. All retroreflective traffic control devices such as barricades, vertical panels, signs, etc., shall be maintained by cleaning, replacing or a combination thereof such that during darkness and rain the retroreflective characteristics shall equal or exceed the retroreflective characteristics of traffic industry standard reflective panels. END OF SECTION 01269212 BARRICADES, SIGNS AND TRAFFIC HANDLING 01555 - 2 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01576 F WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL a} PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Disposal of waste material and salvageable material. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02221 — Removing Existing Pavements. B. Section 02300 — Earthwork. C. Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures. B. Obtain and submit disposal permits for proposed disposal sites if required by local ordinances. C. Submit a copy of written permission from property owner, along with description of property, prior to disposal of excess material adjacent to the Project. Submit a written and signed release from property owner upon completion of disposal work. Both written permission and signed release shall include hold -harmless clauses naming the City of Lubbock, Texas, Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. and Hugo Reed and Associates, Inc., as the entities to be held harmless in any subsequent legal proceeding. Both property permissions and signed releases shall be attested to by a notary public. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SALVAGEABLE MATERIAL A. Excavated Material: When indicated on drawings, load, haul, and deposit excavated material at a location or locations shown on drawings outside the limits of Project. B. Asphalt Pavement and Asphalt Stabilized Base: Conform to requirements in Section 02221 — Removing Existing Pavements. ' 01269212 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 01576 - 1 10/13 4_ 34"' Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue C. Other Salvageable Materials: Conform to requirements of individual Specification Sections. D. Coordinate the delivery of salvageable material to a specified location with the Engineer. I' 3.2 EXCESS MATERIAL A. Vegetation, rubble, broken concrete, debris, asphaltic concrete pavement, excess soil, and other materials not designated for salvage, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the job site in a timely manner and legally disposed of at a proper facility such as the West Texas Region Disposal Facility (WTRDF). B. Excess soil may be deposited on private property adjacent to the Project if approved by the Owner and when written permission is obtained from property owner. See Paragraph 1.4 C above. C. Waste materials shall be removed from the site on a daily basis, such that the site is maintained in a neat and orderly condition. D. Excess material may be disposed at the West Texas Region Disposal Facility. There may be a tipping fee for construction debris and for excess uncontaminated soil. For a complete list of fees associated with the West Texas Region disposal Facility, please go to the City's website at http://solidwaste.ci.lubbock.tx.us/disposal/disfees.htm. There may also be a fee per load for every truck that is not covered properly when coming to the landfill. All tipping fees shall be considered to be included in the Contractor's bid prices in accordance with specification Section 01020. CNO0611%y11406160 01269212 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 01576 - 2 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Transportation and handling. C. Storage and protection. D. Product options. E. Substitutions. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Information to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures. B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements. 1.4 PRODUCTS A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery 1. Deliver materials, products and equipment to the project site in undamaged condition in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. 3. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 4. Arrange deliveries in accordance with the construction schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation to avoid unnecessary delays in the construction process. 01269212 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1 10/13 341" Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue B. Storage l . Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures. 2. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. 3. Provide off -site storage and protection when site does not permit on -site storage or protection. 4. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. 5. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. 6. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 7. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection in a local warehouse. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. 8. Materials, products and equipment may be stored off site in a bonded and insured local warehouse approved by the Engineer and Owner. Pay all costs incurred for off -site storage facilities. Products properly stored in off -site storage facilities maybe included in progress pay requests with written approval of the Owner. C. Handling 1. Handle materials, products and equipment in a manner prescribed by manufacturer or specified to protect from damage during storage and installation. 1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. For bidding purposes as provided in "Information to Bidders". B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance ofproposed Substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request constitutes a representation that the Bidder: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re -approval by authorities. 01269212 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2 10/13 j, - 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit four copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. 3. The Engineer will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01269212 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3 10/13 - 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 01700 PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Adjusting. D. Project record documents. E. Operation and maintenance data. F. Warranties. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Engineer's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.5 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. C. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. D. Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes. 1.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 01269212 10/13 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 1 C. 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2. Field changes of dimension and detail. 3. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 4. Changes made by addenda and modification. F. Submit documents to Engineer as line segment installation is completed and with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble with metal prong binder in durable plastic presentation cover. D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. F. Provide Affidavit of Bills Paid as required by General Contract Conditions and Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01269212 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 2 10/13 3 34`'' Street Paving Improvements_ Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02050 REMOVAL, DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Disconnecting and capping of identified utilities. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings I B. Section 01600 — Product Requirements. ' C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents. 1.4 JOINT INSPECTION A. Prior to demolition, a joint inspection by the Owner, Engineer and Contractor will be made to determine condition of existing structures adjacent to items being demolished. Adjacent structures damaged by demolition operations must be restored satisfactorily at no expense to the Owner. 1 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700 — Contract Closeout. B. Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and subsurface obstructions. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Experience in performing the Work of this Section. 1.7 DISPOSITION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Ownership of Material and Equipment 1. Certain materials and equipment may be designated for reuse or salvage and will remain the Owner's property. If the designated items are damaged during demolition, handling or storage, the items must be restored satisfactorily at no expense to the Owner. 2. Materials and equipment not designated for reuse or salvage become the Contractor's property. B. Disposal. All materials and equipment not designated for reuse or salvage shall be disposed of by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. C. Reuse. Other items may be designated for reuse as directed by the Owner's Representative. =i l 01269212 REMOVAL, DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE 02050 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent structures, dust control, runoff control and disposal. B. Obtain required permits from authorities. C. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. D. Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks or hydrants without permits. E. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials. 1.9 SCHEDULING A. Schedule work under the provisions of Section 01039 — Coordination and Meetings. B. Schedule Work to coincide with new construction. C. Describe demolition removal procedures and schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. B. Protect existing landscaping materials, appurtenances and structures which are not to be demolished. C. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and shoring. D. Mark location of utilities. 3.2 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. The Contractor is responsible for providing protection of persons and property, including safe working conditions throughout work progress. B. Minimize the spread of dust and flying particles. Execute demolition in a manner to prevent damage from falling debris or other sources to Owner's property or adjacent property. C. Do not interfere with use of adjacent structures; maintain free and safe access at all times. Guard against movement or settlement of adjacent structures. The Contractor is responsible for safety and integrity of adjacent structures and, consequently, is liable for any movement or settlement and any resulting injuries or damage. Provide proper bracing and shoring necessary for support. If safety of adjacent buildings appears to be endangered, cease operations. Do not resume demolition until proper protective measures have been taken. 01269212 REMOVAL, DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE 02050 - 2 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.3 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures. B. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed. C. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private accesses. Maintain protected egress and access at all times. D. Obtain written permission from adjacent property owners when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. E. Sprinkle Work with water to minimize dust. Provide hoses and water connections for this purpose. 3.4 BLASTING A. Blasting is not permitted on this project. 3.5 FIRES A. Fires are not permitted on this project. 3.6 UTILITY SERVICES 1 A. Disconnecting Seal abandoned storm or sanitary sewers with concrete or by another approved method. B. Interruption When temporary interruption of utility service to an occupied building is required by the work, properly coordinate the outage to prevent untimely or damaging interruptions. 3.7 DEMOLITION A. Disconnect, remove and cap designated utilities within demolition areas. B. Remove foundation walls and footings to a minimum of four feet below finished grade 10 feet beyond area of new construction. C. Remove concrete slabs on grade. D. Remove materials to be re -installed or retained in manner to prevent damage. Store and protect in accordance with requirements of Section 01600 — Product Requirements. E. Rough grade and compact areas affected by demolition to maintain site grades and contours. F. Remove demolished materials from site. G. Do not burn or bury materials on site. Leave site in clean condition. H. Remove all temporary work. 3.8 GENERAL WORK ITEMS A. Contractor may use equipment and materials necessary to properly complete the demolition. Operational procedures are at the Contractor's option but must not interfere with the execution of other work. Materials or equipment designated for reuse or salvage shall be carefully removed, transported and stored in approved storage areas. B. Structures. Remove structures entirely, including footings, contents, attachments and improvements. Carefully remove and lower structural steel. 01269212 REMOVAL, DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE 02050 - 3 =` 10/13 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue C. Removing and Replacing Concrete. Use these procedures where existing concrete must be removed to facilitate operations but will be replaced subsequently. 1. Make initial cut with a concrete saw exercising care to avoid cutting reinforcement. 2. After removing concrete, cut cross bars at center of breakout and bend back. 3. Before replacing concrete, bend bars back to the original position and provide a splice bar for each cut bar. Splice bars must be the size of cut bars and of a length to lap each cut end a minimum of 20 diameters of the bar, unless restricted by the job conditions. 4. Immediately before placing new concrete, thoroughly clean old concrete and apply a heavy coat of bonding agent. 5. Replace concrete as specified in Division 3 - Concrete. D. Backfill 1. Backfill and compact holes or other hazardous openings resulting from demolition with an approved material to the density of adjacent soil as specified in the section describing Earthwork. 2. Backfilling with rubbish or burying on the site is not permitted. E. Cleaning. Keep the work areas free of accumulated debris. Materials and equipment that are not for reuse of salvage must be removed from the site daily, unless otherwise approved. 3.9 MECHANICAL WORK ITEMS A. Remove existing mechanical work items to the extent necessary to accommodate new work. 3.10 ELECTRICAL WORK ITEMS A. Unless otherwise noted, remove all electrical materials and equipment from areas indicated for demolition and from site. B. Remove existing conduit to the extent necessary to accommodate new work or to a minimum of 5 feet beyond area indicated for demolition, whichever is greater. C. Remove all wiring from abandoned conduit. D. Seal abandoned conduits. E. Existing electrical services and controls to items being removed must be disconnected. 411ai.Y4 1a 111�y A. No salvage material or equipment shall be reused on the project unless specifically provided for in the Specifications or so noted on the drawings. END OF SECTION 01269212 REMOVAL, DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE 10/13 02050 - 4 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02083 �IiI.Y�YJrCl�u ���1 [�7 �Y�►11i1� rCi�y PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section of the specifications pertains to manholes and valve adjustments. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02084 — Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers. B. Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures. C. Section 02665 — Water Works Piping, Valves and Fittings. D. TxDOT Item 401 — Flowable Backfill. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. B. ASTM C 857 — Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. C. ASTM C 858 — Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structure. D. ASTM C 1107 - Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Nonshrink). E. ASTM D 1557 (2002) Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 It — lbf/ft3) 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures. B. Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details, and installation instructions. C. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of casting assemblies that are not included in Drawings. Include plans, elevations, sections and connection details. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include setting drawings for location and installation of castings and anchorage devices. D. Submit manufacturer's data and details of material to be used for sealing of riser joints. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RINGS AND LIDS A. Reuse removed manhole rings, valve boxes, plates, grates, covers, and brick if they are in good condition as determined by the Engineer. Provide additional materials in accordance with Section 02084, Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers and Section 02665, Water Works Piping, Valves and Fittings at no cost to the OWNER. 01269212 ADJUSTING MANHOLES AND VALVES 02083 - 1 10/13 x 341h Street Paving Improvements Y Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue B. Manhole covers shall be stamped "City of Lubbock, Texas, Sanitary Sewer". C. Valve box covers shall be stamped "Water". D. Single- or multiple -piece prefabricated metal extension rings may be used for the adjustment of manholes as approved. Provide concrete that meets Section 02751, "Portland Cement Concrete Pavement." 2.2 MORTAR A. Conform to requirements of ASTM C 270, Type S using Portland cement. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METALS A. Provide gray -iron frames, rings, and covers conforming to the requirements of Section 02084 — Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers. B. Provide cast iron valve boxes conforming to the requirements of Section 02665 - Water Works Piping, Valves and Fittings. 2.4 PIPE TO MANHOLE/VAULT CONNECTIONS FOR STORM SEWERS A. Grout space between the pipe and manhole -wall conforming to ASTM C 1107. 2.5 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Provide sealing materials between precast concrete adjustment ring and manhole cover frame, such as ConSeal CS-202 Butyl Sealant or approved equal. B. Seat joints between sections with ConSeal CS-202 Butyl Sealant or approved equal conforming to ASTM C 990. 2.6 BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Backfill materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Structures and Section 02321 — Flowable Backfill. 2.7 NON -SHRINK GROUT A. Provide prepackaged, inorganic, flowable, non -gas -liberating, non-metallic, cement -based grout requiring only the addition of water. B. Grout shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1107 and shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7000 psi. C. Grout shall be recommended by the manufacturer for use in wet environments and immersion service. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Verify that lines and grades are correct. B. Adjust or cap existing manholes or valve boxes shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. 01269212 ADJUSTING MANHOLES AND VALVES 10/13 02083 - 2 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue C. Carefully remove manhole and valve rings, covers, plates, and grates to be reused. Clean mortar and grease from the contact areas of all reused items. Take precautions so that foreign material (dirt, trash, debris, etc.) is not introduced into the manhole or valve box. Use construction methods described below unless otherwise shown on the plans. 1. Lowering the Top of a Manhole. Remove a sufficient depth of brick courses or concrete to permit reconstruction. Where brickwork is present, clean the mortar from the top course of brick. Rebuild the manhole to the dimensions shown in the plans. Install the manhole ring and the cover, plate, or grate to conform to the proposed surface elevation and slope. 2. Raising the Top of a Manhole. Clean the top surface of brick or concrete. Construct to the proper new elevation using new brick, brick salvaged from other manholes, prefabricated metal extension rings, concrete rings, or Class A concrete. Install the manhole ring and the cover, plate, or grate to conform to the proposed new surface elevation and slope. Install prefabricated extension rings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Lowering the Top of Valve Box. Cut riser with proper machinery to allow top of valve lid to be installed at the proposed surface elevation and slope. 4. Raising the Top of a Valve Box. Extend the riser with approved splice or joint appropriate for riser material to allow top of valve lid to be installed at the proposed surface elevation and slope. 5. Capping a Valve. Remove the valve box and riser to an elevation below bottom of subgrade. Fill remaining riser with flowable fill and allow to cure. If embankment above valve cannot be placed and processed homogonously with surrounding subgrade, extend flowable fill to surface of treated subgrade at no additional cost. D. Dispose of unused, removed material as directed. E. Backfill all disturbed areas with flowable fill, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 01269212 ADJUSTING MANHOLES AND VALVES 02083 - 3 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02084 FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS PART 1 - GENERAL A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section of the specifications covers gray iron castings for use as manhole frames and lids, gratings, and rings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02083 — Adjusting Manholes and Vaults. B. Section 03300 — Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials Standard Specification for Highway Bridges. B. ASTM A 48 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings. C. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. D. AWS - D 12.1 Welding Reinforcing Steel. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. B. Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details, and installation instructions. C. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of casting assemblies that are not included in Drawings. Include plans, elevations, sections and connection details. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include setting drawings for location and installation of castings and anchorage devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL CASTINGS A. Castings for frames, grates, rings and covers shall conform to ASTM A 48, Class 35. Provide locking covers if indicated on Drawings. B. Castings shall be capable of withstanding the application of an AASHTO H-20 loading without permanent deformation. 01269212 FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS 10/13 02084 - 1 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue C. Fabricate castings to conform to the shapes, dimensions, and with wording or logos shown on the Drawings. Standard dimensions for manhole covers are 24 inches in diameter. Cast dimensions may vary by +/- 1/16 inch per foot. Weight shall not vary from published weight by more than +/- 5 percent. D. Castings shall be clean, free from blowholes and other surface imperfections. Cast holes in covers shall be clean and symmetrical, free of plugs. 2.2 FRAMES AND COVERS FOR MANHOLES A. Where indicated on the drawings, provide manhole frames and covers, East Jordan Iron Works 2040 manhole lid and ring with Type 5 pick bar, labeled "storm sewer", with a minimum weight of 280 lbs, or approved equal. 2.3 SPECIAL FRAMES AND COVERS FOR MANHOLES A. Where indicated on the drawings, provide watertight manhole frames and covers with a minimum of four one -inch anchor bolt holes in the frame flange. Supply watertight manhole covers and frames meeting Neenah R-1916-D (335 pounds), Neenah R-1916-E (410 pounds), Neenah R-1916-F (330 pounds), Neenah R-1916-Fl (375 pounds), or equal to fit cone section and adjustment rings, and to allow for anchor bolts extending into the cone section. Frame and cover shall be suitable for internal low pressure storm water service to 20 pounds per square inch internal pressure. B. Anchor lid with manufacturer's recommended size, number, and strength of bolts and nuts. C. Lid to be stamped "Storm Sewer". D. Anchor frame with 7/8-inch Hilti stainless steel bolt or stainless steel threaded rod with washer and nut. Embed anchor bolts a minimum of three inches into concrete cone section of manhole, exclusive of length required to penetrate adjustment rings. Use a minimum of four bolts evenly spaced on the frame circumference. Minimum pullout force per bolt to be 3,000 pounds in tension. Use anchor bolts equal to Hilti HVA System or Hilti Kwik Bolt II System. Total anchor bolt length dependent on frame thickness and number of grade rings. Top nuts, after tightening, shall leave at least three full threads of the bolt showing above the nut. 2.4 CASTINGS FOR INLET STRUCTURES A. Where indicated on the drawings, provide manhole frames and covers, East Jordan Iron Works 2141 with 135 lb. lid, or approved equal. B. Where indicated on drawings for "stair step" inlets, provide slab type frame and grate with anchor flange, Neenah R-3340-D or approved equal. C. Where indicated on the drawings for "tower" inlets, provide slab type ring and grate, East Jordan Iron Works V-3600-5 or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install castings according to approved shop drawings, instructions given in related specifications, and applicable directions from the manufacturer's printed materials. 01269212 FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS 10/13 02084 - 2 T fA� 34`" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue B. Set castings accurately at required locations to proper alignment and elevation. Keep castings plumb, level, true, and free of rack. Measure location accurately from established lines and grades. Brace or anchor frames temporarily in formwork until permanently set. C. At inlets, wedge the manhole covers and grates with hammered -in -place metal wedges to prevent removal unless wedges are first removed. Metal wedges must be removable by sledge hammer. END OF SECTION 01269212 FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS 10/13 02084 - 3 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue f.Mg71-v 11WKIM1611 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section of the specifications covers trench safety systems for trench excavations greater than five feet in depth. All work perforined under this section shall also comply with current Federal, State and Local codes. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for complying with the requirements of the specifications, drawings and all applicable codes. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any unforeseen field conditions which might affect the integrity of the trench safety system. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. The scope of work includes but is not limited to trench and excavation safety systems either by cut back method or braced excavation method for all trenches five feet and deeper whether indicated on the drawings or required by actual field conditions. Trenches not exceeding five feet in depth shall be protected as required by OSHA, State and Local standards. B. Alternative methods of trench safety may be submitted for approval to the Engineer, however alternative methods will not be reviewed or approved prior to bid opening. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Provide detail drawings for proposed trench safety systems. Clearly identify where each system is proposed for use and type of system to be used. Trench excavations cannot be started until trench safety systems have been submitted and approved by the Engineer. A. Trench Boxes - Submit manufacturer's standard data sheet and certificate of compliance signed by a registered engineer stating the maximum allowable depth for the given design pressure for each type of trench box proposed for use. B. Alternative Systems - If alternative systems composed of steel, aluminum, wood or a combination of materials are proposed, submit design calculations signed by a registered engineer showing all member properties, design strengths and any stress increases used with justification for their use. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Trench safety systems shall be designed based on actual field conditions. The Contractor shall review and determine the field conditions for the project. 01269212 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEMS 02151 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue Q� B. Work shall be performed by forces having at least two years experience with similar types of trench safety systems. All prefabricated items used in trench safety systems shall be manufactured by a company with at least two years experience in fabricating the items. Y w C. The Contractor shall be responsible for complying with all trench safety requirements and for the safety of trenches and excavations. PART2-PRODUCTS Provide suitable materials capable of withstanding imposed loads without excessive deflections. Materials shall be clean, free of rust, holes, knots and other defects. r- A. Steel - Steel shall be of type and thickness as required by design and shall have a minimum yield stress of Fy = 36000 psi. B. Aluminum - Type 6061-T6, thickness as required by design. C. Wood in Contact with Earth - Pressure treated soft woods or untreated hardwoods. D. Wood not in Contact with Earth - Soft or hardwood as required by design. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 JOB CONDITIONS A. Prior to starting trench excavations, the Contractor shall examine all site conditions and note any conditions in existing pavements, structures and other items which may be adversely affected by trenching operations. Prepare a written list of all such conditions and submit the list to the Engineer. During trenching operations note any changes which occur to existing pavements or structures and submit a written report to the Engineer of all such changes. 3.2 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Prior to starting trench excavations, chart and field locate all existing utilities. Notify owners of all utilities of work to be performed. Protect all existing utilities from damage. Provide additional support for utility lines which cannot span trench width. Do not interrupt existing services without written approval by the Engineer and the utility owner. B. Repair all sewer line damaged by the Contractor using CT adaptors (eccentric) and schedule 40 PVC sewer pipe. A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations. 1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered. 01269212 10/13 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEMS 02151 - 2 C, 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction and to permit forming and finishing or concrete surfaces. D. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure excavation support and protection systems remain stable. E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and protection systems. 3.4 TRENCHING PROCEDURES Provide shoring systems in accordance with the submitted design to adequately resist earth pressures indicated on the drawings. A. Proceed with work in an orderly fashion. Install trench bracing systems as soon as possible after opening trenches. Do not allow workers in trench prior to installing trench bracing systems. B. Backfill trenches as soon as possible after completion of work. C. Stockpile excavated materials at three feet away from edge of trench. D. Maintain barricades and signage as required by State and Local codes to protect open excavations. E. Do not allow surface water to enter excavations. Properly grade areas adjacent to trench excavations to control surface drainage away from excavations. Excavations which must remain open during periods of rainfall shall be covered with suitable material to prevent accumulations of water in excavation. F. If cut back method is employed, maintain a clear distance of three feet from edge of cut to avoid allowing loose material to enter trench. G. Do not operate heavy equipment except for trench digging equipment within twenty feet of edge of excavation. END OF SECTION 01269212 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEMS 02151 - 3 10/13 1 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue j" SECTION 02221 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section of the specifications covers the removal of existing pavements. Included, but not limited to the following are: concrete paving, asphaltic paving, concrete curb and/or gutter, miscellaneous items. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01576 — Waste Material Disposal. B. Section 02300 — Earthwork. C. Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures. D. Section 02741 — Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving. E. Section 03300 — Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for disposal of debris. Refer to Section 01576 — Waste Material Disposal. B. Coordinate removal work with utility companies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Obtain advance approval from Engineer for dimensions and limits of removal work. B. Identify all utilities below grade. Stake and flag locations. C. Prior to removal of any concrete curb and gutter, Contractor shall survey the section of curb and gutter to determine existing grades and elevations. Submit survey field notes to the Engineer prior to removal of curb and gutter. All curb and gutter to be replaced will be installed to the original grades and elevations unless otherwise shown on the drawings or as approved by the Owner and Engineer. 01269212 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENTS 02221 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect the following from damage or displacement: 1. Adjacent public and private property. 2. Trees, plants, and other landscape features designated to remain. 3. Utilities not designated to be removed. 4. Pavement and utility structures not designated to be removed. 5. Bench marks, monuments, and existing structures not designated to be removed. 3.3 REMOVALS A. Remove pavements and structures by methods that will not damage underground utilities. Do not use a drop hammer near existing underground utilities. B. Minimize amount of earth loaded during removal operations. C. Where existing pavement is to remain, make straight saw cuts in existing pavement to provide clean breaks prior to removal. Do not break concrete pavement or base with drop hammer unless concrete or base has been saw cut to a minimum depth of 2 inches. D. Where street and driveway saw cut locations coincide or fall within 3 feet of existing construction or expansion joints, break out to existing joint. E. Remove sidewalks and curbs to nearest existing dummy, expansion, or construction joint. F. Any existing concrete which is damaged or destroyed beyond the neat lines so established shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. G. Remaining concrete shall be mortared to protect the reinforcing steel and provide a neat clean appearance. H. Where reinforcement is encountered in the removed portions of structures to be modified, a minimum of 1-foot of steel length shall be cleaned of all old concrete and left in place to tie into the new construction where applicable. I. Existing asphalt pavement and caliche base removed from the roadway shall be separately salvaged and delivered to stockpile area at 8425 North Ave. P. Salvage to depth indicated in drawings. Care shall be taken to exclude subgrade soils from the salvaged paving material. Material shall be crushed to a maximum diameter of 2-inches, whether crushed or milled. 3.4 BACKFILL A. Backfill of removal zones shall be in accordance with requirements of Section 02300 — Earthwork or Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures as applicable to the specific portion of the work. 3.5 DISPOSAL A. Remove from the site debris resulting from work under this section in accordance with requirements of Section 01576 — Waste Material Disposal. END OF SECTION 01269212 REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENTS 02221 - 2 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section of the specifications refers to general excavation of various materials at storm sewer inlets, storm sewer outlets, channel grading, subgrade preparation related to paving, flexible base, topsoil placement, and other miscellaneous grading items. For trenching -specific earthwork and excavations at least five feet deep, refer to Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 — Quality Requirements. B. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. C. Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures. D. Section 02318 — Borrow. E. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.4 REFERENCES AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM C 136 ASTM D 422 ASTM D 698 ASTM D 1140 ASTM D 1556 ASTM D 1557 ASTM D1586 01269212 10/13 (2001) Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates (1963; R 2002) Particle -Size Analysis of Soils (2000a) Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft — lb/fe). (2000) Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No. 200 (75-micrometer) Sieve (2000) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method (2002) Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft — lb/fe) (1999) Penetration Test and Split -Barrel Sampling of Soils EARTHWORK 02300 - 1 3 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue ASTM D 2487 (2000) Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) ASTM D 2922 (2001) Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) ASTM D 3017 (2001) Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) ASTM D 4318 (2000) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. B. Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving. C. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations. 1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Engineer. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 20 feet in width and pits more than 30 feet in either length or width, and not associated with trenching for pipe installation. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Engineer, shall be without additional compensation. E. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. F. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. G. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or layer placed between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk. H. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. I. Utilities: Include on -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables. J. Suitable Material: Suitable soil materials are those meeting specification requirements. Unsuitable soils meeting specification requirements for suitable soils after treatment with time or cement are considered suitable, unless otherwise indicated. K. Unsatisfactory Materials: Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory materials are unsatisfactory. Unsatisfactory materials also include man-made fills; trash; refuse; backfills from previous construction; and material classified as satisfactory which contains root and other organic matter or frozen material. The Engineer shall be notified of any contaminated materials. L. Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials: Cohesionless materials include materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, SW, and SP. Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC, SC, ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as GM and SM will be identified as cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic. Testing required for classifying materials shall be in accordance with ASTM D 4318, ASTM C 136, ASTM D 422, and ASTM D 1140. 01269212 EARTHWORK 02300 - 2 10/13 1 34`" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue ! M. Degree of Compaction: Degree of compaction required is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 as designated in the Contract Documents abbreviated as a percent of laboratory maximum density. Procedure A, B or C shall be applied as applicable along with corrections according to ASTM D 4718. For free draining soils, use maximum reference density according to ASTM D 4253. N. Topsoil: Material suitable for topsoils obtained from offsite areas or the top 3 feet of excavated material shall be defined as clean and uncontaminated soils capable of sustaining plant life. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Material Reports 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 for each site of borrow soil material. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on -site or borrow soil material. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 01400 — Quality Requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. Refer to Section 02318 — Borrow. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. Satisfactory soils should have a liquid limit of 45 maximum and a plasticity index of 15 maximum. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. E. Subbase: Satisfactory soils. F. Flexible Base: 1. The material for flexible base shall consist of crushed caliche (limestone, calcareous clay particles, conglomerate, gravel, or other approved granular materials) produced from oversized quarried aggregate, sized by crushing and produced from a naturally occurring single source except that blending of clean crushed concrete will be allowed. Blended material must meet requirements for flexible base as defined in this and other sections. The material source shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. If material characteristics within the approved source change, the material shall be subject to retesting and re -approval prior to continued use. The Contractor shall not change material sources without approval by the Engineer. 01269212 EARTHWORK 02300 - 3 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2. Flexible base material shall conform to the following test requirements: Sieve Analysis Sieve Size 2-1/2" 1-3/4" 7/8" %" #4 #40 % retained 0 0-10 10-35 30-50 45-65 70-85 Atterberg Limits Material passing the No. 40 sieve shall be known as "Soil Binder" and shall meet the following requirements: Liquid Limit 45 maximum Plasticity Index 15 maximum and 3 minimum Linear Shrinkage 10 maximum Wet Bali Mill When tested in accordance with Tex- 116-E (Wet Ball Mill) the material shall have a value not to exceed 55. The percent of material passing the No. 40 sieve shall not increase by more than 25 during the test. G. Subgrade: Subgrade material for concrete or asphalt construction shall consist of suitable native soil or off site soil, free from vegetation or other objectionable matter. All unstable or objectionable material shall be removed from the subgrade and replaced with approved material. The material shall be suitable for forming a stable embankment and shall meet the following requirements: Liquid Limit 45 maximum Plasticity Index 15 maximum Linear Shrinkage 2 min — 10 max Subgrade material which does not meet the above requirements may be conditioned with lime or caliche screenings. The conditioning shall produce a uniform subgrade material which meets all of these specified subgrade requirements. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali -resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities uncovered during prosecution of the work, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas and oil. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. B. Warning tape to be placed within 3 feet of ground surface. 01269212 EARTHWORK 02300 - 4 10/13 34`" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. C. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.2 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL A. Topsoil will be separately excavated, stored, and used for surface finish in preparation for seeding, sodding, or other planting, only where topsoil is definitely superior for grass and plant growth as compared with the remainder of the excavated material. In general, this shall be considered as the top 6 inches of excavated material. Surface soil that is heavy clay, predominantly sandy, or is lean in grass -and plant -growth qualities, will not be saved. The hauling, spreading, smoothing, and maintenance of the topsoil in preparation for the seeding and planting operations are generally considered under a separate section, and therefore are not considered in this specification. B. Special consideration is required for topsoil salvage in cultivated farm land. See Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures, and Section 02320 — Backfill Materials for Structures. 3.3 FROZEN MATERIAL A. Soils shall not be placed on a foundation which contains frozen material, or which has been subjected to freeze -thaw action. This prohibition encompasses all foundation types, including the natural ground, all prepared subgrades (whether in an excavation or on an embankment) and all layers of previously placed and compacted ;arth fill which become the foundations for successive layers of earth fill. All material that freezes or has been subjected to freeze -thaw action during the construction work, or during periods of temporary shutdowns, such as, but not limited to, nights, holidays, weekends, winter shutdowns, or earthwork operations, shall be removed to a depth that is acceptable to the Engineer and replaced with new material. Alternatively, the material will be thawed, dried, reworked, and recompacted to the specified criteria before additional material is placed. The Engineer will determine when placement of fill or backfill shall cease due to cold weather. The Engineer may elect to use average daily air temperatures, and/or physical observation of the soils for his determination. Embankment material shall not contain frozen clumps of soil, snow, or ice. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks, pavements and similar paths to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades. 01269212 10/13 EARTHWORK 02300 - 5 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.5 SUBGRADE PREPARATION t A. Subgrade shall be prepared in conformance with the lines and grades shown on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, by scarifying and compacting to a minimum of 95% of Modified Proctor Density at a moisture content within 2% of optimum. Subgrade shall be constructed in maximum of 6 inch lifts. The total thickness of the subgrade shall be 12 inches minimum for thoroughfares and streets greater than 36 feet in width and 6 inches minimum for all other streets, or as indicated on plan sheets. The compaction method for subgrade shall provide for each lift to be compacted to the specified density using appropriate equipment. After each lift of subgrade is complete, tests will be made by Contractor with respect to moisture and density using nuclear testing equipment. At any time the Engineer may require proof rolling with a 25-ton pneumatic roller to test the uniformity of compaction. For 12-inch subgrade preparation in earth cuts, excavate to top of finish subgrade which will be the limit of payment for excavation. Remove the first 6 inches of material and wind row then scarify and compact to a uniform depth at least 12 inches below finish subgrade elevation. Once this first lift meets the testing requirements stated above then the remaining 6 inches of material may be laid back in place to compact and return to finish subgrade elevation. Any fill placed within existing or proposed street right-of-way in execution of an approved cut and fill plan shall meet these requirements for materials and construction. Subgrade not covered with base or other paving material within 7 days of meeting required density may be subject to retesting and reprocessing as determined by the Engineer. 3.6 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL A. If unsuitable material is encountered during subgrade preparation regardless of how it is discovered, the Contractor shall take corrective action as directed by the Engineer. If removal and replacement of the material is required or if drying is required deeper than 6 inches below subgrade it will be considered over excavation and paid for separately. Contractor shall back fill any over excavation with suitable material and compact to 95% of Modified Proctor Density at a moisture content within 2% of optimum in accordance with ASTM D 1557. 3.7 FLEXIBLE BASE CONSTRUCTION 1� I A. Areas behind curbs shall be backfilled and leveled with approved topsoil prior to placing base material. B. Approved flexible base material shall be hauled in vehicles of uniform capacity and ,f dumped evenly along the project length for processing and compaction. Processing shall be Imp accomplished in multiple lifts of 3 inches compacted thickness. Each course shall be wetted and rolled as required to produce a uniform compaction of 95% of Modified Proctor Density at a moisture content 1% to 2% below optimum. At any time the Engineer may require proof rolling with a 25-ton pneumatic roller to test the uniformity of compaction. ' C. Completed flexible base shall be cured for at least 7 days before finishing. During the curing period the street may be opened to traffic. The base shall be maintained by blading,` watering, or other methods until the wearing surface is placed. i 01269212 EARTHWORK 02300 - 6 10/13 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue I D. The compacted flexible base shall be finished and shaped immediately preceding the application of the surface treatment. All loose or unconsolidated material shall be removed ell, and the surface moistened and rolled with a steel wheel roller. All irregularities, depressions, or weak spots which develop shall be corrected by scarifying, adding or removing material as required, reshaping, and recompacting, or other methods approved by the Engineer. E. Any deviation in the surface of the finished base in excess of 3/8 inch from the established grade or true cross-section, using a 10 foot long straight edge, shall be corrected as provided above. 3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover or spray with dust suppressant to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of trees. 3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Refer to Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures. 3.10 FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills. B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. C. Place and compact fill material to required elevations as directed in Paragraph 3.12 using satisfactory soil material. 3.11 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to . specified dry unit weight. 3.12 COMPACTION OF FILLS A. Place fill materials in layers not more than 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. B. Each layer of backfill or fill material should be compacted to a minimum of 95% of Modified Proctor Density at a moisture content within 2% of optimum. 01269212 10/13 02300 - 7 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.13 TESTING A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall perform construction materials testing in conformance with Section 01400 — Quality Requirements. Owner may conduct independent testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after Engineer has verified that test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556 and ASTM D 2922, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill layer, at least one test for every 5000 sq. ft. or less of paved area, but in no case fewer than three tests. 2. Trench Backfill: Refer to Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures. D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. Contractor shall be responsible for paying for failing tests conducted by Owner. Such failing tests shall include pro-rata technician time charges, pro-rata mileage expense and other pro -rated agency charges. 3.14 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 3/8 inch. 3.15 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash, debris and excess weeds. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Engineer; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 01269212 EARTHWORK 02300 - 8 10/13 34'h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.16 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property according to Section 01576 — Waste Material Disposal. 01269212 10/13 END OF SECTION EARTHWORK 02300 - 9 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02317 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section of the specifications includes information on excavation, trenching, foundation, embedment, and backfill for installation of structures, including storm sewers, culverts, manholes and other pipeline structures. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures. B. Section 01400 — Quality Requirements. C. Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls. D. Section 01555 — Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling. E. Section 02221 — Removing Existing Pavements. F. Section 02300 — Earthwork. G. Section 02318 — Borrow. H. Section 02320 — Backfill Materials for Structures. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Pipe Foundation: Suitable and stable native soils that are exposed at the trench subgrade after excavation to depth of bottom of the bedding as shown on the Drawings, or foundation backfill material placed and compacted in over -excavations. B. Pipe Bedding: The portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of foundation up to a level line at bottom of pipe, and horizontally under 1/3 of the pipe O.D. C. Haunching: The material placed on either side of pipe from the foundation to the springline of the pipe for rigid wall pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall, excluding the bedding section as shown on the plans. For flexible wall pipe, the haunching material extends to a minimum of 12" above the top of the pipe. D. Initial Backfill: The portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from the top of haunching or cement stabilized backfill up to a level line immediately below pavement subgrade, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. E. Pipe Embedment: The portion of trench backfill that consists of bedding, haunching and initial backfill. F. Trench Zone: The portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of pipe embedment up to a line im rnediately below pavement subgrade or up to final grade when not beneath pavement. G. Backfill: Suitable material meeting specified quality requirements, placed and compacted under controlled conditions. 01269212 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 02317 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue H. Surface Water Control: Diversion and drainage of surface water runoff and rain water away from trench excavation. Rain water and surface water accidentally entering trench shall be controlled and removed as a part of excavation drainage. I. Excavation Drainage: Removal of surface water in trench by sump pumping or other approved means. J. Trench Conditions are defined with regard to the stability of trench bottom and trench walls of pipe embedment zone. Maintain trench conditions that provide for effective placement and compaction of embedment material directly on or against undisturbed soils or foundation backfill, except where structural trench support is necessary. 1. Dry Stable Trench: Stable and substantially dry trench conditions exist in pipe embedment zone as a result of typically dry soils or achieved by ground water control (dewatering or depressurization) for trenches extending below ground water level. 2. Stable Trench with Seepage: Stable trench in which ground water seepage is controlled by excavation drainage. a. Stable Trench with Seepage in Clayey Soils: Excavation drainage is provided in lieu of or to supplement ground water control systems to control seepage and provide stable trench subgrade in predominately clayey soils prior to bedding placement. b. Stable Wet Trench in Sandy Soils: Excavation drainage is provided in the embedment zone in combination with ground water control in predominately sandy or silty soils. 3. Unstable Trench: Unstable trench conditions exist in the pipe embedment zone if ground water inflow or high water content causes soil disturbances, such as sloughing, sliding, boiling, heaving or loss of density. K. Subtrench: Subtrench is a special case of benched excavation. Subtrench excavation below trench shields or shoring installations may be used to allow placement and compaction of foundation or embedment materials directly against undisturbed soils. Depth of a subtrench depends upon trench stability and safety as determined by the Contractor. L. Trench Dam: A placement of low permeability material in pipe embedment zone or foundation to prohibit ground water flow along the trench. M. Over -Excavation and Backfill: Excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below top of foundation as shown on Drawings, and backfilled with foundation backfill material. N. Foundation Backfill Materials: Natural soil or manufactured aggregate of controlled gradation, to control drainage and material separation. Foundation backfill material is placed and compacted as backfill to provide stable support for bedding. 1.5 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 558 - Test Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soil Cement Mixtures. B. ASTM D 698 - Test Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5-lb (2.49-kg) Rammer and 12-in. (304.8-mm) Drop. C. ASTM D 1557 - Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft — lb/fP). D. ASTM D 2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. E. ASTM D 2922 - Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). F. ASTM D 3017 - Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 01269212 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 02317 - 2 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue G. ASTM D 4318 - Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. H. TxDOT Tex- 101-E - Preparation of Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing. I. TxDOT Tex- 110-E - Determination of Particle Size Analysis of Soils. J. Federal Regulations, 29 CFR Part 1926, Standards -Excavation, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Schedule work so that pipe embedment can be completed on the same day that acceptable foundation has been achieved for each section of pipe installation, manhole, or other structures. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. B. Submit a written description for information only of the planned typical method of excavation, backfill placement and compaction, including: 1. Sequence of work and coordination of activities. 2. Selected trench widths. 3. Procedures for foundation and embedment placement, and compaction. 4. Procedure for use of trench boxes and other premanufactured systems while assuring specified compaction against undisturbed soil. C. Submit a surface water control plan in accordance with requirements in this Section. D. Submit backfill material sources and product quality information in accordance with requirements of Section 02320 - Backfill Materials for Structures. E. Submit record of location of storm sewer installed, referenced to survey control points. Include locations of utilities encountered that are not shown on Drawings or rerouted for the convenience of the Contractor. Give stations, NAD 83 state plane coordinates, NAVD 88 elevations, inverts, and gradients of installed storm sewer. F. Submit all field density tests results. G. Submit laboratory density compaction curves for each material. H. Submit 28 day compressive strength of flowable fill. 1.8 TESTS A. Perform backfill material source qualification testing in accordance with requirements of Section 02320- Backfill Materials for Structures. B. Once within pavement subgrade depth under paved areas, perform field density tests of subgrade at the frequency specified in Section 02300 — Earthwork. C. The Owner will perform his own check of field densities at random intervals at Owner's expense for passing tests. Failing tests will be charged to the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Perform excavation with hydraulic excavator or other equipment suitable for achieving the i requirements of this Section. 01269212 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 02317 - 3 10/13 _1 34`h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue B. Use only hand -operated tamping equipment until a minimum cover of 12 inches is obtained over pipes, conduits, and ducts. Do not use heavy compacting equipment until adequate cover is attained to prevent damage to pipes, conduits, or ducts. Do not use vibratory equipment until 5 feet of cover over pipes, conduits and ducts is obtained. Do not use vibratory equipment if adjacent structures are affected. C. Use trench shields or other protective systems or shoring systems which are designed and operated to achieve placement and compaction of backfill directly against undisturbed native soil. D. Trench digging machinery may be used to make the trench excavations except in places where operation of same would cause damages to pipelines, fences or other existing structures either above or below ground; in such instances hand methods shall be employed. 2.2 MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS A. Embedment and Trench Zone Backfill Materials: Conform to classifications and product descriptions of Section 02320 - Backfill Materials for Structures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Establish traffic control to conform to requirements of Section 01555 — Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling and the Drawings. B. Perform work to conform to applicable safety standards and regulations. C. Immediately notify the agency or company owning any existing utility line which is damaged, broken, or disturbed. Obtain approval from the Owner and agency for any repairs or relocations, either temporary or permanent. D. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, to conform to requirements of Section 02221 - Removing Existing Pavements. E. Maintain permanent benchmarks, monumentation, and other reference points. Unless otherwise directed in writing, replace those which are damaged or destroyed. 3.2 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall locate all existing underground lines within construction limits, whether or not they are shown on the Drawings, sufficiently in advance of trenching operations to prevent any damage thereto. Conflicting utilities should be relocated by others prior to construction. Verification of location, size and burial depth of existing utilities shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor. B. The Contractor shall protect existing structures, and other permanent objects outside of grading limits and within the grading limits as designated on the Drawings. C. Contractor shall protect and support above -grade and below -grade utilities which are to remain. D. Contractor shall restore damaged permanent facilities to pre -construction conditions, at the Contractors expense, unless replacement or abandonment of facilities are indicated on the Drawings. 01269212 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 02317 - 4 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue E. Contractor shall implement measures to minimize erosion of trenches. Do not allow water to pond in trenches. Where slides, washouts, settlements, or areas with loss of density or pavement failures occur, repair, recompact, and repave those areas at no additional cost to Owner. F. The Contractor is responsible for notifying pipeline and cable utility owners of his intention of crossing their utility no less than seven days prior to crossing the utility. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. Perform excavation work so that pipe, conduit, and ducts can be installed to depths and alignments shown on the Drawings. Avoid disturbing surrounding ground and existing facilities and improvements. B. Structural excavation quantities have been determined based on dimensions shown in the Drawings C. Salvage topsoil in unpaved areas for later re -introduction into surface of trench. In roadside ditch areas, topsoil will be considered to be the soil above the uppermost calcium carbonate caliche layer. Depth of topsoil will vary. Excavate topsoil and keep separate from other excavated soil. Excavate with smooth -lip excavator bucket if necessary to avoid intermixing with caliche and undesirable soils. Stockpile topsoil separately from other excavated materials. D. Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for removal, or concealed conditions, discontinue work at that location. Notify the Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding. 3.4 HANDLING EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. Use only excavated materials which are suitable as defined in this Section and conforming to Section 02320 - Backfill Materials for Structures. Place material suitable for backfilling in stockpiles at a distance from the trench to prevent slides or cave-ins. B. When required, provide additional backfill material conforming to requirements of Section 02318 - Borrow. C. Do not place stockpiles of excess excavated materials on streets and adjacent properties except as approved by Owner prior to excavation operations. Protect excess stockpiles for use on site. Maintain site conditions in accordance with Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. D. Protect topsoil from intermixing with undesirable materials. E. All surplus or unsuitable materials shall be loaded and wasted at the Contractor's expense. 3.5 TRENCH FOUNDATION A. The trench shall be excavated to an even grade so that the bottom of the pipe will rest on the bottom of the trench over the entire length of pipe. In order to obtain a true even grade, the trench shall be fine graded by hand. B. Any part of the trench excavated below grade shall be corrected by filling with approved material and compacting thoroughly. C. If ledge rock, rock fragments or other unyielding material is encountered in the bottom of the trench it shall be removed to a depth of six inches below grade, refilled with approved material, and thoroughly compacted. 01269212 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 02317 - 5 10/13 f_. 34`h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.6 PIPE EMBEDMENT, PLACEMENT, AND COMPACTION A. Immediately prior to placement of embedment materials, the bottoms and sidewalis of trenches shall be free of loose, sloughing, caving, or otherwise unsuitable soil. B. Place pipe bedding and backfill as shown on Drawings. 1. Sand bedding shall be loosely placed in trench as shown on Drawings. C. For pipe installation, manually spread embedment materials around the pipe to provide uniform bearing when compacted. Do not allow materials to free -fall from heights greater than 24 inches above top of pipe. D. For flowable backfill, vibrate with concrete vibrator to consolidate material under haunches. Use minimum two-inch diameter vibrator, vibrate backfill continuously along entire length of pipe leaving no unconsolidated lengths or areas. Fill all voids with flowable backfill, then hand operated tampers may be used. 3.7 TRENCH ZONE BACKFILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Place backfill for pipe or conduits and restore surface as soon as practicable. Leave only the minimum length of trench open as necessary for construction. B. Place trench zone backfill in lifts and compact by methods selected by the Contractor. Fully compact each lift before placement of the next lift. C. When flowable backfill is used to encase the pipe, backfilling of the remaining trench depth shall not commence until the in -place flowable backfill has attained a penetration resistance reading of at least 30 when measured with a soil penetrometer according to ASTM D 1558 and using one -tenth square -inch needle. This equates to a penetration resistance of approximately 300 pounds per square inch. This is not a strength requirement for the flowable backfill, but a measure of the degree of curing of the flowable backfill. After a penetrometer reading of 30 is obtained on the flowable backfill, then compacted backfill operations may commence. The contractor shall furnish and have on site a calibrated ASTM D 1558 soil penetrometer with one -tenth square -inch needle. The Contractor shall take no less than four penetrometer readings, equally spaced on both sides of the pipe (8 readings total) in accordance with ASTM D 1558, for each day's trench length that is planned for controlled density backfill operations. Such readings shall be taken prior to commencing backfill operations. 3.8 MANHOLES, JUNCTION BOXES, AND OTHER PIPELINE STRUCTURES A. Meet the requirements of adjoining utility installations for backfill of pipeline structures, as shown on the Drawings. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for material source qualifications as defined in Section 02320 - Backfill Materials for Structures. B. Provide excavation and trench safety systems at locations and to depths required for testing and retesting during construction at no additional cost to Owner. C. Tests will be performed by Contractor on a minimum of three different samples of each material type for plasticity characteristics, in accordance with ASTM D 4318, and for gradation characteristics, in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E. Additional classification tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. 01269212 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 02317 - 6 10/13 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue D. One test for moisture -density relationship will be performed initially for backfill materials in accordance with ASTM D 1557. Additional moisture -density relationship tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. E. In -place density tests of soil materials will be performed according to ASTM D 1557, or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017, and at the following frequencies and conditions. 1. A minimum of one test for every 100 linear feet of compacted pipe foundation. 2. One test for every 12" lift of backfill material outside of trench zone. 3. One test on all precast inlet or manhole foundations. 4. The number of tests will be increased if inspection determines that soil type or moisture content are not uniform or if compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to attain uniform density, as specified. 5. Density tests may be performed at various depths below the fill surface by pit excavation. Material in previously placed lifts may therefore be subject to acceptance/rejection. rJ 6. Two verification tests will be performed adjacent to in -place tests showing density less than the acceptance criteria. Placement will be rejected unless both verification tests show acceptable results. r J 7. Recompacted placement will be retested at the same frequency as the first test series, including verification tests. 11 F. Recondition, recompact, and retest at Contractor's expense if tests indicate Work does not meet specified compaction requirements. For hardened cement stabilized backfill with nonconforming density, core and test for compressive strength at Contractor's expense. 3.10 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL A. Dispose of excess materials in accordance with requirements of Section 01576 - Waste Material Disposal I] END OF SECTION 01269212 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 02317 - 7 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02318 BORROW PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This portion of the specifications shall consist of the removal and proper utilization of materials secured from sources obtained by the contractor and approved by the Engineer. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 — Quality Requirements. B. Section 02300 - Earthwork. C. Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Structures. 1.4 REFERENCES AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM C 136 (2001) Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM D 422 (1963; R 2002) Particle -Size Analysis of Soils ASTM D 698 (2000a) Test Method for Laboratory Compaction ASTM D 1140 (2000) Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No. 200 (75-micrometer) Sieve ASTM D 1557 (2002) Test for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-ib/ft) ASTM D 2487 (2000) Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) ASTM D 2922 (2001) Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) ASTM D 3017 (2001) Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) ASTM D 4318 (2000) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils 01269212 BORROW 02318 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 02300 — Earthwork and Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Material Reports 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of borrow soil material. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for borrow soil material PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Class A (Select Borrow): This material shall consist of sand or other suitable granular material, free from vegetation or other objectionable matter and reasonably free from lumps of earth, and when tested by ASTM laboratory methods, shall meet the following l requirements: 1. The liquid limits shall not exceed 45. 2. The plasticity index shall not be less than 4 or more than 15. B. Class B: This material shall consist of suitable non -swelling (soils with a plasticity index y less than 20) earth material such as loam, clay or other such materials that will form a stable embankment. C. Topsoil: This material shall consist of approved topsoil material and shall be clean, friable soil capable of supporting plant life. This material shall also be free of stones and all other debris. Topsoil for a particular location shall closely match the original topsoil removed from that particular location in terms of color, Atterberg limits and texture. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION A. Prior to commencing this work, all erosion control and environmental measures required shall be in place. B. Use all suitable materials removed from excavation insofar as practicable. C. All complicated excavation grade work shall conform to the established alignment, grades, and cross-section required of the Contractor by the borrow pit owner. D. Contractor shall arrange for borrow from one of the following sources: I t 1. Existing borrow pit. 2. New borrow pit. 3. Surplus excavated material from a site which has all required permits. E. Contractor shall notify Engineer 3 weeks prior to opening pit to permit necessary testing £ t- for approval of materials. All borrow sites shall comply with the requirements of the permit. 01269212 BORROW 10/13 f _I 02318 - 2 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue F. During construction, keep borrow sources drained insofar as practicable to permit final cross sections to be taken, when required. G. Maintain borrow sites to minimize the impact on the appearance of the natural topographic features and at no time create a potential hazard to the public. END OF SECTION 01269212 BORROW 02318 - 3 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02320 BACKFILL MATERIALS FOR STRUCTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section of the specifications covers materials related to the backfill of structures. Included are the following: 1. Sand bedding. 2. Flowable fill. 3. Lean concrete backfill. 4. Native soil materials. 5. Topsoil. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures. B. Section 01400 — Quality Requirements. C. Section 02300 — Earthwork. D. Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures. E. Section 02318 — Borrow. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures. 1.5 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregate. B. ASTM C 40 - Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete. C. ASTM C 123 - Test Method for Lightweight Pieces in Aggregate. D. ASTM C 131 - Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small -Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. E. ASTM C 136 - Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. F. ASTM C 142 - Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates. G. ASTM D 698 — Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-ib/ft). H. ASTM D 1140 - Test Method for Amount of Materials in Soils Finer Than No. 200 Sieve. I. ASTM D 1557 — Test for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-ib/fe) J. ASTM D 2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). 01269212 BACKFILL MATERIALS FOR STRUCTURES 02320 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue K. ASTM D 2488 - Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual -Manual Procedure). L. ASTM D 4318 - Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. M. ASTM D 4643 - Method for Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil by the Microwave Oven Method. N. TxDOT Tex- 101-E - Preparation of Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing. O. TxDOT Tex- 104-E - Test Method for Determination of Liquid Limit of Soils (Part 1) P. TxDOT Tex- 106-E - Test Method - Methods of Calculating Plasticity Index of Soils. Q. TxDOT Tex- 110-E - Determination of Particle Size Analysis of Soils. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to requirements of Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. B. Submit a description of source, material classification and product description, production method, and application of backfill materials. C. Submit test results for samples of off -site backfill materials to comply with Paragraph 2.2, Materials Testing and Section 02318 - Borrow. D. Before stockpiling materials, submit a copy of temporary easement or approval from landowner for stockpiling backfill material on private property. E. For each delivery of material, provide a delivery ticket which includes source location. 1.7 TESTS A. Perform tests of sources for off -site backfill material in accordance with Paragraph 2.2 and Section 02318 - Borrow. B. Verification tests of backfill materials may be performed by the Owner, at Owner's expense; however, failing tests will be charged to the Contractor and deducted from Contractor's progress payments. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL DESCRIPTIONS A. Sand Bedding 1. Coarse -grained, well -graded, sand (natural, manufactured, or a combination of both) conforming to requirements of ASTM C33. 01269212 BACKFILL MATERIALS FOR STRUCTURES 02320 - 2 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2. Gradation shall conform to ASTM C136 and the following limits. SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 3/8" 100 No. 4 95 to 100 No. 8 80 to 100 No. 16 50 to 85 No. 30 25 to 60 No. 50 10 to 30 No. 100 2 to 10 B. Flowable Fill 1. Cement content 2 sack mix per cubic yard. 2. Water —to -cement ratio = .6 to 0.75. 3. Maximum aggregate size shall not exceed 1.5-inch diameter. C. Native Soil Material for Backfill 1. Provide backfill material that is free of stones greater than 6 inches, free of roots, waste, debris, trash, organic material, unstable material, non -soil matter, hydrocarbon or other contamination. D. Topsoil 1. Provide topsoil material that is free of stones greater than 1-inch, free of roots, waste, trash, debris, organic material, unstable material, non -soil matter, hydrocarbon or other contamination. Cultivated farm land topsoil shall be free of rocks. 2. Surface should be made clear of rock and other debris before planting. 3. Use topsoil material salvaged under Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures of excavated material for topsoil backfill. This material shall be set aside to prevent mixing with other excavated material. Topsoil is only required in non - paved areas. E. It is the intent that materials excavated from trench or cut and cover operations be used as backfill in the same general open cut location. There is not a specification limit on liquid limit, plastic limit or plasticity index for native materials removed from a trench and then used as backfill in that same trench. Native backfill materials shall meet the requirements of paragraph 2.1.D. Where material must be imported to bring a trench to grade, then the material requirements of this section shall be followed. Where street flexible base is involved, the flexible base shall meet the requirements of Section 02300 - Earthwork. 2.2 MATERIAL TESTING A. Ensure that material selected, produced and delivered to the project meets applicable specifications and is of sufficiently uniform properties to allow practical construction and quality control. B. Source or Supplier Qualification. Perform testing, or obtain representative tests by suppliers, for selection of material sources and products. Provide test results for a minimum of three samples for each source and material type. Tests samples of processed 01269212 BACKFILL MATERIALS FOR STRUCTURES 02320 - 3 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue materials from current production representing material to be delivered. Tests shall verify that the materials meet specification requirements. Repeat qualification test procedures each time the source characteristic changes or there is a planned change in source location or supplier. Qualification tests shall include, as applicable: 1. Gradation. Complete sieve analyses shall be reported regardless of the specified control sieves. The range of sieves shall be from the largest particle through the No. 200 sieve. 2. Plasticity of material passing the No. 40 sieve. 3. Los Angeles abrasion wear of material retained on the No. 4 sieve. 4. Clay lumps. 5. Lightweight pieces 6. Organic impurities C. Production Testing. Provide reports to the Engineer from an independent testing laboratory that backfill materials to be placed in the Work meet applicable specification requirements. D. Assist the Engineer in obtaining material samples for verification testing at the source or at the production plant. E. Native material requires testing only when questionable material is encountered. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SOURCES A. Use of material encountered in the trench excavations is acceptable, provided applicable specification requirements are satisfied. If excavation material is not acceptable, provide from other approved source. B. Identify off -site sources for backfill materials at least 21 days ahead of intended use so that the Engineer may obtain samples for verification testing. C. Obtain approval for each material source by the Engineer before delivery is started. If sources previously approved do not produce uniform and satisfactory products, furnish materials from other approved sources. Materials may be subjected to inspection or additional verification testing after delivery. Materials which do not meet the requirements of the specifications will be rejected. Do not use material which, after approval, has become unsuitable for use due to segregation, mixing with other materials, or by contamination. Once a material is approved by the Engineer, expense for sampling and testing required to change to a different material will be at the Contractor's expense with no additional cost to the Owner. 3.2 MATERIAL HANDLING A. Establish temporary stockpile locations for practical material handling and control, and verification testing by the Engineer in advance of final placement. Obtain approval from landowner for storage of backfill material on adjacent private property. B. When stockpiling backfill material near the project site, use appropriate covers to eliminate blowing of materials into adjacent areas and prevent runoff containing sediments from entering the drainage system. C. Cement stabilized backfill and lean concrete backfill shall be consolidated upon placement by using concrete vibrators to ensure filling of voids, filling around and under haunches of pipe and filling of spaces between corrugations. Vibration shall not be applied to the utility pipe itself. 01269212 BACKFILL MATERIALS FOR STRUCTURES 02320 - 4 10/13 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control 1. The Engineer may sample and test backfill at: a. Sources including borrow pits, production plants and Contractor's designated off -site stockpiles. b. On -site stockpiles. C. Materials placed in the Work. 2. The Engineer may resample material at any stage of work or location if changes in characteristics are apparent. B. Production Verification Testing: The Owner's testing laboratory will provide verification testing on backfill materials, as directed by the Engineer. Samples may be taken at the source or at the production plant, as applicable. Contractor shall cooperate with Owner and Engineer in allowing access to materials. END OF SECTION 01269212 BACKFILL MATERIALS FOR STRUCTURES 02320 - 5 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02513 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. This item shall consist of the painting of markings and stripes on the surface of pavements applied in accordance with these specifications and at the locations shown on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PARKING LOT PAVEMENT MARKING A. Furnish in accordance with TxDOT DMS-8200, "Traffic Paint." B. Glass Traffic Beads. Furnish drop on glass beads C. Labeling. Use clearly marked containers that indicate color, mass, material type, manufacturer. 2.2 ROADWAY PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Materials: Use materials that produce an adherent, retroreflective pavement marking system that meets all of the performance requirements of this Specification. Use materials that do not result in the generation of any hazardous materials/wastes. If requested, provide a laboratory report from a commercial laboratory indicating material used does not result in the generation of any hazardous materials/wastes during application or removal. B. Use a multipolymer resin material, as follows: l . 2-component (a predominantly iultipolymer pigmented resin component with a curing agent component). 2. 100% solids, producing no toxic fiimes when heated to application temperature. 3. Track -free in less than 40 min. with appropriate ambient temperature as recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Formulated and tested to perform as a pavement marking material with glass spheres applied to the surface. 5. On the TxDOT Material Producer List for Pavement Markings (Multipolymer). C. Before work begins, provide a laboratory report from an independent testing laboratory showing that the initial color of each material selected for use conforms to the color limits set forth in Table 1, measured by 45'/0' geometry CIE, D65 Illuminant, 2° standard observation angle in accordance with ASTM E 1347, E 1348, or E 1349. 01269212 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02513 - 1 10/13 34cn Street Paving Improvements , Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Weather Limitations 1. Apply markings on surfaces with a minimum surface temperature of 50°F, when measured in accordance with TxDOT test method Tex-829-B. 2. Apply markings during good weather unless otherwise directed. If markings are placed at Contractor option when inclement weather is impending and the markings are damaged by subsequent precipitation, the Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with replacing the markings if required. B. Equipment 1. Parking Lot Pavement Markings. Use pavement marking application equipment as follows: a. Is maintained in satisfactory condition. b. Meets or exceeds the requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and Texas Railroad Commission for this application. C. Uses an automatic bead dispenser attached to the pavement marking equipment. d. Can provide continuous mixing and agitation of the pavement marking material. e. Lines with clean edges, uniform cross-section and thickness, and reasonably square ends. f. Beads uniformly and almost instantly upon the marking as the marking is being applied. g. Beads uniformly during the application of two adjacent lines. Each line must have an equivalent bead yield rate and embedment. h. Type II and Type III beads from separate bead applicators, when applying a combination of Type II and Type III beads. 2. Roadway Pavement Markings. Use pavement marking application equipment as follows: 01269212 10/13 a. A minimum of 40,000 feet of 4 inch solid or broken markings per day at the specified thickness over five consecutive days. b. Linear markings up to 8 inch wide in a single pass. C. Markings other than solid or broken lines at an approved rate. d. A center -line and no -passing barrier -line configuration consisting of one broken line with two solid lines at the same time to the alignment, spacing, and thickness shown on the plans. e. White lines from both sides. f. Lines with clean edges, uniform cross-section and thickness, and reasonably square ends. g. Skip lines between 10 and 10 1/2 ft., an approximate stripe -to -gap ratio of one to three, and a stripe -gap cycle between 39 1/2 feet and 40 1/2 feet. h. Beads uniformly and almost instantly upon the marking as the marking is being applied. i. Beads uniformly during the application of two adjacent lines. Each line must have an equivalent bead yield rate and embedment. Additional Roadway Pavement Markings Equipment. a. Provide a colorimeter using 45 0/0 ° geometry CIE, D65 Illuminant, 2 ° standard observation angle meeting the requirements of ASTM 1347, E 1348, or E 1349. b. Provide a portable retrofeflectometer meeting the requirements ofASTM E 1710. PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02513 - 2 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.2 CONSTRUCTION A. Place markings before opening to traffic unless short-term or work zone markings are allowed. B. Obtain approval for the sequence of work and estimated daily production. C. Apply markings on pavement that is completely dry and passes the following tests: D. Place a 1 sq. ft., clear piece of plastic on the pavement and weigh down the edges. The pavement is dry if, after observation for 15 minutes, no condensation occurs on the underside of the plastic. 3.3 PARKING LOT PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Apply markings: 1. Using dimensions, colors and at locations shown in the plans. 2. In proper alignment with the guides without deviating from the alignment more than 2 inch maximum. 3. Free of blisters and with no more than 5%, by area, holes or voids. 4. With uniform cross section and thickness. 5. With clean and reasonably square ends. 6. Using personnel skilled and experienced with installation of pavement markings. 7. Remove all applied markings that are not in alignment or sequence as stated in the plans or as stated in the specifications at the Contractor's expense. 8. Apply glass beads immediately following markings to ensure adequate embedment before marking dries. B. Surface Preparation. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, prepare surfaces in accordance with this section. C. Cleaning and Retracing for Asphalt Surfaces. Air -blast or broom the pavement surface to remove loose material, unless otherwise shown on the plans. D. Application 1. Apply markings at an application rate of 100-110 square feet per gallon for a solid 4 inch line and same rate adjusted proportionally for other widths. The addition of thinner will not be permitted. 3.4 ROADWAY PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Apply Markings: l . According to multipolymer's manufacturer's recommendations using widths, colors, and shapes, and at locations as shown on the plans. 2. Establish guides to mark lateral location of pavement and have guide locations verified using materials that will not leave a permanent mark on roadway. 3. In proper alignment with the guides without deviating from the alignment more than 1 inch per 200 feet of roadway or mare than 2 inch maximum. 4. With uniform cross section and thickness. 5. Using personnel skilled and experienced with installation of pavement markings. 6. Remove all applied markings that are not in alignment or sequence as stated in the plans or as stated in the specifications at the Contractor's expense. B. Surface Preparation. Prepare the pavement surface using controlled techniques that minimize pavement damage and hazards to the traveling public and must have prior approval by Engineer prior to commencing the operation. 01269212 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02513 - 3 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.5 3.6 INITIAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Meet the following initial performance requirements after installation. Perform an initial performance evaluation from 7 to 15 days after MPM are installed to verify that the MPM meet the performance requirements for retroreflectivity. Conduct initial retroreflectivity evaluations of placed pavement markings with a portable retroreflectometer. The Contractor is responsible for traffic control when conducting performance evaluations. 1. The Engineer will conduct a visual evaluation for color and durability and require testing only if MPM do not appear to meet the performance requirements. 2. For MPM not meeting performance requirements, repair or replace until re-evaluation shows the MPM meet the performance requirements. B. Color: Provide MPM consisting of pigments blended to provide color conforming to standard highway colors as shown in Table 1. Table 1 Color Requirements Federal 595 Color Chromatici Coordinates Brightness 1 2 3 4 x x y x y x White 17855 .290 .315 .310 .295 .350 .340 .330 .360 60 Min Yellow 33538 .470 .455 .510 .489 .490 .432 .537 .462 30 Min Black - - - - - - - - - 5 Max C. Retroreflectivity. Provide MPM meeting the minimum retroreflectivity values listed in Table 2. Table 2 Minimum Retroreflectiviq Requirements Color Retroreflectivity, mcd/m2ft, Min White 250 Yellow 175 D. Durability. Provide MPM that do not lose more than 5% of the striping material in a 1,000 foot section of continuous stripe or broken stripe (25 broken stripes). Pavement markings must remain in the proper alignment and location. PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS A. Provide traffic control and conduct evaluations of color, retroreflectivity, and durability as required or directed. B. Color: Measure the color using 45'/0' geometry CIE, D65 Illuminant, 2° standard observation angle in accordance with ASTM E 1347, E 1348, or E 1349. C. Retroreflectivity: l . Unless otherwise shown on the plans, conduct retroreflectivity evaluations of pavement markings with a portable retroreflectometer. Make all measurements in the direction of traffic flow, except for broken centerline on 2-way roadways, where measurements will be made in both directions. 2. Take a minimum of 1 measurement every half mile on each series of markings (i.e., edgeline, center skip line, each line of a double line, etc.), at approved locations. If more than 1 measurement is taken, average the measurements. For all markings measured in 01269212 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02513 - 4 10/13 0 9 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue both directions, take a minimum of 1 measurement in each direction. If the measurement taken on a specific series of markings within each mile segment falls below the minimum retroreflectivity values, take a minimum of 5 more measurements within that half mile segment for that series of marking. If the average of these 5 measurements falls below the minimum retroreflectivity requirements, that half mile segment of the applied markings does not meet the performance requirement. D. Durability: Measure the durability in accordance with ASTM D 913 for marking material loss and visual inspection for alignment and location. Conduct evaluations at approved locations. END OF SECTION 01269212 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02513 - 5 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02518 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete paver units. B. Aggregate setting bed. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C 33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. C 136, Method for Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse Aggregate. 3. C 140, Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 4. C 144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 5. C 936, Specification for Solid Interlocking Concrete Paving Units. 6. C 979, Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. 7. D 698, Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using a 5.5-lb Rammer and 12 in. drop. 8. D 1557, Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using a 10-lb Rammer and 18 in. drop. 9. D 2940, Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases for Highways or j Airports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of concrete interlocking pavers for a minimum of three (3) years. B. Installation shall be by a contractor and crew with at least one (1) year of experience in placing interlocking concrete pavers on projects of similar nature or dollar cost. C. Installation Contractor shall conform to all local, state/provincial licensing and bonding requirements. 1.5 SUBMITTALS r H A. Submit product drawings and data. B. Submit full size sample sets of concrete paving units to indicate color and shape selections. r Color will be selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's available colors. C. Submit sieve analysis for grading of mortar. D. Submit test results from an independent testing laboratory for compliance of paving unit requirements to ASTM C 936. f E. Substitutions: Substitutions shall be submitted 10 days prior to bid opening for acceptance. 01269212 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518 - 1 10/13 1_ 34`" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 1.6 MOCK-UPS A. Install a 7 ft. x 7 ft. (2 m x 2 m) paver area as described in Article 3.02. This area will be used to determine surcharge of the bedding sand layer, joint sizes, lines, laying pattern(s), color(s), and texture of the job. This area shall be the standard from which the work will be judged. Consideration shall be given with regard to differences in age of materials from time of mock-up erection to time of actual product delivery. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver concrete pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded, or plastic wrapped cubes capable of transfer by fork lift or clamp lift. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product. B. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of buildings adjacent to paving. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE PAVERS A. Concrete pavers shall be supplied by Pavestone Company, or approved equal. 1. D/FW, Texas: 817.481.5802 2. San Antonio/Austin, Texas: 512.558.7283 3. Dallas Service Center: 972.404.0400 B. Pavers shall meet the following requirements set forth in ASTM C 936, Standard Specification for Interlocking Concrete Paving Units: 1. Average compressive strength of 8,000 psi (55 MPa) with no individual unit under 7,200 psi (50 MPa). 2. Average absorption of 5% with no unit greater than 7% when tested in accordance with ASTM C 140. 3. Resistance to 50 freeze -thaw cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C 67. C. Pigment in concrete pavers shall conform to ASTM C 979. D. Material shall be manufactured in individual layers on production pallets. E. Materials shall be manufactured to produce a solid homogeneous matrix in the produced unit. F. See plans for paver type. 2.2 VISUAL INSPECTION A. All units shall be sound and free of defects that would interfere with the proper placing of unit or impair the strength or permanence of the construction. B. Minor cracks incidental to the usual methods of manufacture, or chipping resulting from customary methods of handling in shipment and delivery, shall not be deemed grounds for rej ection. 01269212 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518 - 2 10/13 341" Street Paving Improvements , Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2.3 SAMPLING AND TESTING A. Manufacturer shall provide access to lots ready for delivery to the Owner or his authorized representative for testing in accordance with ASTM 936 82 for sampling of material prior to commencement of paver placement. B. Manufacturer shall provide a minimum of three (3) years testing backup data showing manufactured products that meet and exceed ASTM 936-82 when tested in compliance with ASTM C-140. C. Sampling shall be random with a minimum of nine (9) specimens per 20,000 sq. ft. per product shape and size with repeated samples taken every additional 20,000 sq. ft. or a fraction thereof. D. Test units in accordance with ASTM for compressive strength, absorption and dimensional tolerance. A minimum of three (3) specimens per test required for an average value. Testing of full units is preferred. 2.4 REJECTION A. In the event the shipment fails to conform to the specified requirements, the manufacturer may sort it, and new test units shall be selected at random by the Owner from the retained lot and tested at the expense of the manufacturer. If the second set of test units fails to conform to the specified requirements, the entire lot shall be rejected. 2.5 EXPENSE OF TESTS A. The expense of inspection and testing shall be borne by the Owner. - �N 016111 VTIRI 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that subgrade preparation, compacted density and elevations conform to the specifications. Compact subgrade to density shown on the plans. Stabilization of the subgrade and/or base material may be necessary with weak or saturated subgrade soils. The Architect/Engineer should inspect subgrade preparation, elevations, and conduct density tests for conformance to specifications. B. Verify that geotextiles, if applicable, have been placed according to specifications. C. Verify that aggregate base materials, thickness, compaction, surface tolerances, and elevations conform to the specifications. D. Verify location, type, installation and elevations of edge restraints around the perimeter area to be paved. E. Verify that base is dry, uniform, even, and ready to support sand, pavers, and imposed loads. F. Beginning of bedding sand and paver installation means acceptance of base and edge restraints. 01269212 10/13 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518 - 3 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Concrete pavers in pedestrian rated areas only are to be placed on a 4" concrete base with a 1" sand base between pavers and the concrete. B. Concrete pavers in vehicular rated sidewalks shall be placed on a 6" concrete base with a 1" sand base between pavers and the concrete. C. Concrete base shall be a minimum of 3500 psi. D. 1" bedding sand to be placed between the concrete base and the concrete pavers. E. Ensure the concrete pavers are free of foreign objects before installation. F. Lay concrete pavers in the pattern shown on the drawings. Maintain straight pattern lines. G. Joints shall be on average 1/8 in. wide. H. Fill gaps at the edges of the paved area with cut pavers. I. Final surface elevations shall not deviate more than 3/8 in. under a 10 ft. long straightedge. J. The surface elevations of pavers shall be 1/8 in. above adjacent concrete collars. K. Survey sand in all joints to insure tight fit joints. END OF SECTION 01269212 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518 - 4 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02631 STORM SEWER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Storm Sewers and appurtenances. B. Reinforced concrete pipe. C. Reinforced concrete box. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02300 - Earthwork. B. Section 02632 — Cast -In -Place Headwalls and Wingwalls. C. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete, Concrete Headwalls. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C990 — Joints for Concrete Pipe, and Precast Box Sections using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants. B. ASTM C 1433 Precast Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers. C. ASTM D1557 — Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lb/ft3). D. ASTM D2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). E. ASTM D3017 - Test Methods for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe, precast inlets, fittings and accessories. 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products specified. 1.7 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 01269212 STORM SEWER 02631 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRECAST CONCRETE A. Pipe: 1. The design live load will be HS 20. 2. The 28-day compressive strength shall be a minimum of 5,000 psi. 3. Reinforced Concrete Pipe shall conform to Item 464 of the 2004 TxDOT Standard Specifications. 4. Reinforced concrete box culvert shall conform to Item 462 of the 2004 TxDOT Standard Specifications. B. Joint: 1. Pre -formed flexible joint sealant shall be used for sealing joints of tongue and groove concrete culvert. 2. Flexible joint sealants shall meet the requirements of ASTM C990. 3. Provide a size of the preformed flexible joint sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and large enough to properly seal the joint. 4. Flexible joint sealants must be protected by a suitable wrapper and the jointing material must maintain integrity when the wrapper is removed. 5. The flexible joint sealant shall conform to item 464.2.I.4 of the 2004 TxDOT Standard Specifications. C. Concrete pipe culverts shall meet ASTM C76 for Class IV, Wall B pipe. 2.2 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS A. Bedding: Sand material meeting the requirements of Section 02320 - Backfill Materials for Structures. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. End of Concrete Culvert Headwalls as shown in the plans. Concrete and reinforcement as specified in Sections 02632 — Cast -in -Place Headwalls and Wingwalls and Section 03300 — Cast -in -Place Concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Earthwork. Refer to Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures and as indicated on Drawings. B. Line and Grade. Contractor shall establish the line and grade as indicated on Drawings. Maintain this control for a minimum of 100 feet behind and ahead of the pipe -laying operation. Use amply sized grade boards. Protect grade boards and location stakes from damage or dislocation. Use of laser beam equipment to establish and maintain proper line and grade of the work is acceptable. C. Trench Excavation. Excavate pipe trenches to a level as indicated on the trench detail Drawings. Backfill the excavation with the specified bedding material to the level indicated on the drawings. Tamp and compact backfill to provide bedding at the indicated grade. Form the bedding foundation to the minimum depth indicated on the drawings. 01269212 STORM SEWER 02631 - 2 10/13 34`" Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.2 LAYING AND INSTALLING PIPE A. Install and maintain excavation supports. B. The Owner shall inspect all culverts before being laid, and reject any section at his discretion that is damaged by handling or is defective to a degree which will materially affect the function and service of the pipe. C. Install pipe only after excavation is completed, bottom of trench is shaped, bedding material is installed, and trench has been approved by the Engineer. D. Install pipe to the line and grade indicated on Drawings. Place pipe so that it has continuous bearing of barrel on bedding material and is laid in the trench so the interior surfaces of the pipe follow the grades and alignments indicated. E. Install pipe with the spigot ends toward the direction of flow. F. The laying of the culvert in the finished trench shall be started at the lowest point and laid upgrade. When tongue and groove pipe is used, the grooved end shall be laid upgrade. G. Form a concentric joint with each section of adjoining pipe to prevent offsets. H. Place and drive home newly laid sections with come -a -long winches to eliminate damage to sections. Use of back hoes or similar powered equipment will not be allowed for placing or joining pipe, unless protective measures are provided and approved in advance by the Engineer. I. Keep interior of pipe clean as installation progresses. Where cleaning after laying the pipe is difficult because of small pipe size, use a suitable swab or drag inside the pipe and pull it forward past each joint immediately after the joint has been completed. Maintain clean gaskets and gasket sealing surfaces. J. Keep excavations free of water during construction and until final inspection. K. When work is not in progress, cover the exposed ends of pipes with a plug specifically designed as pipe plug to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe. L. Culvert shall not be laid on frozen ground. M. Culvert which is not true in alignment, or which shows any settlement after laying shall be taken up and relaid without extra compensation. N. Construct sloping reinforced headwall as shown in the plans. A. Construct manholes to conform to requirements of Section 02082 — Pre -Cast Concrete Manholes and Vaults. B. Install headwalls and wingwalls to conform to requirements of Section 02632 — Cast -In -Place Headwalls and Wingwalls. Install inlets and control structures according to the Drawings and Section 03300 — Cast -In -Place Concrete. C. Excavate and backfill headwalls, wingwalls, inlets, and control structures in accordance with Section 02300 — Earthwork. 3.4 BACKFILL i t A. Backfill trench after pipe installation is inspected and approved by the Engineer. - B. Bed pipes with materials conforming to requirements of Section 02320 — Backfill Materials for Structures and as indicated on Drawings. C. Backfill and compact soil in accordance with Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures. D. Install flowable fill at sides and over top of pipe. 01269212 STORM SEWER 02631 - 3 10/13 1 I _, 34`" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue E. Asphalt Stabilized Base or Cement Stabilized Base should be used for fill over the top of pipe or box if cover depth is less than 24-inches below pavement structure and should be subsidiary to culvert and/or storm drain pipe installation. Flowable Fill should conform to TxDOT Item 401— Flowable Backfill. F. The material shall be thoroughly consolidated and shovel sliced to eliminate voids near the pipe. 3.5 CLEANING AND RESTORATION OF SITE A. After the backfill is completed, the Contractor shall dispose of all surplus material, dirt and rubbish from the site. Surplus dirt may be deposited in shoulders or as ordered by the Owner. B. Repair and replace removed or damaged pavement and sidewalks as specified in the following applicable sections and shown on the drawings: 1. Unpaved roadway surfaces consisting of flexible base as the surface course: Section 02300 — Earthwork. 2. Flexible base under paved roadway: Section 02300 — Earthwork. 3. Asphalt stabilized base: Section 02741 — Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving. 4. Hot -mix surface or wearing course: Section 02741 — Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving. 5. Concrete pavement, valley gutter, curb and gutter, driveways, and sidewalks: Section 02751 — Portland Cement Concrete Pavement. 6. Sealing pavement joints: Section 02764 — Pavement Joint Sealants. C. Grade surface as a uniform slope to natural grade as indicated on the drawings. Provide the minimum depth of topsoil of 6 inches, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified to be a greater depth, and seed or sod according to requirements of Section 02900 - Seeding and Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures. D. In paved areas, clean street in which storm sewer is placed by rotary broom, or street sweeper, or both as necessary to remove dirt, rock and debris. E. Clean haul streets and other paved areas used during construction by rotary broom, or street sweeper, or both as necessary to remove dirt, rock and debris. F. Street cleaning to take place within 10 calendar days after street repairs are complete. G. Dispose of dirt, rock and debris from cleaning according to Section 01576 — Waste Material Disposal. H. After all work is completed, the Contractor shall remove all tools and other equipment, leaving the entire site free, clear and in good condition. I. Performance of the cleaning and restoration work described herein is not payable directly but shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor covered under the contract unit price for the storm sewer. 3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Lay pipe to alignment and slope gradients noted on drawings; with maximum variation from hue slope of 1/2-inch. B. Maximum Offset of Pipe From True Alignment: 6 inches. C. Maximum Variation in Profile of Structure From Intended Position: 0.2 percent. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Field inspection and testing. B. Request inspection prior to and immediately after placing cover over pipe. 01269212 STORM SEWER 02631 - 4 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue C. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures. D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect all structures and bedding from damage or displacement while placing pipes and inlets, and during backfilling operation. END OF SECTION 01269212 STORM SEWER 02631 - 5 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02633 EXTENDING CULVERT AND STORM DRAIN PIPE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Prepare and construct extensions of existing structures. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02300 — Earthwork B. Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfll for Structures C. Section 03300 — Cast -in -Place Concrete D. TxDOT Item 464 — Reinforced Concrete Pipe 1.4 CONSTRUCTION Conditions and A. Verification 1. Verify pertinent dimensions and elevations of the existing structure before ordering any required materials. B. Excavation 1. Perform work in accordance with Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures and the requirements of this Section. C. Removal. 1. Carefully remove portions of the existing structure to the lines and dimensions shown on the plans or as directed. Dispose of these materials as shown on the plans or as directed. 2. Use removal equipment, as approved that will not damage the portion of the structure that is to remain. D. Connection 1. Connect reinforced concrete pipe to corrugated metal pipe with a suitable concrete collar having a minimum thickness of 6 in. or as shown on the plans. 2. Grout spaces between existing and new pipes such that the transition will be smooth. Grout shall extend a minimum of 12 in. into the existing pipe from the location of the splice or end of the new pipe. E. Damage 1. If items designated for reuse are damaged by the Contractor, replace them with new material or restore them to previous condition, as approved. The Contractor may remove and dispose of existing structures and construct new structures at no expense to the Owner if approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 01269212 EXTENDING CULVERT AND STORM DRAIN PIPE 02633 - 1 10/13 341' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02665 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section of the specifications covers all water piping, force main piping, lift station piping, valves, and fittings required for the project. The term piping as used herein shall include all piping, valves, fittings and accessories as shown on the plans and/or as specified herein. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings. B. Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures. 1.4 MATERIAL SCHEDULE A. All water supply lines shall be C900 DR 18 PVC pipe except as noted below. B. Miscellaneous piping shall be furnished and installed as indicated on the drawings. Sanitary sewer piping shall be as specified in Section 02730 — Sanitary Sewer Line Construction. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all manufactures data for all pipe, valves and fitting including all pipe thickness class calculations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PVC PIPE A. PVC pipe shall be of the rubber gasketed, push on joint type (Bell-Tite or approved equal), AWWA C-900, Class 150 (DR 18) for sizes < 14" diameter. B. PVC pipe shall be of the rubber gasketed, push on joint type (Bell-Tite or approved equal), AWWA C-905, PR = 235(DR 18) for sizes >14" diameter. C. All PVC pipe shall be approved by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) for use in the transportation of potable water and shall bear the NSF seal of approval. 01269212 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665 - 1 10/13 i__, 34th Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2.2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (DIP) A. Ductile iron pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C151. In general, ductile iron pipe shall have flanged fittings when installed above and below ground. Pipe thickness shall be as required for the scheduled internal working pressure with minimum Thickness Class 50. Thickness for buried pipe shall be computed in accordance with AWWA C150 for appropriate depths of cover. B. All ductile iron pipe shall have an exterior bituminous coating and shall be cement lined in conformance with AWWA C104. C. Flanged joints shall meet the requirements of AWWA C 115. Bolts and nuts shall be of the best quality mild steel and shall have hexagonal heads. Suitable rubber ring gaskets shall be provided in all flanged joints. Flanges shall be of ductile iron. D. Mechanical joints and push -on joints shall conform to the requirements of AWWA CI I I unless otherwise specified. E. The pipe shall be new and of best quality in materials and workmanship. All pipe shall be subjected to thorough inspection at the job site before being placed. Any piece found to be defective shall be rejected and removed from the project. 2.3 EXTERIOR DUCTILE IRON PIPE COATING A. Surface Preparation — Solvent wipe all surfaces to remove oil, grease, or other contaminants. Measure existing surface profile of substrate. If existing profile is 1.5 mils or greater, hand or power tool clean all rusted areas per SSPC — SP2 or SSPC-SP3. If profile is less than 1.5 mils, brush-off blast entire surface per SSPC-SP7. B. Prime Coat — Tnemec Series 135 at 4.0 — 6.0 dry mils. C. Second Coat — Tnemec Series 135 at 4.0 — 6.0 dry mils. 2.4 PIPE FITTINGS A. General - Pipe fittings shall be of a type and design especially suitable for use with the type of piping with which they are installed. Pressure rating of fittings shall not be less than that of the pipe. 1. Fittings shall be ductile iron and shall be mechanical joint or push -on joint unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings. 2. All flanged fittings shall be faced and drilled in accordance with the standard drilling for ANSI B 16.1 Class 125 flanges rated for at least 250 psi working pressure. Bolts for flanged joints shall be of the length and diameter required by the ANSI Specification. Bolts and nuts shall be of best quality mild steel and shall be provided with hexagonal heads. Suitable 1/8" thick rubber ring gaskets shall be provided for all flanged joints. B. Ductile Iron Fittings - Ductile iron fittings shall conform to AWWA C 110. In general, flanged fittings shall be used on all exposed piping and all other fittings shall be mechanical joint or push -on joint unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings. All fittings shall have a pressure rating equal to that of the pipe with which they are used but in no case less than 150 psi. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, all ductile iron fittings shall have an external bituminous coating and shall be cement -lined in accordance with the AWWA specifications C104 and C 106 respectively. 2. All ductile iron fittings shall be cast from the same quality of metal used in casting the ductile iron pipe and shall be subjected to the same test requirements. Marking and weighing shall be as required for the ductile iron pipe. 01269212 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665 - 2 10/13 1 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue Where flanged fittings are used the flanges shall be of the same material as the fitting. Where bell or mechanical joint fittings are used, the bells shall be cast integrally with the fitting. Screwed -on bells will not be acceptable. 2.5 PIPE JOINTS A. Push -on Joints - Push -on joints shall be as specified in AWWA Standard C111. B. Mechanical Joints - Mechanical joints shall be as specified in AWWA Standard C111. C. Flanged Joints - Flanged joints shall meet the requirements of ANSI B 16.1 (Class 125) rated for a working pressure of not less than 250 psi. Bolts shall be of the length and diameter required by the ANSI Specification for Class 125 flanges. Bolts and nuts shall be ofbest quality mild steel and shall be provided with hexagonal heads, except where other types of bolts are specified. Tighten bolts progressively to prevent unbalanced stress. Draw bolts tight to insure proper setting of gaskets. Suitable full face gaskets shall be used in all flanged joints. D. Miscellaneous Joints - Miscellaneous types of joints shall be made as specified in other paragraphs or as recommended by the manufacturer. All joints shall be made using materials and methods as required to produce joints that will function satisfactorily under the various conditions encountered. 2.6 VALVES A. General - Valves shall be gate valves unless otherwise noted on the plans or specified herein. All valves shall be designed for a working pressure of at least 150 psi unless otherwise noted. B. Gate Valves - All gate valves shall be resilient seat, iron body, bronze mounted throughout and shall meet all requirements of AWWA C 509. The valves shall be of the type of joint used in the piping. All valves shall be opened by turning to the left, and unless otherwise specified, shall have non -rising stems when buried and outside screw and yoke when exposed. Valves shall be furnished with a two-inch operating nut when buried or with hand wheels when exposed. Gate valves shall be furnished with 0-ring stem packing and shall be Mueller 2360 Series or approved equal. C. Check Valves 1. Check Valves — shall be surgemaster swing check valves series #7200 as manufactured by Val-Matic Valve and Manufacturing Corporation, Elmhurst, IL USA, unless otherwise shown on the plans. 2. The Check Valve shall be of the full body type, with a domed access cover and only two moving parts, the flexible disc and the disc accelerator. 3. The valves shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with American Water Works Association Standards ANSI/AWWA C508. 4. Valves shall be provided with flanges in accordance with ANSI B 16.1, Class 125. 5. The valve body shall be full flow equal to nominal pipe diameter at all points through the valve. The valve shall be capable of passing a 3 in. (75mm) sphere. The seating surface shall be on a 45 degree angle to minimize disc travel. A threaded port with pipe plug shall be provided on the bottom of the valve to allow for field installation of a backflow actuator, air cushion or hydraulic cushion without special tools or removing the valve from the line. 6. The top access port shall be full size, allowing removal of the disc without removing the valve from the line. The access cover shall be domed in shape to provide flushing action over the disc for operating in lines containing high solids content. A threaded port with pipe plug shall be provided in the access cover to allow for field installation of a mechanical, disc position indicator. 01269212 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665 - 3 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 7. The disc shall be of one-piece construction, precision molded with an integral o-ring type sealing surface, and contain alloy steel and nylon reinforcement in the flexible hing area. The flex portion of the disc shall be warranted for twenty-five years. Non -slam closing characteristics shall be provided through a short 35 degree disc stroke and a disc accelerator. 8. The disc accelerator shall be of one piece construction and provide rapid closure of the valve in high head applications. The disc accelerator shall be enclosed within the valve and shall be field adjustable and replaceable without removal of the valve from the line. The disc accelerator shall be securely held in place by being captured between the cover and disc. It shall be formed with a large radius to allow smooth movement over the disc surface. 9. The valve disc shall be cycle tested 1,000,000 times in accordance with ANSI/AWWA and show no signs of wear, cracking, or distortion to the valve disc or seat and shall remain drop tight at both high and low pressures. The test results shall be independently certified. 10. The valve body and cover shall be constructed of ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron. 11. The disc shall be precision molded Buna-N (NBR), ASTM D2000-13G. 12. The disc accelerator shall be type 302 stainless steel. 13. The manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of five (5) years experience in the manufacture of resilient, flexible disc check valves with air and hydraulic cushions. 14. All valves shall be hydrostatically tested and seat tested to demonstrate zero leakage. When requested the manufacturer shall provide test certificates, dimensional drawings, parts list drawings, and operation and maintenance manuals. 15. The exterior and interior of the valve shall be coated with an ANSLNSF 61 approved fusion bonded epoxy coating. 16. Surgebuster Swing Check Valves shall be Series #7200 as manufactured by Val-Matic® Valve & Manufacturing Corporation, Elmhurst, IL. USA. D. Butterfly Valves —All butterfly valves shall be elastomeric seat with a cast-iron body. All valves shall conform to AWWA C504. The valves shall be of the type of joint used in the piping. The valves shaft shall be corrosion resistant and constructed of type 304,18-8 stainless steel. The shaft is one piece, through -shaft construction sized to meet or exceed requirements of AWWA C504 for Class 150B service. The valve shall have self-lubricating nylon bearings. The disc shall be secured to the valve shaft by stainless steel pins sized to transmit torques required and stresses imposed under severe operating conditions. The disc shall be cast iron ASTM A-126 Class B with 316 stainless steel disc edge. All butterfly valves shall be Mueller Lineseal III Butterfly Valves 4"-20" Design. E. Valve Boxes and Extension Stems - Extension stems shall be furnished on buried valves where the top of the operating nut is more than 36-inches below finished grade. Top of the extension stem shall not be more than 9-inches below the top of the valve box. 1. Buried valves shall be provided with cast iron valve boxes. The boxes shall be designed to fit over a section of 6-inch C900 PVC riser pipe which will be used as an extension from the top of the valve to within 8-inches of the ground surface. The box shall have a heavy cast iron cover. The box shall have a flange type base, with the base being approximately 4 inches larger in diameter than the outside diameter of the barrel of the box. The necessary length of 6-inch C900 PVC riser pipe required for the extension shall be considered as a part of the box. 01269212 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665 - 4 10/13 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2.7 TAPPING SLEEVES A. Tapping sleeves shall be full wrap -around type. The sleeves shall be stainless steel or cast iron tapping sleeves as manufactured by Mueller, M & H or Clow Corporation and shall be Class 150. 2.8 POLYETHYLENE WRAP A. All buried valves and iron fittings shall be thoroughly wrapped prior to installation with a polyethylene material meeting the requirements of ASTM D 1248. The wrapping shall extend beyond the valve or fitting a minimum of 6 inches. The polyethylene material shall have a minimum thickness of 8 mil. The wrap shall be secured by 2" duct type. 2.9 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS AND FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS A. Flanged coupling adapters and flexible couplings shall be provided at the locations shown on the drawings and at other locations required for installation of the piping system. Flanged coupling adapters will be provided with anchoring studs to provide thrust restraint. Epoxy coated steel construction shall be used for all couplings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All pipe and accessories shall be unloaded, handled, laid, jointed, tested for defects and for leakage and disinfected in the manner herein specified. 3.2 INSPECTION A. The pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the progress of the work and any material found to be defective will be rejected by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall remove such defective material from the site of the work. 3.3 RESPONSIBILITY FOR MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material furnished by him and he shall replace at his own expense all such material that is found to be defective in manufacture or has become damaged in handling after delivery. 3.4 HANDLING PIPE AND ACCESSORIES A. All pipe, fittings, valves, and other accessories shall, unless otherwise directed, be unloaded at the point of delivery, hauled to and distributed at the site of the work by the Contractor. In loading and unloading, they shall be lifted by hoists or slid, or rolled on skidways in such a manner as to avoid shock or damage to the materials. Under no circumstances shall they be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways must not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. B. The pipe, fittings and accessories shall be placed along the site in such a manner as to be kept as free as possible from dirt, sand, mud and other foreign matter. 01269212 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665 - 5 10/13 C 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.5 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE A. All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the lines and grades shown on the plans or as established on the ground by the Engineer. B. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line either in a vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions, to plumb valves, or where vertical or horizontal curves are shown or permitted, the degree of deflection at each joint shall not exceed the maximum deflection recommended by the manufacturer of the particular type of pipe being laid and the degree of deflection shall be approved by the Engineer. 3.6 MANNER OF HANDLING PIPE AND ACCESSORIES INTO TRENCH A. After the trench grade has been completed, all bell holes dug and the grade inspected, the pipes and accessories may be placed in the trench. All pipe, fittings, and valves shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of derricks, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment, in such a manner so as to prevent damage to the material in any way. Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped in to the trench. 3.7 CLEANING AND INSPECTING A. Before being placed, the pipe shall be again inspected for defects and the pipe, while suspended, shall be lightly hammered to detect cracks. Any defective, damaged or unsound pipe and materials shall be rejected. B. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the inside of the pipe and from all bells, spigots or parts of the pipe used in forming the joint, before the pipe is placed, and it shall be kept clean by approved means during and after laying. C. At time when pipe placing is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by approved means, and no water shall be allowed to enter the pipe. 3.8 LAYING AND JOINTING DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. General - Unless otherwise directed, pipe shall be laid with bells facing in direction of laying; and for lines on appreciable slopes, bells shall, at the discretion of the Engineer, face up grade. 1. Cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or the cement lining. 2. The jointing shall be completed for all pipe laid each day, in order not to leave joints open overnight. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends ofpipe shall be closed by approved means, and no water shall be permitted to enter the pipe. 3. Flanged joints shall be used where shown on the plans. Mechanical joint, or other approved joints shall be installed with materials furnished by the manufacturer and in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. 4. Before laying the pipes, all lumps, blisters and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot ends of each pipe; the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry. Pipe ends shall be kept clean until joints are made. 5. Defective joints shall be repaired as directed by the Engineer. 01269212 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665 - 6 10/13 34"' Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue B. Mechanical Joint Piping - The last 8 in. outside of the spigot and inside of the bell of mechanical joint pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove oil, grit, excess coating, and other foreign matter from the joint, and then painted with lubricant recommended by the pipe manufacturer. The cast-iron gland shall then be slipped on the spigot end of the pipe with the lip extension of the gland toward the socket or bell end. The rubber gasket shall be painted with lubricant recommended by the pipe manufacturer and placed on the spigot end with the thick edge toward the gland. 1. The entire section of the pipe shall be pushed forward to seat the spigot end in the bell. The gasket shall then be pressed into place within the bell; care shall be taken to locate the gasket evenly around the entire joint. The gland shall be moved along the pipe into position for bolting, all of the bolts inserted, and the nuts screwed up tightly with the fingers. All nuts shall be tightened with a suitable torque -limiting wrench. 2. Nuts spaced 180 deg. apart shall be tightened alternately in order to produce an equal pressure on all parts of the gland. C. Flanged Joints - Flanged joints where used shall be bolted with Flange bolts of best quality mild steel and of the size and length required by American Standards Association; bolts and nuts shall be provided with standard hexagonal heads. Gasket rings shall be used and shall be made of best quality rubber composition sheet packing one -eighth (1/8) inch thick, of a brand and quality approved by the Engineer. 1. The pipe and fittings shall be properly aligned and free to move in any direction while bolting, and the bolts shall be gradually tightened at a uniform rate around the entire flange. D. Push -On -Joints - The inside of the bell and the outside of the spigot end shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove oil, grit, excess coating, and other foreign matter. The circular rubber gasket shall be flexed inward and inserted in the gasket recess of the bell socket. 1. A thin film of gasket lubricant shall be applied to either the inside surface of the gasket or the spigot end of the pipe or both. Gasket lubricant shall be as supplied by the pipe manufacturer. 2. The spigot end of the pipe shall be entered into the socket with care used to keep the joint from contacting the ground. The joint shall then be completed by forcing the plain end to the bottom of the socket with a forked tool or jack -type tool or other device. Pipe that is not furnished with a depth mark shall be marked before assembly to assure that the spigot end is inserted to the full depth of the joint. Field -cut pipe lengths shall be filed or ground to resemble the spigot end of such pipe as manufactured. 3. The jointing shall be completed for all pipe laid each day, in order not to leave open joints overnight. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be properly plugged. 4. Immediately after completion of the jointing, sufficient bedding and backfill material shall be placed around and over the pipe to hold the pipe to line and grade. 5. Premoulded joints shall be made in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the pipe. The surfaces of the jointing material on both the bell and the spigot at each joint shall be wiped with the solvent recommended by the pipe manufacturer. The spigot shall then be firmly forced into the bell using a bar or other similar lever and a block of wood to prevent damage to the pipe. 3.9 SETTING VALVES, VALVE BOXES AND FITTINGS A. Valves and fittings shall be set at the locations shown on the plans or at locations as established by the Engineer, and shall be set and jointed to the pipe in the manner heretofore specified for pipe installations. All valves buried in the ground shall have a valve box set over the valve. All 01269212 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665 - 7 10/13 30 Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue valves shall be thoroughly inspected and checked for operation before installation. Concrete blocking shall be provided for all buried valves and fittings. -- B. Valve boxes shall be firmly supported and maintained centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with box cover flush with the surface of the ground or at such level as directed. 3.10 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING A. The trench shall be excavated to the lines and grades as established by the Engineer and as shown on the plans. The minimum depth of cover for all pipe shall be forty-eight (48) inches unless otherwise specifically shown on the drawings. B. The minimum width of the trench shall be the outside diameter of the pipe plus twelve (12) inches and the maximum width shall be the outside diameter of the pipe plus eighteen (18) inches or as shown on the plans. The trenching equipment shall be maintained on a sufficiently level road bed to provide substantially vertical trench walls. C. The trench shall be excavated to an even grade so that the bottom of the pipe will rest on the bottom of the trench over the entire length of pipe. In order to obtain a true even grade, the trench shall be fine graded by hand. D. Any part of the trench excavated below grade shall be corrected by filling with approved material and compacting thoroughly. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for implementing a trench shoring system wherever the trench depth exceeds five (5) feet. The Contractor shall refer to Section 02151- Trench Safety for guidelines on trench shoring methods for pipelines. F. If ledge rock, rock fragments or other unyielding material is encountered in the bottom of the trench it shall be removed to a depth of six inches below grade, refilled with selected material, and thoroughly compacted. G. Bell holes of ample dimensions shall be dug at each joint to permit the jointing of pipe to be made properly, and of sufficient depth to prevent the bell of the pipe from resting on undisturbed materials. H. Wherever necessary to prevent caving, the trench shall be adequately supported as required by the drawings and specifications. The Contractor is entirely responsible for assuring that trenches are adequately supported to protect both his workmen and the public. I. Trench digging machinery may be used to snake the trench excavations except in places where operation of same would cause damages to pipelines, fences or other existing structures either above or below ground; in such instances hand methods shall be employed. The Contractor shall locate all existing underground lines of which he has been advised, whether or not they are shown on the drawings, sufficiently in advance of trenching operations to prevent any damage thereto. The operators of all oil or gas pipelines shall be notified prior to excavation around such lines so that these operators may be present during excavation. Extensive care shall be used to prevent damage to these lines and the Contractor shall be fully responsible for damage to any such line. J. All excavated material shall be piled in a manner that will not endanger the work or existing structures. Excess trench excavation, not used for backfilling, shall be disposed of by Contractor, and at contractor's expense. K. There will be no classification of the excavated materials and the term excavation shall include all materials encountered in excavating the trenches or structural excavations. L. Blasting for excavation of solid rock will not be permitted. M. All new and existing lines shall be properly supported to prevent settlement or damage to the line both during and after construction. ,. 01269212 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665 - 8 10/13 S 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.11 BACKFILLING A. Backfill Material - All backfill material shall be free from cinders, ashes, refuse, vegetable or organic material, boulders, rocks or stones, or other unsuitable material. From 1 foot above the top of the pipe to the existing ground, however, material containing stones up to 4-inches in their greatest dimension may be used. Selected materials from trench excavations shall be used for backfilling except where special bedding material is required. B. Backfilling Under Pipe - All pipe shall be backfilled by hand from the bottom of the trench to the centerline of the pipe with selected backfill material free from rocks or boulders greater than 2 inches in size or other unsuitable material. The material shall be placed in 3-inch layers, moistened if necessary, and thoroughly compacted under and on each side of the pipe. Backfill material shall be deposited in the trench for its full width on each side of the pipe, fitting, and appurtenances simultaneously. C. Backfilling Over Pipe - From the centerline of the pipe to a depth of 1 foot above the top of the pipe, the trench shall be backfilled by hand or by approved mechanical methods using materials free from rocks or boulders greater than 2 inches in size. The material shall be moistened and placed in lifts not exceeding 8-inches in thickness and compacted by tamping to a density of not less than 95% of maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by AASHTO Method T-180. The Contractor shall use special care in placing this portion of the backfill to insure placement under and around the pipe and to avoid injuring or moving the pipe. D. Backfilling to Grade - From 1 foot above the top of the pipe to finish grade shall be backfilled by tamping. Where tamping is required, the material shall be placed in 8-inch layers, moistened if necessary, and thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers from the bottom of the trench to the finish grade to a density of at least 95% of maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D 698 - Modified. E. Anchorage of Bends, Tees and Plugs, Etc. - Reaction or thrust backing shall be applied to all pipe lines at all tees, plugs, caps, and bends. Concrete shall be used for backing the pipe and fittings and shall conform to the concrete specifications as set forth in the Section 03300 - Cast - In -Place Concrete, except a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi will be acceptable. The backing shall be placed between solid ground and the fittings to be anchored; the area of bearing on pipe and on the ground in each instance shall be sufficient to withstand the maximum thrust anticipated and as required by the Engineer. The backing shall be so placed that the pipe and fitting joints will be accessible for repair. 3.12 MARKING TAPE A. All pipes installed in an open trench will be identified with the appropriate color and description of 3 inch wide pipe identification tape. Install the tape parallel to the pipe it identifies at a distance above the pipe of 12 to 18 inches. Install the tape detectable from the top of finished grade with a metal detector above non-metallic (PVC) pipe material. 3.13 LINE TESTING After the pipe is laid and the joints completed, each section or run of piping, shall be tested as specified herein. The Contractor shall bear all costs of providing all equipment, materials, labor and other incidentals required to test pipe lines as specified herein. The Contractor shall provide suitable means for filling the lines and developing the required pressure in the lines. Testing procedure shall be as follows: A. Duration - The duration of the hydrostatic test shall be a minimum of four (4) hours. 01269212 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 10/13 02665 - 9 341° Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue B. Pressure - The pipeline shall be tested so that the pressure at the lowest point in the test section is at least 100%, but not greater than 120% of the pipe pressure class of the pipe, and the minimum pressure at the highest point in the test section is not less than 85% of the pipe pressure class of the pipe. C. Allowable Leakage - The maximum allowable leakage for push -on joints is the number of gallons per hour as determined by the following formula(s): Ductile Iron: PVC: L _ SNP L _ NNP 133,200 7,400 where: L = Allowable leakage in gallons/per hour N = Number of joints in length of pipe tested S = Length of pipe D = Nominal diameter of the pipe in inches P = Average of the max. and min. pressures within the test section in psi Any leakage which becomes evident prior to final acceptance of the project shall be found and repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer even though the particular line has been previously accepted and tested. 3.14 DISINFECTION OF PIPE LINES A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for the disinfection of all potable water pipe lines, which shall be disinfected before being placed in service. The lines shall be disinfected by the application of a chlorinating agent in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C651. B. After disinfection has been completed and the pipe is filled with water, the City will sample the water in the pipe for bacteriological testing. If acceptable bacteriological test results are not received, the Contractor shall disinfect the pipe again and provide whatever measures are necessary to achieve an acceptable result. 3.15 CLEANUP A. The backfrll shall be rounded up over the trench sufficiently to allow for future settlement and any excess dirt shall be removed from the site. B. The Contractor shall maintain the trench surfaces in a satisfactory manner until final completion and acceptance of the work. The maintenance shall include blading from time to time as necessary, filling depressions caused by settlement, and other work required to keep all areas in a presentable condition. END OF SECTION 01269212 WATER WORKS PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 02665 - 10 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02730 SANITARY SEWER LINE CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section of the specifications covers all piping, manholes and accessories required for the sanitary sewer line portion of the project. All materials used in construction of sewer lines shall be of the type and class as shown on the plans and as specified herein for the various items of construction. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings. B. Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures. C. Section 02665 — Water Works Piping, Valves and Fittings. 1.4 APPROVED MATERIAL Unless otherwise shown on the plans or specified herein, sewer piping shall be "approved type pipe". Approved type pipe shall be one of the following: A. Flexible Pipe Materials: 1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC, ASTM F 679) B. Non -Metallic pipe location wire. In the event that non-metallic pipe material is installed along or across an access road, a durable metal wire shall be installed in the trench with the pipe to facilitate locating the pipe in the future. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all manufacturers' data on all pipe, fittings and materials to be used on the project, including pipe thickness class calculations. 1.6 SEPARATION CRITERIA A. New sanitary sewer pipe shall be installed no closer to any water line than 9 feet in all directions. Parallel water and sewer lines must be installed in separate trenches. B. Where a new sanitary sewer pipe crosses a water line, the sewer pipe within 9 feet of the crossing shall be constructed either of PVC or other material as specified and placed no closer than 6 inches from the water line, measured between the nearest outside pipe diameters. The 01269212 SANITARY SEWER LINE CONSTRUCTION 02730 - 1 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue water line shall be located above the sewer line wherever possible and one length of sewer pipe must be centered on the water line. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE A. PVC pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D3034, SDR 21 cell classification 12454B as described in ASTM D1784 SDR 21 (PVC) PR as shown on the plans. B. PVC pipe shall be formed with an integral bell and shall be joined using a gasketed bell and spigot joint. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F477. The nominal joint length shall be 20 feet. 2.2 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS A. Manhole frames and covers shall be of cast iron of the types shown on the drawings. All castings shall be made from superior quality gray cast iron conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 48. Drawings of all manhole frames and covers proposed for use shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before items are shipped. Bolted and gasketed covers shall be furnished at the locations identified on the drawings. f__, 2.3 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE MANHOLES (WITH EPDXY COATING) A. Manholes shall be tongue and groove precast reinforced concrete epoxy coated manholes or (Section 02732 — Glass -Fiber Reinforced Polyester (FRP) Manholes), constructed in accordance with ASTM C 478 of the diameter indicated on the drawings. Concrete manholes shall be provided with a flat top cone unless otherwise shown on the drawings. B. All joints shall be tongue and groove except for the grade rings and all joints shall be watertight. Ram-Nek flexible plastic gaskets or approved equal shall be used in all joints. Manholes shall be epoxy coated as specified in Section 09703 — Rehabilitation and Corrosion Protection. 2.4 ROCK EMBEDMENT MATERIAL A. Where rock embedment is required it shall conform to the following gradation: (ASTM D2321): Passing 1" sieve Passing No. 4 sieve Passing No. 200 sieve % by Weight 100 0-10 0- 5 B. Crushing shall result in a product in which the coarse aggregate shall have at least 85% by weight of particles with one or more fractured faces and 65% by weight ofparticles with two or more fractured faces. The aggregate shall be composed of sound, tough, durable particles and shall meet the requirements for deleterious substances given in ASTM D2321. The coarse aggregate shall not show evidence of disintegration nor show a total loss greater than 20% when subjected to five cycles of the sodium sulphate accelerated soundness test as specified in AASHTO T 104. 01269212 SANITARY SEWER LINE CONSTRUCTION 02730 - 2 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2.5 SOIL EMBEDMENT MATERIAL Material shall be obtained from trench excavation provided it meets the requirements of Class III bedding as defined in ASTM D2321. The material shall be a soil group SC or SM and meet the following requirements. A. Gradation Sieve Size Percent Passing 12" 100% No. 4 50% No. 200 12% to 50% B. Atterberg Limits: 1. SC Soil, PI > 7 2. SM Soil, PI > 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All sewer pipe and fittings shall be unloaded, handled, laid, jointed and tested for defects in the manner herein specified. 3.2 INSPECTION A. The pipe and fittings shall be inspected upon delivery and during the progress of the work and any material found to be defective will be rejected and the Contractor shall remove such defective material from the site of the work. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all materials furnished by him and he shall replace at his own expense all such material that is found to be defective in manufacture or has been damaged in handling after delivery. 3.3 PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION A. Pipe trenches shall be excavated to the lines and grades shown on the drawings or as established by the Engineer. Before excavation begins in paved areas, except in locations shown on the drawings to be bored, the existing pavement shall be cut or sawed to a neat line by methods that meet the approval of the Engineer. Trench widths shall be as shown on the drawings. Trench safety systems as specified and detailed shall be installed where required. The trench walls shall be made vertical to a point one foot above the top of the pipe. Vertical trench walls above this point will not be required; however, in areas of limited right-of-way or when necessary to protect existing facilities or private property, the slope of the trench wall shall be limited. Where necessary to stay within the maximum width limits at the top of the pipe or to maintain a relatively straight trench wall to remain within available right-of-way, the trench walls shall be adequately supported. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for any damage to private property or existing facilities due to inadequate support. B. The minimum and maximum width of the trench shall be as shown on the plans. The trenching equipment shall be maintained on a sufficiently level road bed to provide substantially vertical trench walls. 01269212 SANITARY SEWER LINE CONSTRUCTION 02730 - 3 10/13 341' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue C. The Contractor shall be responsible for implementing a trench shoring system wherever the trench depth exceeds five (5) feet. The Contractor shall refer to Section 02151- Trench Safety Systems for approved trench shoring methods for pipelines. D. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the Contractor will be allowed to have a maximum of 600 feet, of open trench at any time. As soon as practicable after the completion of laying and jointing of the pipe, the trench shall be backf lied. The Contractor shall be responsible for properly and adequately barricading and signing open trenches and excavations to protect the public during the construction of the project. E. In order to obtain a true even grade, the trench shall be fine graded and shaped in accordance with the details as shown on the plans. Any part of the trench excavated below grade shall be corrected by filling with approved material and thoroughly compacting. If clay, rock or other unyielding material is encountered in bottom of the trench, it shall be removed to a depth of six (6) inches below grade, refilled with selected material and thoroughly compacted to grade. F. Bell holes of ample dimensions shall be dug at each joint to permit the jointing and bedding of the pipe to be properly accomplished. G. All excavated material shall be piled in a manner that will not endanger the work or existing structures, or will cause obstruction to roadways. H. Before the next phase of construction can take place above the trench bottom which has been excavated to the proposed subgrade of the specified class of bedding, the Contractor shall shape and grade earth subgrade. The earth subgrade for the bedding shall be free of surface water, firm, solid and stable before the bedding material is placed. 1. Trench digging machinery may be used to make trench excavations except in places where operations of same would cause damage to existing structures either above or below ground; in such instances, hand methods shall be employed. The Contractor shall locate all existing underground lines, of which he has been advised whether or not they are shown on the drawings, sufficiently in advance of trenching operations to prevent any damage thereto. The operators of all oil or gas pipelines shall be notified prior to excavation around such lines so that these operators may be present during excavation. Extreme care shall be used to prevent damage and the Contractor shall be fully responsible for damage to any such lines. J. Wherever necessary to prevent caving, the trench shall be adequately supported as required by Section 02151- Trench Safety Systems. The Contractor is entirely responsible for assuring that trenches are adequately supported to protect both his workmen and the public. K. There will be no classification of or extra payment for excavated materials and all materials encountered shall be excavated as required. Adjacent structures and property shall be protected from damage by construction equipment. L. Blasting for excavation of solid rock not will be permitted. M. The Contractor will be required to locate all known utility lines, including consumer service lines, far enough in advance of the trenching to make proper provisions for protecting the lines and to allow for any deviations that may be required from the established lines and grades. N. The Contractor shall not be allowed to disrupt the service on any utility lines except consumers service lines, which may be taken out of service for short periods of time, if the Contractor obtains permission from the Engineer and the City. O. The Contractor shall immediately notify the proper utility company of any damage to utility lines, in order that service may be established with the least possible delay. Any damage to existing lines and the repair of consumer lines which are authorized to be cut or temporarily taken out of service shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at his own expense, and as directed by an official representative of the owner of the damaged line. P. All new and existing lines shall be properly supported to prevent settlement or damage to the line both during and after construction. 01269212 SANITARY SEWER LINE CONSTRUCTION 02730 - 4 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue Q. Any permanent relocation of existing utility lines shall be done by proper utility company without expense to the Contractor. R. Where pipes, conduits or concrete curbs, gutters, or other obstructions are encountered in the construction, the cost of tunneling shall be included as a part of the cost of the pipe line, or other pay items, complete in place. Cutting of curb and gutter will not be permitted. S. Excess trench excavation, not used for backfilling, shall be disposed of by the Contractor, and at the Contractor's expense. 3.4 EMBEDMENT MATERIAL A. Embedment is defined as the portion of backfill from the bottom of the trench to a point either six inches or one foot above the top of pipe depending on the type of pipe and the depth. B. Materials for embedment. 1. Rock embedment shall be as that specified in this section, Paragraph 2.4. 2. Class III embedment material shall be that defined in ASTM D2321 and as specified in this section, Paragraph 2.5. C. Trench Depths 10 feet or less shall consist of Class III material and compacted to the density specified in this specification, Paragraphs 3.7.A.1 and 3.7.A.2. D. Trench depths greater than 10 feet shall consist of all rock for flexible pipe or for rigid pipe, a combination of rock and Class III material that is placed and compacted to the density specified Li in this specification, Paragraphs 3.7.A.3 and 3.7.A.4. E. Paved and Unpaved Road Crossings shall consist of rock embedment and placed as specified in this specification, Paragraph 3.7.A.5. 0 3.5 BACKFILL MATERIAL A. Backfill is defined as portion of backfill above the embedment to the existing ground. 3.6 PIPE LAYING IN TRENCH A. After the trench has been properly fine graded, the pipe shall be laid in accordance with the following specifications. Each length of pipe shall be inspected for defects and shall be thoroughly cleaned inside and outside of the spigot before being lowered into the trench. Pipe laying shall proceed up -grade with the spigot ends pointing in the direction of the now. All pipe shall be laid true to the lines and grades as established by the drawings using a laser beam to control the grade of each joint of pipe. Bell holes shall be dug at each joint of sufficient depth to allow the entire length of the barrel of the pipe to rest on the trench floor and to allow ample space for properly jointing the pipe. B. Installation and jointing of the pipe shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations except where the requirements of these specifications are more strict. I. The jointing shall be completed for all pipe laid each day, in order not to leave open joints in the trench overnight. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be plugged by approved means. No pipe shall be laid in water, or when trench conditions or weather is unsuitable for such work. 2. If water gets in the trench before the joint is completed, or if the pipe is disturbed from line and grade after being laid, the pipe shall be taken up, the joints cleaned and the pipe relaid. 01269212 SANITARY SEWER LINE CONSTRUCTION 02730 - 5 10/13 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.7 EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILLING CONSTRUCTION A. Pipe Embedment 1. Flexible Pipe Trench Depths 10 Feet or Less - Place Class III material in the trench following fine grading. The bedding material shall be laid in the pipe trench, shaped, smoothed to grade and thoroughly compacted to density of not less than 95% of maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D698. The bedding material shall be checked for grade and bell holes dug before the pipe is laid. a. After pipe has been laid, place additional material in the trench around the haunches up to the springline of the pipe (6" lift maximum). Compact to 95% of maximum density (ASTM D698). b. The initial backfill shall then be placed (maximum 6" lifts) and compacted to 90% maximum density (ASTM D698) to a point above the top ofpipe as shown on the plans. Do not permit compaction equipment to contact and damage pipe. 2. Flexible Pipe Trench Depths Greater than 10 Feet - Place rock material in the trench following fine grading. The bedding material shall be laid in the pipe trench, shaped, smoothed to grade. Vibratory compaction shall be used to consolidate the material. The bedding material shall be checked for grade and bell holes dug before the pipe is laid. a. After pipe has been laid, place additional rock material in the trench around the haunches up to the springline of the pipe (6" lift maximum). Make certain the rock material is placed under the haunches. Vibratory compaction shall be used to consolidate the material. b. The initial backfill (rock material) shall then be placed (6" lift maximum) to a point above the top of pipe as shown on the plans. Vibratory compaction shall be used to consolidate the material. 3. Paved and Unpaved Road Crossings - Place rock embedment in the trench following fine grading. The bedding layer shall be laid in the pipe trench, shaped and smoothed to grade and then thoroughly consolidated by vibratory compaction. The bedding material shall be checked for grade and bell holes dug before the pipe is laid. a. The second lift of rock shall be laid around the haunch of the pipe to a point above the top of pipe as shown on the plans. Thoroughly consolidate the material by using vibratory compactors. 4. Trench Backfill - From the top of the pipe embedment to finish grade shall be backfilled by tamping. 5. Pavement Sections - Where tamping is required, such as road crossings, the material shall be placed in 8-inch layers, moistened if necessary, and thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers from the bottom of the trench to the finish grade to a density of at least 95 - 98% of maximum density at minus 0 to plus 2 percent of optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D698. B. Testing - Pipe embedment will be periodically tested for compaction. Final backfill above pipe embedment shall not be placed until the embedment is approved by the Engineer. 3.8 MANHOLE CONSTRUCTION A. General - Manholes shall be constructed at the locations shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. The manholes shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the plans and as specified herein for precast reinforced concrete or fiberglass manholes. Concrete for manhole bases shall meet the requirements of the Section 03410 - Precast Concrete. 01269212 SANITARY SEWER LINE CONSTRUCTION 02730 - 6 10/13 34'h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue B. Precast Reinforced Concrete Manholes - After the excavation has been completed, the concrete base or bottom shall be poured in accordance with the details shown on the plans. 1. On straight runs the pipe shall be laid through the manholes, and upon completion of the invert the top half of the pipe shall be broken out. On manholes where there is a change in direction of the main, and where lateral lines enter the manhole, the inverts shall be neatly formed with concrete. The inverts shall have a true curve of as large a radius as the size of the manhole will permit and shall be given a smooth trowel finish. 2. Where the concrete bottom has properly cured for not less than 24 hours the precast manhole shall be installed, Ram-Nek flexible plastic gaskets shall be used in the tongue and groove joints. The bottom ring shall be grouted in as shown on the plans. Either concrete grade rings or brick shall be used to adjust the manhole frame to the proper grades; the maximum extension of the top section shall not exceed 12 inches. 3.9 LEAKAGE TEST A. Leakage tests shall be made by the Contractor on all sewer lines after installation. The tests on the sewer lines shall be made on sections of pipe between manholes. Each section of sewer line shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 3212 (latest revision). B. If a test fails to meet the minimum allowable requirements of the test, the Contractor shall immediately determine the cause, make the necessary repairs and retest. All testing and repair work shall be done at the Contractor's expense. C. Leakage testing will not be performed until all backfill material required has been placed and densified for a period of 30 days. 3.10 DEFLECTION TEST A. A deflection test shall be made by the Contractor on all flexible sewer pipe. The test shall not be made on a section of sewer until all the backfill on that section has been in place for 30 days. B. The deflection test shall be run using a rigid Go -No Go full circle mandrel with a diameter equal to 95% of the inside diameter of the pipe. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings of the mandrel to the Engineer for approval prior to using the mandrel for testing. C. The test shall be performed without mechanical pulling devices. Wherever possible and practical, the testing shall be initiated at a downstream manhole and proceed upstream. D. No pipe shall exceed a deflection of 5% of the inside diameter of the pipe. All excess deflections shall be corrected. The Contractor shall excavate to the point of the excess deflection, correct the deficiency and retest the pipe. If the pipe retest fails the 5% allowable deflection, the pipe shall be replaced. 3.11 CLEAN UP A. After the construction work is completed and before final acceptance by the Owner, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish, excess materials from excavations and other debris from the site of the work, and all trench surfaces shall be bladed and all depressions caused by settlement shall be filled. The cost of cleanup shall be included in the bid prices for the various units of work. 01269212 10/13 END OF SECTION SANITARY SEWER LINE CONSTRUCTION 02730 - 7 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02741 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hot -mix asphalt paving. B. Hot -mix asphalt patching. C. Asphalt surface treatments. D. Pavement -marking paint. E. Cold milling of existing hot -mix asphalt pavement. F. Construction Detours. G. Asphalt Stabilized Base. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 — Quality Requirements. B. Section 02300 - Earthwork. C. Section 02764 - Pavement Joint Sealants. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms. B. TxDOT: Texas Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges" 2004. 1.5 REFERENCES AASHTO T 102 Spot Test of Asphaltic Materials AASHTO T 245 Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using AASHTO M 248 Al MS-2 Al MS-22 ASTM C 29/C 29M 01269212 10/13 Marshall Apparatus Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed White and Yellow Traffic Paints (1994) Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot -Mix Types Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements (1991; Rev. A) Unit Weight and Voids in Aggregate HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 1 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue ASTM C 88 (1990) Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate ASTM C 117 (1995) Materials Finer than 75-Micrometer (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing ASTM C 127 (1988; R 1993) Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate ASTM C 128 (1993) Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate ASTM C 131 (1996) Resistance to Degradation of Small -Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM C 136 (1996; Rev. A) Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM C 188 (1995) Density of Hydraulic Cement ASTM D 70 (1982; R 1990) Specific Gravity of Semi -Solid Bituminous Materials ASTM D 75 (1987; R 1992) Sampling Aggregates ASTM D 242 (1995) Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures ASTM D 546 (1994) Sieve Analysis of Mineral Filler for Road and Paving Materials ASTM D 692 (1994; Rev. A) Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures ASTM D 854 (1992) Specific Gravity of Soils ASTM D 946 (1982; R 1993) Penetration -Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction ASTM D 979 (1996) Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures ASTM D 995 (1995; Rev. B) Mixing Plants for Hot -Mixed, Hot -Laid Bituminous Paving Mixtures ASTM D 1073 (1994) Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures ASTM D 1075 (1996) Effect of Water on Cohesion of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures ASTM D 1188 (1996) Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Paraffin -Coated Specimens ASTM D 2027 Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Medium -Curing Type) 01269212 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 2 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue ASTM D 2041 (1995) Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures ASTM D 2172 (1995) Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving Mixtures ASTM D 2726 (1996; Rev. A) Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non - Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures ASTM D2950 Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods ASTM D 3381 (1992) Viscosity -Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction ASTM D3405 Standard Specification for Joint Sealants, Hot -Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements ASTM D3549 Standard Test Method for Thickness or Height of Compacted Bituminous Paving Mixture Specimens TEX-126-E Molding, Testing and Evaluating Bituminous Black Base Materials I0iW.14 LIL'aa TEX-224-F TxDOT Item 300 TxDOT Item 301 TxDOT Item 320 TxDOT Item 340 TxDOT Item 662 TxDOT Item 666 TxDOT Item 672 City of Lubbock Specifications 01269212 10/13 Design of Bituminous Mixtures Determining Flakiness Index Asphalt, Oils and Emulsions Asphalt Antistripping Agents Equipment for Asphalt Concrete Pavement Specification for Dense -Graded Hot -Mix Asphalt (Method) Work Zone Pavement Markings Reflectorized Pavement Markings Raised Pavement Markers City of Lubbock Street/Drainage Engineering Standard Specifications, Current Version HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 3 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. B. Job -Mix Designs 1. Submit a job -mix design, for approval prior to preparing and placing the bituminous mixture. Design mix using procedures contained throughout this section with materials as specified. Formulas shall indicate physical properties of the mixes as shown by tests made by a commercial laboratory approved by the Engineer, using materials identical to those to be provided on this project. Submit formulas with material samples. Job -mix formula for each mixture shall be in effect until modified in writing by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Provide a new job -mix formula for each source change. Job mix shall be for this specific project. Job mixes developed for other projects, although they may have similar requirements, will be subject to review and approved/denied by the Engineer. C. Qualification Data 1. Submit qualifications for product manufacturers. D. Material Test Reports 1. Specific gravity test of asphalt 2. Coarse aggregate tests 3. Weight of slag test 4. Percent of crushed pieces in gravel 5. Fine aggregate tests 6. Specific gravity of mineral filler 7. Bituminous mixture tests 8. Aggregates tests 9. Bituminous mix tests 10. Pavement courses E. Product Submittals l . Pavement marking materials. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Mock -Up Test Section 1. Prior to full production of the binder and wearing course[s], prepare a quantity of bituminous mixture according to the job -mix formula. Construct a test section 200 feet long by not less than 10 feet wide and of the same compacted depth specified for the construction of the course which the test section represents. The test section may be placed within required project/plan limits as specified, but contractor will be required to remove and replace based on required testing samples or as approved by the Engineer. The underlying grade or pavement structure upon which the test section is to be constructed shall be the same as the remainder of the course represented by the test section. The equipment used in construction of the test section shall be the same type and weight to be used on the remainder of the course represented by the test section. Test not less than two samples of the mixture produced at the plant for gradation, asphalt cement content, stability, flow, air voids, voids in mineral aggregate, and in weight. Obtain not less than three cores from the test strip for density and thickness tests. Check the test section for smoothness and 01269212 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 4 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue finish surface texture. If the test section should prove to be unsatisfactory, make the necessary adjustments to the mix design, plant operation, transportation, laydown, and/or rolling procedures. Additional test sections, as required, shall be constructed and evaluated for conformance to the specified requirements. When test sections do not conform to specified requirements, remove and replace the bituminous pavement. A marginal quality test section that has been placed in an area of little or no traffic may be left in place. If a second test section also does not meet specified requirements, remove both sections at the Contractor's expense. Full production shall not begin without the Engineer's approval. C. Required Data 1. Job -mix formula shall show the following: a. Source and proportions, percent by weight, of each ingredient of the mixture; b. Correct gradation, the percentages passing each size sieve listed in the specifications for the mixture to be used, for the aggregate and mineral filler from each separate source and from each different size to be used in the mixture and for the composite mixture; C. Amount of material passing the No. 200 sieve determined by dry sieving; d. Number of blows of hammer compaction per side of molded specimen; e. Temperature viscosity relationship of the asphalt cement; f. Stability, flow, percent voids in mineral aggregate, percent air voids, unit weight; g. Asphalt absorption by the aggregate; h. Effective asphalt content as percent by weight of total mix; i. Temperature of the mixture immediately upon completion of mixing; j. Asphalt viscosity grade and/or penetration range; and k. Curves for the asphalt stabilized base and hot mix asphalt paving courses. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage and store with a minimum of handling. Store aggregates in such a manner as to prevent segregation, contamination, or intermixing of the different aggregate sizes. Unless otherwise approved, do not store mixture for a period long enough to affect the quality of the mixture, nor in any case longer than 12 hrs. If the temperature of any HMAC, measured while passing through the lay down machine, is plus or minus 25 degrees F from the mixing temperature, the load shall be rejected. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met: 1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of placement. 3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement. 1.10 MIXING PLANT A. Provide mixing plant capable of meeting the needs of the project B. At no time shall the plant hinder the progress of the project. 01269212 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 5 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aggregate General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations. 1. Coarse Aggregate — Coarse aggregate shall conform to ASTM D692. a. The coarse aggregate shall be the material retained on a No. 4 sieve, and shall consist of clean, tough, durable fragments of crushed stone or crushed gravel of uniform quality. Mixing or combining of crushed gravel and crushed stone will not be permitted. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed to the extent that produces a minimum of 55% crushed faces when tested in accordance with ASTM D 692. Course aggregate shall be crushed to the extent that produces a minimum 85% crushed faces for both Type "C" HMAC, and Type "D" HMAC. b. Coarse aggregate shall have a maximum loss of 20% when subjected to 5 cycles of the Magnesium Sulfate Soundness Test ASTM C-88. The amount of organic matter, clays, loams, or particles coated therewith, or other undesirable materials shall not exceed 2 percent. When subjected to the Los Angeles Abrasion test, the coarse aggregate shall not have a loss greater than 40 percent by weight. C. Coarse aggregate may be enhanced by the addition of recycled asphaltic pavement (RAP). The material shall be clean without any foreign materials so as to produce a crushed aggregate in conformance with these specifications. 2. Fine Aggregate — fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM D1073. a. The fine aggregate shall be that part of the material passing the No. 10 sieve and shall be uniform quality throughout. A maximum of 15% of the total virgin aggregate may be field sand or other crushed fine aggregate. Screenings shall be of the same or similar material as specified for course aggregate. b. Sand shall be composed of durable stone particles free from injurious foreign matter. Screenings shall be of the same or similar material as specified for coarse aggregate. 3. Mineral Filler a. Mineral filler shall conform to ASTM D242 and consist of thoroughly dry stone dust, Portland cement or other material dust approved by the Engineer. The mineral filler shall be free of foreign and other injurious matter and shall meet the following gradation: Percent by Weight Retained on No. 30 Sieve 95-100 Percent by Weight Retained on No. 80 Sieve 75 minimum Percent by Weight Retained on No. 200 Sieve 55 minimum B. Asphalt 1. Asphalt shall be performance grade 64-22 or better, AASHTO Performance Graded Binder Specification (MP1). 2. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the source of asphaltic material for approval prior to production of the asphaltic mixture. 3. The optimum asphalt content shall be determined by the Test Method Tex 204-F. 01269212 10/13 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 6 in 34`" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 4. Asphalt content will be plus or minus 0.3% of design during production. When asphalt content falls outside these parameters immediate action is required. 5. If at any time the asphalt content falls to 0.5%, immediate cease in production will take place until which time the contractor has provided sufficient evidence of the problem being corrected. C. Prime Coat 1. The surface shall be primed using an application of 0.20 to 0.30 gallons per square yard of MC asphalt conforming to ASTM D 2027 — MC 30. D. Tack Coat 1. The asphaltic material for tack coat shall meet the requirements for slow rate cure SS-1 emulsified asphalt, or medium rate cure MS-1 emulsified asphalt or PG grade asphalt as used in the HMAC Surface Course. All vertical joints shall be tack coated. E. Joint Sealant 1. ASTM D 3405 or AASHTO M 301, hot -applied, single -component, polymer - modified bituminous sealant. F. Emulsified Asphalt Sealer ' 1. All ASB surface courses shall be sprayed with an emulsified asphalt sealer consisting of a 15/85 mixture of MS-2, or 20/80 SS-1, liquid anionic asphalt and distilled water. The emulsified asphalt sealer shall be applied after the HMAC surface has cooled to below 70 degrees F, and shall be applied at a rate of 0.10 to 0.12 gallons per square yard of surface. G. Mix Design 1. Hot -Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot -laid, hot -mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in Al MS-2, "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot -Mix Types"; and complying with the following requirements: a. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located. 2. Base Course/Temporary Pavement a. Hot Mix Base shall consist of a compacted mixture of graded gravel aggregate and asphalt cement mixed hot in a mixing plant in accordance with TxDOT Standard Specifications, 2004, Item 340 Dense -Graded Hot -Mix Asphalt (Method), Type B (fine base), using the Texas gyratory compaction method (TX206-F). b. The Contractor shall provide a current mix design using the approved materials indicating gradation and optimum asphalt content. The aggregate mixture shall conform to the following master gradation: Sieve Size 1" 7/8" 5/8" 3/8" #4 #10 #40 #80 #200 Percent Retained by Weight 0 95-100 75-95 60-80 40-60 27-40 10-25 3-13 1-6 Material passing the #40 sieve shall be known as soil binder and shall meet the following requirements: Liquid Limit shall not exceed 45 Plasticity Index shall not exceed 15 Linear Shrinkage shall not exceed 5 The mineral aggregate shall not contain more than 0.5% moisture prior to entering the pugmill for mixing with asphalt. 01269212 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 7 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 01269212 10/13 d. The ASB mixture shall consist of a uniform mixture of mineral aggregate and asphaltic material. The mineral aggregate shall conform to the gradation requirements specified. The percent asphaltic material shall be determined in accordance with Test Method Tex.-204-F, with a target density of 96.5% lab molded density. Asphalt content tolerances will be plus or minus .3%. Outside these parameters corrective action must be taken immediately, over .5% shall require immediate cease of production. No more than 20% RAP will be allowed in ASB designs. The percent asphaltic material shall be determined in accordance with Test Method Tex.-236F. Asphalt for the mixture shall meet the requirements of TxDOT Item "Asphalt, Oils, and Emulsions", and must be a performance graded (PG) 64-22 or better. The grade of asphalt and source must be approved by the Engineer prior to use. The contractor shall submit the mix design prepared by a qualified lab for approval by the Engineer. The Engineer will approve the asphalt content to be used in the mixture after design tests have been made with the aggregate to be used. The asphalt content of the production mixture during production shall not vary from the design more than 0.2% dry weight based on total mixture. 3. Surface Course a. Hot mix asphalt concrete surface shall consist of a minimum of one and one half inch thick compacted mixture of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, mineral filler and asphalt cement mixed hot in a mixing plant in accordance with these specifications. Unless otherwise specified, the materials and construction shall conform to TxDOT Item 340 Dense Graded Hot Mix Asphalt Method. b. Mix designs will be in accordance with TX204-F with a lab molded density of 96.0% using the Texas gyratory compaction method. With a target VMA (voids in mineral aggregate) to be determined according to type of HMAC utilized. Designs will need to be resubmitted annually or when material properties change. C. The contractor's plant and equipment are subject to approval by Engineer, and shall be appropriate and in suitable condition to produce the HMAC surface consistently in compliance with these specifications. Approval of the source and character of the materials shall be obtained from the Engineer prior to use. The combined mineral aggregate, after final processing by the mixing plant and prior to addition of asphalt and mineral filler, hall have a sand equivalent value of not less than 45 when tested in accordance with Test Method Tex 203-F. The percent of flat and elongated slivers of stone for any aggregate shall not exceed 25% when tested in accordance with Test Method Tex 224-F. d. Asphaltic mixtures with aggregates which exhibit stripping characteristics shall be conditioned with either lime or liquid anti -stripping agent approved by the Engineer. Anti -stripping agents shall meet requirements of TxDOT Item "Asphalt Anti -Stripping Agents", and shall be added at the manufacturer's recommended dosage and temperature range. HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 8 34`'` Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue e. The contractor shall provide a current HMAC mix design using the approved materials, indicating gradation and optimum asphalt content as determined by Test Method Tex 204-F. 1) If approved by the Engineer, the contractor may furnish an alternate mix design based on specific proposed materials. Otherwise the aggregate mixture shall conform to the following master gradation: Type "C" (Course Graded Surface Course — Streets greater than 36 feet wide) Percent passing 7/8" 100 Percent passing 3/a" 95-100 Percent passing 3/8" 70-85 Percent passing No. 4 43-63 Percent passing No. 8 32-44 Percent passing No. 30 14-28 Percent passing No. 50 7-21 Percent passing No. 200 2-7 VMA Design min. 12% Type "D" (Fine Graded Surface Course — Streets 36 feet or less wide) Percent passing 1/2" 98-100 Percent passing 3/8" 85-100 Percent passing No. 4 50-70 Percent passing No. 8 35-46 Percent passing No. 30 15-29 Percent passing No. 50 7-20 Percent passing No. 200 2-7 -3 VMA Design min. 14% 2) Lab molded density will be plus or minus 1.0% of design before corrective action is required. Plus or minus 1.5% will require immediate cease in production operations with removal and replacement of HMAC laid at that location. Production will cease until which time the contractor has sufficiently proven they have taken corrective actions. Asphalt content will be plus or minus .3% before corrective action is required. Plus or minus .5% will require immediate cease in production in operations with removal and replacement of HMAC laid at that location. Production will cease until which time the contractor has sufficiently proven they have taken corrective actions. 3) Material passing the No. 40 sieve shall be known as soil binder and shall meet the following requirements: Liquid Limit shall not exceed 45 Plasticity Index shall not exceed 15 Linear Shrinkage shall not exceed 5 4) The mineral aggregate shall not contain more than 0.5% moisture prior to entering the pugmill for mixing asphalt. The HMAC mixture shall consist of a uniform mixture of mineral aggregate and asphalt materials. L = 01269212 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 9 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 5) If approved by the Engineer, the contractor may provide an alternate mix design based on his proposed materials. The contractor's materials and mix design shall meet all the performance criteria addressed in these specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads. B. Proof -roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic -tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require further compaction. C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Surface shall be clean and free of loose dirt, rock, or any other foreign matter. 3.2 PRIME COAT A. Application 1. Immediately following the surface preparation, apply the prime coat by means of the bituminous distributor. Apply the bituminous material at a pressure range of 25 to 75 pounds per square inch within the temperature limits specified herein, and at the rate of not less than 0.20 gallon nor more than 0.30 gallon of bituminous material per square yard. Apply the bituminous material so that uniform distribution is obtained over the entire surface to be treated with slight puddling on the surface. B. Curing 1. Following the application of bituminous material, allow the surface to cure without being disturbed for a period of not less than 48 hours, or longer as may be necessary, to attain penetration into the foundation course and evaporation of the volatiles from the bituminous material. Furnish and spread enough sand to effectively blot up and } cure excess bituminous material. Maintain the primed surface until the succeeding layer of pavement is placed by protecting the surface against damage and by repairing and repriming deficient areas. C. Temperature 1. Maintain application temperature between 68 ° F and 149 ° F. D. Protection 1. Keep traffic off surfaces freshly treated with bituminous material. Provide sufficient warning signs and barricades to prevent traffic over freshly treated surfaces. 3.3 TACK COAT A. Application 1. Apply the tack coat when the surface to be treated is dry. Immediately following the preparation of the surface for treatment, apply the bituminous material by means of the bituminous distributor, within the limits of temperature specified herein and at a rate of not less than 0.05 gallon nor more than 0.15 gallon of diluted emulsion per square yard. Apply the bituminous material so that uniform distribution is obtained over the entire surface to be treated. Treat lightly coated areas and spots missed by the distributor with the bituminous material. Following the application of bituminous material, allow the surface to cure without being disturbed for period of time necessary to permit setting of the tack coat. Apply the bituminous tack coat only as 01269212 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 10 10/13 1 I � 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue far in advance of the placing of the overlying layer as required for that day's operation. Maintain and protect the treated surface from damage until the succeeding course of pavement is placed. B. Temperature 1. Maintain application temperature between 122' F and 185' F. C. Material Test 1. Perform spot test for asphalt in accordance with AASHTO T 102 on each shipment. D. Traffic Controls 1. Keep traffic off surfaces freshly treated with bituminous material. Provide sufficient warning signs and barricades so that traffic will not travel over freshly treated surfaces. 3.4 ASPHALT STABILIZED BASE COURSE (ASB) A. ASB shall not be placed when air temperature as reported by the National Weather Service is below 45 degrees F and falling. B. ASB shall be placed at a temperature between 255 and 285 degrees F during the months of June, July and August. During other months, ASB shall be placed at a temperature between 275 and 325 degrees F. C. Any ASB material that is above, or below the specified temperature range may be rejected. No payment will be made for any rejected material. D. ASB shall be placed and compacted in 3 inch lifts, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The material shall be placed in such a manner that when properly compacted, the finished course is smooth, of uniform density, and in conformance with required cross -sections and grades. E. The ASB shall be compacted thoroughly and uniformly with approved rollers to a density of 90.1% to 97.3% in place air voids with a lab molded target of 96.5% plus or minus 1%. All results will be calculated using the maximum theoretical rice gravity. Lab molding will take place in accordance to the asphalt manufacturer's recommended temperature. 1. Rolling patterns shall be set by using a thin lift nuclear gauge in order to ensure maximum compaction. All roller marks shall be removed and compaction completed prior to the ASB mixture cooling below 185 degrees F. 3.5 JOINTS A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot -mix asphalt course. 1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to all joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches. 4. Construct transverse joints as described in Al MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements." 5. Compact joints as soon as hot -mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. 6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density. 01269212 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 11 10/13 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.6 COMPACTION A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot -mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot -mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory -plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F. B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot -mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot -mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 1. 95% to 98% of lab -molded density. D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot -mix asphalt is 4 still warm. E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and t replace with fresh, hot -mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness. G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or 3 longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. j 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch. 1 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from specified requirements. B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. C. Thickness: In -place compacted thickness of hot -mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549. 01269212 10/13 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 12 f__. 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot -mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances. E. In -Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979 or AASHTO T 168. 1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot -mix asphalt -paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job -mix specifications. 2. In -place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. a. One core sample will be taken for every 2000 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement. F. Remove and replace or install additional hot -mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. G. Owner may elect to take confirmation tests at Owner's expense. Contractor shall cooperate with Owner's testing agency. Failing tests taken at Owner's direction shall be charged to the Contractor. Failing test charges shall include pro-rata technician charges, actual failing test charge, pro-rata mileage charge, and other pro -rated charges. 3.9 DISPOSAL A. Dispose of excess materials in accordance with requirements of Section 01576 — Waste Material Disposal. 1. Do not allow excavated materials to accumulate on -site. END OF SECTION 01269212 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 13 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02751 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division I - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete pavement. B. Curb and gutter. C. Driveways (alleys). D. Sidewalks. E. This section applies wherever Contractor has elected to remove, or is required to remove, and replace concrete pavement, curb and gutter, driveway (alleys), and sidewalks. Section applies also for repair or replacement of facilities otherwise damaged by Contractor's operations. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02221 — Removing Existing Pavements. B. Section 02300 — Earthwork. C. Section 02741 — Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving. D. Section 02764 — Pavement Joint Sealants. E. Section 03300 — Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica fume. B. TxDOT: Texas Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges" 2004. C. DMS: TxDOT Department of Material Specifications. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. C. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Design shall indicate target unit weight of mix. Mix design shall not be in excess of 30 days old without the Engineer's approval. 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue D. Design mix submittals shall include: 1. Fine aggregate gradation. 2. Course aggregate gradation. 3. Loss from 5 cycle magnesium sulfate or sodium sulfate test on all aggregate. 4. Cement content. 5. Fly ash content. 6. Water content. 7. All admixtures. 8. Maximum slump. 9. Percent air entrainment. 10. 7 day flexural strength. 11. 7 day compressive strength. 12. 28 day compressive strength. E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on flexural and comprehensive testing of current materials: 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or adhesive. 8. Joint fillers. F. Paving and Quality Control Plan. Submit a paving and quality control plan for approval before beginning pavement construction operations. Include details of all operations in the concrete paving process, including longitudinal construction joint layout, sequencing, curing, lighting, early opening, leave -outs, sawing, inspection, testing, construction methods, other details and description of all equipment. List certified personnel performing the testing. Submit revisions to the paving and quality control plan for approval. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mix Concrete Association's Plant Certification Program. 2. An inspection report signed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer showing that concrete measuring, mixing, and delivery equipment meets all requirements of ASTM C 94. A new certification or signed and sealed report is required every time a plant is moved. Provide a copy of the certification or the signed and sealed inspection report to the Engineer. 3. When equipment or facilities fail to meet specification requirements, remove them from service until corrected. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. j 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 2 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source. When there are changes in material, brand, source, or chemical admixtures, reevaluate the mix as a new mix design. E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents. Refer to Section 03300 — Cast -In -Place Concrete for additional codes and standards. F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities and emergency services. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. Pavement Forms: Provide metal side forms of sufficient cross section, strength and rigidity to support the paving equipment and resist the impact and vibration of the operation without visible springing or settlement. Use forms that are free from kinks, bonds or warps that could affect ride quality or alignment. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet or less. 2. Forms should be no less than 10 ft. in length. 2.2 PLACING, CONSOLIDATING, AND FINISHING EQUIPMENT A. Provide approved self-propelled paving equipment that uniformly distributes the concrete with minimal segregation and provides a smooth machine -finished consolidated concrete pavement conforming to plan line and grade. Provide an approved automatic grade control system on slip -forming equipment. Provide approved mechanically operated finishing floats capable of producing a uniformly smooth pavement surface. Provide equipment capable of providing a fine, light water fog mist. B. Provide mechanically operated vibratory equipment capable of adequately consolidating the concrete. Provide immersion vibrators on the paving equipment at sufficiently close intervals to provide uniform vibration and consolidation of the concrete over the entire width and depth of the pavement and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide immersion vibrator units that operate at a frequency in air of at least 8,000 cycles per minute. Provide enough hand -operated immersion vibrators for timely and proper consolidation of the concrete along forms, at joints and in areas not covered by other vibratory equipment. Surface vibrators may be used to supplement equipment -mounted immersion vibrators. Provide tachometers to verify the proper operation of all vibrators. C. The paving equipment described in this Section may not be fully required for small or irregular areas, as approved by the Engineer. 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 3 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2.3 REINFORCING STEEL INSERTING EQUIPMENT A. Inserting equipment may not be used in place of two piece tie bars or drilled and epoxy bars. 2.4 TEXTURING EQUIPMENT A. Carpet Drag. Provide a carpet drag mounted on a work bridge or a moveable support system. Provide a single piece of carpet of sufficient transverse length to span the full width of the pavement being placed and adjustable so that a sufficient longitudinal length of carpet is in contact with the concrete being placed to produce the desired texture. Obtain approval to vary the length and width of the carpet to accommodate specific applications. Use an artificial grass -type carpet having a molded polyethylene pile face with a blade length of 5/8 in. to 1 in., a minimum weight of 70 oz. per square yard, and a strong, durable, rot -resistant backing material bonded to the facing. B. Tining Equipment. Provide a self-propelled transverse metal tine device equipped with 4-in. to 6-in. steel tines and with cross-section approximately 1/32 in. thick by 1/12 in. wide, spaced at 1 in., center -to -center. Hand -operated tining equipment that produces an equivalent texture may be used on hand pours, or when permitted in emergencies due to equipment breakdown. 2.5 CURING EQUIPMENT A. Provide a self-propelled machine for applying membrane curing compound using mechanically pressurized spraying equipment with atomizing nozzles. Provide equipment and controls that maintain the required uniform rate of application over the entire paving area. Provide curing equipment that is independent of all other equipment when production rates are such that the first application of membrane curing compound cannot be accomplished immediately after texturing and after free moisture has disappeared. Hand -operated pressurized spraying equipment with atomizing nozzles may only be used on small or irregular areas or, when permitted, in emergencies due to equipment breakdown. 2.6 SAWING EQUIPMENT A. Provide power -driven concrete saws to saw the joints shown on the plans within 24 hours of placement. Provide standby power -driven concrete saws during concrete sawing operations. Provide adequate illumination for nighttime sawing. 2.7 GRINDING EQUIPMENT A. When required, provide self-propelled powered grinding equipment that is specifically designed to smooth and texture concrete pavement using circular diamond blades. Provide equipment with automatic grade control capable of grinding at least a 3-ft. width longitudinally in each pass without damaging the concrete. ` 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 4 r. 10/13 i, 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2.8 TESTING EQUIPMENT A. Provide testing equipment regardless of job -control testing responsibilities in accordance with TxDOT Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete," unless otherwise shown in the plans or specified. 2.9 CORING EQUIPMENT A. When required, provide coring equipment capable of extracting cores in accordance with the requirements of Tex-424-A. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Furnish both 10-ft. and 15-ft. steel or magnesium long -handled standard straightedges. Furnish enough work bridges, long enough to span the pavement, for finishing and inspection operations. Furnish date stencils to impress pavement placement dates into the fresh concrete, with numerals approximately 2 inch high by 1 inch wide by11/4 inch deep. 2.11 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets, shall be 6" x 6" — 10 gauge welded wire fabric, or as shown on plans. ffi B. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. C. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. D. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. E. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, internally and externally threaded. Design hook -bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt. F. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or I precast concrete or fiber -reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material VT will not support chair legs. i 2. Space reinforcing supports at 5'-0" maximum in any direction. 3. Place vertical reinforcement supports drilled into sub -base material to prevent horizontal movement of reinforcing steel. A. General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer throughout the Project. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, II, or III or ASTM G176 IA, IIA, or IIIA for air entrained. Fly ash may be substituted at a rate up to 30% by absolute volume of the cement. C. Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, from a single source, as follows: 1. Class:4M. 2. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal. 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 5 10/13 j i 34`" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3. Coarse aggregate for Class C or D concrete shall be crushed limestone. Aggregate shall be graded from fine to coarse and shall conform to ASTM C 136. The gradation for aggregate shall meet the following requirements by weight: FINE AGGREGATE COARSE AGGREGATE Sieve Percent Passing Sieve Percent Passing 3/8 inch 100 2 inch 100 No. 4 95-100 1-1/2 inch 95-100 No.8 80-100 No. 16 50-85 3/4 inch 35-70 No. 30 25-60 3/8 inch 10-30 No.50A 5-30 No.4 0-5 No. 100 0-10 No.200B 0-3 A Range is 6-35 when sand equivalent volume is greater than 85. B 0-6 for manufactured sand. Maximum amounts of organic impurities shall conform to ASTM C 40 and ASTM C 87. Maximum amounts of impurities finer than the #200 sieve shall conform to ASTM C 117. Maximum amounts of soft particles shall conform to ASTM C 123. Maximum amounts of friable particles shall conform to ASTM C 142. Fine aggregate shall have a sand equivalent of at least 80 in accordance with Tex- 203-F. Provide fine aggregate with fineness modules between 2.3 and 3.1 per ASTM C-33. Stockpiles shall be protected from dusty conditions by drift fences or other methods approved by the Engineer. Stockpiling methods used shall not allow aggregate to roll down the slope as it is added to existing stockpiles. Stockpiles shall be built in layers of uniform thickness. Equipment shall not be permitted to operate over the same lift repeatedly. 4. Coarse aggregate shall have a maximum loss of 18% when subjected to 5 cycles of the magnesium sulfate soundness test or a maximum loss of 12% when subjected to 5 cycles of a sodium sulfate soundness test (ASTM C-88). 5. The percentage of wear shall be no more than 40 when tested in accordance with ASTM C-131 or ASTM C-535. 6. Aggregates delivered to the mixer shall consist of crushed stone, crushed gravel, or natural sand. Crushing shall result in a product in which the coarse aggregate shall have at least 95% by weight of particles with one or more fractured faces and 75% by weight of particles with two or more fractured faces. The aggregate shall be composed of sound, tough, durable particles and shall meet the requirements for deleterious substances given in ASTM C33. The aggregate in any size group shall not contain more than 8 percent by weight of flat or elongated pieces. A flat or elongated particle is one having a ratio between the maximum and the minimum dimensions of a circumscribing rectangular prism exceeding 3 to 1. j 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 6 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 7. Reactivity: a. Aggregates shall be tested for deleterious reactivity with alkalis in the cement, which may cause excessive expansion of the concrete. Tests of coarse and fine aggregate shall be made in accordance with ASTM C 1260. If the expansion of the coarse or fine aggregate test specimens, tested in accordance with ASTM C 1260, does not exceed 0.10 % at 16 days from casting, the coarse or fine aggregates shall be accepted. b. If the expansion at 16 days is greater than 0.10%, tests of combined materials shall be made in accordance with ASTM C 1260 or ASTM C 1567 using the aggregates, cementitious materials, and/or specific reactivity reducing chemicals in the proportions proposed for the mixture design. If the expansion of the proposed combined materials test specimens, tested in accordance with ASTM C 1260 or ASTM C 1567, does not exceed 0.10 % at 30 days from casting, the proposed combined materials will be accepted. If the expansion of the proposed combined materials test specimens is greater than 0.10% at 30 days, the aggregates will not be accepted unless adjustments to the combined materials mixture can reduce the expansion to less than 0.10 % at 30 days. The Contractor may continue to make adjustments to the mix design until the test produces a passing result. If for some reason a Contractor cannot meet the specification by making adjustments to the mix design, then the Contractor shall look at the option of using a new aggregate source. New aggregates shall be evaluated and tested. D. Water: ASTM C 94. 2.13 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures. B. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. C. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. D. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G. E. Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. F. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 2.14 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Fiber reinforcement may be used in place of wire mesh only if approved by Engineer and Owner. B. Fiber reinforcement shall be 100% virgin polypropylene, collated, fibrillated fibers, made i for use as concrete reinforcement, containing no reprocessed olefin materials, and conforming to ASTM C 1116, Type III. C. Specific gravity - .91 D. Tensile Strength — 70,000 psi to 100,000 psi. E. Length — 2". 2.15 CURING COMPOUND A. Liquid -type membrane -forming curing compound with white pigment complying with ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 1.0 pounds per square yard when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal. ;- 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 7 - 10/13 . , ' 34`" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2.16 EPDXY A. Provide Type III epoxy in accordance with DMS-6100, "Epoxies and Adhesives," for installing all drilled -in reinforcing steel. 2.17 EVAPORATION RETARDANT A. Provide evaporation retardant conforming to DMS-4650, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete Curing Materials and Evaporation Retardants." 2.18 JOINT SEALANTS AND FILLERS A. Provide Class 5 or Class 8 joint -sealant materials and fillers unless otherwise shown on the plans or approved and other sealant materials of the size, shape, and type shown on the plans in accordance with DMS-6310, "Joint Sealants and Fillers." 2.19 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Texture Surface for Ramps l . Meet requirements of the Texas Accessibility Standards. 2. Concrete paver units shall meet all requirements of ASTM C-936 and C-33 and shall be laid in a two by two unit basket weave pattern. 3. Color as selected by Owner. To be a contrasting color with the adjacent surfaces. 4. Durabak with Safti-Traxx Detacable Warning System by Cote-L Distribution Company, or approved equal. 5. Texture surface requirements for ramps may be modified by Owner at any time to comply with Texas Accessibility Standards. No additional compensation will be made for such modification. C. Bonding Agent 1. Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base. D. Sand Cushion 1. Clean, manufactured or natural sand with plasticity index of 8 or less. 2.20 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal -weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the trial batch method. 1. Do not use Owner's field quality -control testing agency as the independent testing agency. C. Classification 1. The following classes of concrete shall be used: Class A Curb and gutter, standard sidewalks, residential driveways, curb ramps. Class B Alley paving. Class C Concrete street paving, fillets, alley returns, reinforced sidewalk, commercial driveways, valley gutters. 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 8 10/13 i 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue Class D N/A. Class E Fast setting concrete pavement such as "Fast Track" Concrete Pavement or other special design. D. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties: 1. Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio as shown in Section E.2. E. Mix Design 1. At least 15 days prior to beginning any concrete pavement construction the Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer for approval: a. Test certificates from an approved commercial testing laboratory on all proposed aggregate. Certificates shall indicate material source, gradation, and loss from 5 cycle magnesium sulfate soundness test (not to exceed 18%) or the loss from 5 cycles of sodium sulfate soundness test (not to exceed 12%). b. A mix design based on water -cement ratio. C. Results of flexural and compression tests in conformance with ASTM C 39 and/or flexural tests in conformance with ASTM C 78, made by an approved commercial testing laboratory. Tests shall be made on 6 cylinders and/or 6 beams at curing times appropriate to the class of concrete. 2. The Engineer will approve or reject the mix design and materials based on these submittals. This approval shall be subject to additional testing during construction. Mix designs for various classes of concrete shall conform to the following: Maximum Water/ Maximum Slump Class Cement Ratio Inches A 0.60 4 B 0.60 3 C (slip formed) 0.45 3 C (formed) 0.45 6 E 0.45 As specified by Concrete batch plant F. Strength Requirements 1. Test at least three sets of design strength specimens with two specimens per set. The various classes of concrete shall conform to the following strengths in psi as determined by the average of two test cylinders and beams. COMPRESSIVE FLEXURAL Class 3 Day 7 Day 28 Day 7 Day 28 Day A - 2100 3000 425 B 2500 3000 - 280 C - 3500 4400 570 680 D - - - E 2600 (24hr) Unless otherwise 400 (24 hr) specified 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 9 10/13 34`" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue G. Properties 1. Air Entrainment: 5% ASTM C 260. If the air content is more than 1 %2 percentage points below or above the required air, the load of concrete will be rejected. 2. Synthetic Fiber: Use manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd. (where applicable). 3. Fly ash: Not more than 30% by absolute volume of cement. 2.21 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116 when synthetic fibers are involved. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2. Mixing and delivery time starts at time of batching. B. Project -Site Mixing: Comply with requirements and measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in an appropriate method and as approved by the Engineer. 1. For mixers of 1 cu. yd. or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least one and one-half minutes, but not more than five minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. 2. For mixers of capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. 3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the work, indicating project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water added. Batch ticket shall also indicate batching operation variances according to ACI 304R. a. Cement and supplementary cementitious material within f 1 % of desired weight. b. Aggregates measured within ±2% of desired weight (fl% when cumulative weight is taken). C. Allowable water adjusted for free moisture in aggregates. d. Admixtures discharged separately within a volumetric tolerance of f3% using a method that does not allow concentrated admixtures to contact each other. 4. When using non -agitating equipment for transporting concrete, provide equipment with smooth, mortar -tight metal containers equipped with gates that prevent accidental discharge of the concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Proof -roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 10 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.2 PLACING AND REMOVING FORMS A. Use clean and oiled forms. Secure forms on a base or firm subgrade that is accurately graded and that provides stable support without deflection and movement by form riding equipment. Pin every form at least at the middle and near each end. Tightly join and key form sections together to prevent relative displacement. B. Set side forms far enough in advance of concrete placement to permit inspection. Check conformity of the grade, alignment, and stability of forms immediately before placing concrete, and make all necessary corrections. Use a straightedge or other approved method to test the top of forms to ensure that the ride quality requirements for the completed pavement will be met. Stop paving operations if forms settle or deflect more than 1/8 inch under finishing operations. Reset forms to line and grade, and refinish the concrete surface to correct grade. C. Avoid damage to the edge of the pavement when removing forms. Repair damage resulting from form removal and honeycombed areas with a mortar mix within 24 hr after form removal unless otherwise approved. Clean joint face and repair honeycombed or damaged areas within 24 hr after a bulkhead for a transverse construction joint has been removed unless otherwise approved. When forms are removed before 72 hr after concrete placement, promptly apply membrane curing compound to the edge of the concrete pavement. D. Forms that are not the same depth as the pavement but are within 2 inch of that depth are permitted if the subbase is trenched or the full width and length of the form base is supported with a firm material to produce the required pavement thickness. Promptly repair the form trench after use. Use flexible or curved wood or metal forms for curves of 100-ft radius or less. 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond -reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.4 JOINTS A. Reinforcing Steel and Joint Assemblies: Accurately place and secure in position all reinforcing steel as shown on the plans. Place dowels at mid -depth of the pavement slab, parallel to the surface. Place dowels for transverse contraction joints parallel to the pavement edge. Tolerances for location and alignment of dowels will be shown on the plans. Stagger the longitudinal reinforcement splices to avoid having more than 1/3 of the splices within a 2-ft. longitudinal length of each lane of the pavement. Use multiple -piece tie bars or drill and epoxy grout tie bars at longitudinal construction joints. Verify that tie bars that are drilled and epoxied into concrete at longitudinal construction joints develop a pullout resistance equal to a minimum of 3/4 of the yield strength of the steel after 7 days. Test 15 bars using ASTM E 488, except that alternate approved equipment may be used. 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 11 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue All 15 tested bars must meet the required pullout strength. If any of the test results do not meet the required minimum pullout strength, perform corrective measures to provide equivalent pullout resistance. Repair damage from testing. Acceptable corrective measures include but are not limited to installation of additional or longer tie bars. B. General: Construct isolation, contraction, construction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. 3. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. D. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint -filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 2. Terminate joint filler less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 3. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint -filler sections together. 5. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. E. Curb and Gutter 1. Place 1/4" pre -molded expansion joints at the tangent point of each return at intersections and at intervals not more than 40 feet between the intersections. 2. Locate construction joints of at least %" depth at 10 foot intervals. F. Sidewalk 1. Place %" expansion joint material where new construction abuts an existing structure, sidewalk, etc. 2. Place expansion joints at 36 ft. spacing (max). 3. Place weakened plane joints at 5 ft. spacing (max). They shall be 1/4 wide by W' deep. G. Driveways and Pavements 1. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints. Dowel bar spacing and size as directed by Engineer. Lubricate or asphalt -coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 12 10/13 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying marks on concrete surfaces. a. Radius: 1/4 inch. b. Bottom Width: 3/8 inch. C. Top Width: 3/4 inch. d. Depth: 1 5/8 inch. 3.5 CONCRETE DELIVERY surface finishes. Eliminate groover A. Clean delivery equipment as necessary to prevent accumulation of old concrete before loading fresh concrete. Use agitated delivery equipment for concrete designed to have a slump of more than 5 inches. Segregated concrete is subject to rejection. Place agitated concrete within 60 minutes after batching. Place non -agitated concrete within 45 minutes after batching. In hot weather or under conditions causing quick setting of the concrete, times may be reduced by the Engineer. Time limitations may be extended if the Contractor can demonstrate that the concrete can be properly placed, consolidated, and finished without the use of additional water. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Concrete Placement: Do not allow the pavement edge to deviate from the established paving line by more than '/2 in. at any point. Place the concrete as near as possible to its final location, and minimize segregation and rehandling. Where hand spreading is necessary, distribute concrete using shovels. Do not use rakes or vibrators to distribute concrete. 1. Pavement: Consolidate all concrete by approved mechanical vibrators. Use immersion -type vibrators that simultaneously consolidate the full width of the placement when machine finishing. Keep vibrators from dislodging reinforcement. Use hand -operated vibrators to consolidate concrete in areas not accessible to the machine -mounted vibrators. Do not operate machine -mounted vibrators while the paving equipment is stationary. Vibrator operations are subject to review. B. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete. C. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength. D. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to, or is expected to fall below, 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 13 10/13 1 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue E. Hot -Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows when hot -weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcement steel with water -soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog -spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. F. Date Imprinting: Imprint dates in the fresh concrete indicating the date of the concrete placement. Make impressions approximately 1 foot from the outside longitudinal construction joint or edge of pavement and approximately 1 foot from the transverse construction joint at the beginning of the placement day. Orient the impressions to be read from the outside shoulder in the direction of final traffic. Impress date in DD-MM-YY format. Imprinting of the Contractor name or logo in similar size characters to the date is allowed. 3.7 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Finish all concrete pavement with approved self-propelled equipment. Use power -driven spreaders, power -driven vibrators, power -driven strike -off, and screed, or approved alternate equipment. Use the transverse finishing equipment to compact and strike off the concrete to the required section and grade without surface voids. Use float equipment for final finishing. Use concrete with a consistency that allows completion of all finishing operations without addition of water to the surface. Use the minimal amount of water fog mist necessary to maintain a moist surface. Reduce fogging if float or straightedge operations result in excess slurry. 1. Finished Surface: As soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the pavement surface shall be tested in all directions with a 16-foot straightedge or other specified device. Surface smoothness deviations shall not exceed 1/4 inch from a 16-foot straightedge at any location, including placement along and spanning any pavement joint or edge. For small pours, including intersections and irregularly shaped areas, no deviation exceeding a 1/8 inch from a 10-foot straightedge shall exist. Areas in the slab showing high spots shall be marked and immediately ground down with an approved grinding machine to an elevation that falls within the tolerance. Where the departure from the correct cross section exceeds 1/2 inch, the pavement shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor when so directed by the Engineer. 2. In addition to the 16-foot straight edge, the Contractor shall furnish a 25' wheel base Maintenance of Surface Moisture: Prevent surface drying of the pavement before application of the curing system. Accomplish this by fog application of evaporation retardant on the pavement surface. Apply evaporation retardant at the rate recommended by the manufacturer. Reapply the evaporation retardant as needed to maintain the concrete surface in a moist condition until curing system is applied. Do not use evaporation retardant as a finishing aid. Failure to take acceptable precautions to prevent surface drying of the pavement will be cause for shut down of pavement operations. 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 14 10/13 i 341h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3. Surface Texturing: Perform surface texturing using a combination of a carpet drag and metal tining. Complete final texturing before the concrete has attained its initial set. Draw the carpet drag longitudinally along the pavement surface with the carpet contact surface area adjusted to provide a satisfactory coarsely textured surface. A metal -tine texture finish is required unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide the metal -tine finish immediately after the concrete surface has set enough for consistent tining. Operate the metal -tine device to obtain grooves spaced at 1 in., approximately 3/16 in. deep, with a minimum depth of 1/8 in., and approximately 1/12 in. wide. Do not overlap a previously tined area. Use manual methods for achieving similar results on ramps and other irregular sections of pavements. Repair damage to the edge of the slab and joints immediately after texturing. Do not tine pavement that will be overlaid. a. Burlap Finish: For sidewalks, drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float -finished concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture. b. Medium -to -Fine -Textured Broom Finish: For curb and gutter, draw a soft bristle broom across float -finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine -line texture. C. Medium -to -Coarse -Textured Broom Finish: For fillets, driveways and alleys, provide a coarse finish by striating float -finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff -bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. d. Tined Finish: For concrete pavement, perform surface texturing using a combination of a carpet drag and metal tining. Complete final texturing before the concrete has attained its initial set. Draw the carpet drag longitudinally along the pavement surface with the carpet contact surface area adjusted to provide a satisfactory coarsely textured surface. A metal -tine texture finish is required unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide the metal -tine finish immediately after the concrete surface has set enough for consistent tining. Operate the metal -tine device to obtain grooves spaced at 1 in., approximately 3/16 inch deep, with a minimum depth of 1/8 inch, and approximately 1/12 inch wide. Do not overlap a previously tined area. Use manual methods for achieving similar results on other irregular sections of pavements. Repair damage to the edge of the slab and joint immediately after texturing. 4. Small or Irregular Placements. Where machine placements and finishing of concrete pavement are not practical, use hand equipment and procedures that produce a consolidated and finished pavement section to the line and grade. 5. Emergency Procedures. Use hand -operated equipment for applying texture, evaporation retardant, and cure in the event of equipment breakdown. 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. Curing: Keep the concrete pavement surface from drying by water fogging until the curing material has been applied. If forms are removed during day of placement, apply curing compound to exposed areas. When placing concrete pavement, place curing compound on backside of curb. Maintain and promptly repair damage to curing materials on exposed surfaces of concrete pavement continuously for at least 3 curing days unless specified otherwise. A curing day is defined as a 24-hr period when either the temperature taken in the shade away from artificial heat is above 50°F for at least 19 hr or when the surface temperature of the concrete is maintained above 40°F for 24 hr. Curing begins when the 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 15 10/13 34`" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue concrete curing system has been applied. Stop concrete paving if curing compound is not being applied promptly and maintained adequately. B. Protect freshly placed concrete from excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot weather protection during curing. Submit for approval proposed measures to protect the concrete from anticipated freezing weather for the first 72 Ins after placement. Repair or replace all concrete damaged by freezing. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture -retaining -cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. C. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: After texturing and immediately after the free surface moisture has disappeared, spray the concrete surface uniformly with 2 coats of membrane curing compound at an individual application rate of not more than 180 sq. ft. per gallon. Apply the first coat within 10 minutes after completing texturing operations. Apply the second coat within 30 minutes after completing texturing operations. Before and during application, maintain curing compounds in a uniformly agitated condition, free of settlement. Do not thin or dilute the curing compound. Where the coating shows discontinuities or other defects or if rain falls on the newly coated surface before the film has dried enough to resist damage, apply additional compound at the same rate of coverage to correct the damage. Ensure that the curing compound coats the sides of the tining grooves. 4. Curing Class E Concrete: For all Class HES concrete pavement, provide membrane curing in accordance with Section 360.4.I.1, "Membrane Curing," followed promptly by moisture curing until opening strength is achieved but not less than 24 hours. 3.9 SAWING JOINTS A. Saw joints to the depth shown on the plans as soon as sawing can be accomplished without damage to the pavement regardless of time of day or weather conditions. Once sawing has commenced it shall be continued until completed and all such sawing must be completed within 24 hours of placement. Use a chalk line, string line, sawing template, or other approved method to provide a true joint alignment. Provide enough saws to match the paving production rate to ensure sawing completion at the earliest possible time to avoid `-' 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 16 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue uncontrolled cracking. Reduce paving production if necessary to ensure timely sawing of joints. Promptly restore membrane cure damaged within the first 72 hour of curing. 3.10 PROTECTION OF PAVEMENT AND OPENING TO TRAFFIC A. Testing for early opening is the responsibility of the Contractor regardless of job -control testing responsibilities unless otherwise shown in the plans or directed. Testing result interpretation for opening to traffic is subject to the approval of the Engineer. 1. Protection of Pavement: Erect and maintain barricades and other standard and approved devices that will exclude all vehicles and equipment from the newly placed pavement for the periods specified. Before opening to traffic, protect the pavement from damage due to crossings using approved methods. Where a detour is not readily available or economically feasible, an occasional crossing of the roadway with overweight equipment may be permitted for relocating equipment only but not for hauling material. When an occasional crossing of overweight equipment is permitted, temporary matting or other approved methods may be required. Maintain an adequate supply of sheeting or other material to cover and protect fresh concrete surface from weather damage. Apply as needed to protect the pavement surface from weather. 2. Opening Pavement to All Traffic: Pavement that is 7 days old may be opened to all �1 traffic. Before opening to traffic, clean pavement, place stable material against the pavement edges, seal joints, and perform all other traffic safety related work. 3. Opening Pavement to Construction Equipment: Unless otherwise shown on the plans, concrete pavement may be opened early to concrete paving equipment and related delivery equipment after the concrete is at least 48 hour old and opening strength has been demonstrated in accordance with "Early Opening to All Traffic," before curing is complete. Keep delivery equipment at least 2 feet from the edge of the concrete pavement. Keep tracks of the paving equipment at least 1 foot from the pavement edge. Protect textured surfaces from the paving equipment. Restore damaged membrane curing as soon as possible. Repair pavement damaged by paving or delivery equipment before opening to all traffic. 4. Early Opening to All Traffic: Concrete pavement may be opened after curing is complete and the concrete has attained a flexural strength of 450 psi or a compressive strength of 2,800 psi, except that pavement using Class HES concrete may be opened after 24 hour if the specified strength is achieved. , a. Strength Testing: Test concrete specimens cured under the same conditions as the portion of the pavement involved. 5. Emergency Opening to Traffic: Under emergency conditions, when the pavement is at least 72 hour old, open the pavement to traffic when directed in writing. Remove all obstructing materials, place stable material against the pavement edges, and perform other work involved in providing for the safety of traffic as required for emergency opening. 3.11 PAVEMENT THICKNESS A. The Engineer will check the thickness in accordance with Tex-423-A unless other methods are shown on the plans. The Engineer will perform 1 thickness test consisting of 1 reading at approximately the center of each lane every 500 feet or fraction thereof. Core where directed in accordance with Tex-424-A to verify deficiencies of more than 0.2 inches from plan thickness and to determine the limits of deficiencies of more than 0.75 inches from 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 17 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue plan thickness. Fill core holes using a concrete mixture and method approved by the Engineer. 1. Thickness Deficiencies Greater than 0.2 inches: When any depth test measured in accordance with Tex-423-A is deficient by more than 0.2 inches from the plan thickness, take one 4-inch diameter core at that location to verify the measurement. If the core is deficient by more than 0.2 inches but not by more than 0.75 inches from the plan thickness, take 2 additional cores from the unit (as defined in Section 3.11.A.3, "Pavement Units for Payment Adjustment") at intervals of a least 150 feet and at locations selected by the Engineer, and determine the thickness of the unit for payment purposes by averaging the length of the 3 cores. In calculations of the average thickness of this unit of pavement, measurements in excess of the specified thickness by more than 0.2 inches will be considered as the specified thickness plus 0.2 inches. 2. Thickness Deficiencies Greater than 0.75 inches: If a core is deficient by more than 0.75, take additional cores at 10 foot intervals in each direction parallel to the centerline to determine the boundary of the deficient area. The Engineer will evaluate any area of pavement found deficient in thickness by more than 0.75 inches but not more than 1 inch. As directed, remove and replace the deficient areas without additional compensation or retain deficient areas without compensation. Remove and replace any area of pavement found deficient in thickness by more than 1 inch without additional compensation. 3. Pavement Units for Payment Adjustment: Limits for applying a payment adjustment for deficient pavement thickness from 0.20 inch to not more than 0.75 inch are 500 foot of pavement in each lane. Lane width will be as shown on typical sections and pavement design standards. For greater than 0.75 inch deficient thickness, the limits for applying zero payment or requiring removal will be defined by coring or equivalent nondestructive means as determined by the Engineer. The remaining portion of the unit determined to be less than 0.75 inch deficient will be subject to. the payment adjustment based on the average core thickness at each end of the 10 foot :-Ai erval investigation as determined by the Engineer. Shoulders will be measured for thickness unless otherwise shown on the plans. Shoulders 6 feet wide or wider will be considered as lanes. Shoulders less than 6 feet wide will be considered part of the adjacent lane. Limits for applying payment adjustment for deficient pavement thickness for ramps, widenings, acceleration and deceleration lanes, and other miscellaneous areas are 500 feet in length. Ares less than 500 feet in length will be individually evaluated for payment adjustment based on the plan area. 4. Deficient Thickness Adjustment: Where the average thickness of pavement is deficient in thickness by more than 0.2 inches but not more than 0.75 inches, payment will be made using the adjustment factor as specified in Table 2 applied to the bid price for the deficient area for each unit as defined under Section 3.11.A.3, "Pavement Units for Payment Adjustment". 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 18 10/13 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue Table 2 Deficient Thickness Price Adjustment Factor Deficiency in Thickness Determined by Cores (in.) Proportional Part of Contract Price Allowed (adjustment factor Not deficient 1.00 Over 0.00 through 0.20 1.00 Over 0.20 through 0.30 0.80 Over 0.30 through 0.40 0.72 Over 0.40 through 0.50 0.68 Over 0.50 through 0.75 0.57 3.12 PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Permanent pavement markings shall be reflectorized multipolymer applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations including surface preparation. B. Materials and installation for surface markings shall be in accordance with TxDOT Specifications. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Contractor personnel performing testing must either be ACI- certified or qualified by a recognized equivalent written and performance testing program for the tests being performed. Sampling and testing for quality control include those ` specified in this Article. B. Job -Control Testing: Unless otherwise shown on the plans, perform all fresh and hardened concrete job -control testing at the specified frequency. Use of a commercial laboratory is -' acceptable. Maintain all testing equipment calibrated in accordance with pertinent test methods. Make strength -testing equipment available to the Engineer for verification testing. Provide the Engineer the opportunity to witness all tests. The Engineer may require a retest if not given the opportunity to witness. Furnish a copy of all tests results to the Engineer daily. The Engineer will direct random job -control sampling and testing. Immediately investigate and take corrective action as approved if any Contractor test _ results, including tests performed for verification purposes, does not meet specification requirements. When job -control testing by the Contractor is waived by the plans, the ; Engineer will perform the testing; however, this does not waive the Contractor's responsibility for providing materials and work in accordance with this Item. C. Job -Control Strength: Unless otherwise shown on the plans or permitted by the Engineer, use 7-day job -control strength testing in accordance with ASTM C 78. When a job -control concrete strength test value is more than 10% below the required job -control strength or when 3 consecutive job -control strength values fall below the required job -control strength, investigate the strength test procedures, the quality of materials, the concrete production operations, and other possible problem areas to determine the cause. Take necessary action to correct the problem, including redesign of the concrete mix if needed. The Owner may suspend concrete paving if the Contractor is unable to identify, document, and correct the cause of low strength test values in a timely manner. If any job -control strength is more than 15% below the required job -control strength, the Engineer will evaluate the structural adequacy of the pavements. When directed, remove and replace pavements found to be structurally inadequate at no additional cost.__ 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 19-' 10/13 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue D. Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 2. Provide the Engineer the opportunity to witness all tests. The Engineer may require a retest if not given the opportunity to witness. Furnish a copy of all test results to the Engineer daily. Check the first few concrete loads for slump, air, and temperature on start-up production days to check for concrete conformance and consistency. Flexural and Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 78 and ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 100 cu. yd. One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required. Perform slump, air, and temperature tests each time strength specimens are made. Monitor concrete temperature to ensure that concrete is consistently within the temperature requirements. The Engineer will direct random job -control sampling and testing. Immediately investigate and take corrective action as approved if any Contractor test result, including tests performed for verification purposes, does not meet specification requirements. 3. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 4. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes. 5. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air -entrained concrete. 6. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of strength specimens. 7. Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of two standard beams and one set of four standard cylinders for each flexural and compressive -strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Flexural strength test specimens will be cured under the same conditions as the portion of pavement involved. Cylinders shall be molded and stored for laboratory -cured test specimens unless field -cured test specimens are required. E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design strengths at their required time, concrete mix proportions and materials, breaking strengths, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Engineer but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection. G. Additional Tests: Contractor shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer. Contractor may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. H. Contractor shall pay for failing tests. 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 20 10/13 f v 341h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue I. Questionable Concrete 1. Concrete shall be considered "Questionable Concrete" where any of the following test evaluations occur: a. Individual test strength is below specified strength; or b. Samples of concrete for acceptance test cylinders or acceptance test beams are not representative of concrete -in -place in the pavement; or C. Insufficient or inadequate concrete curing; or d. Insufficient number of acceptance test cylinders or acceptance test beams for day's concreting were made for testing. e. In -place core densities, on average, are less than 97% of original mix design density, or any one core is below 96% of original mix design density, 2. Except where core tests will impair the strength of the structure, core test as directed by the Owner shall be made at no cost to the Owner to resolve Questionable Concrete. If core tests fail to demonstrate the test strength required by the contract documents or structural analysis does not confirm the adequacy of the structure, the Owner may, at his discretion, reject the work or require load tests or additional construction. Should structural analysis confirm the adequacy of the pavement, the Owner may, at his discretion, accept the concrete with credit for the full value of the concrete delivered to the site in accordance with the General Conditions. 3. The Contractor shall pay all costs incurred in providing the additional testing or analysis to resolve the acceptability of Questionable Concrete. 4. Core Tests a. Three representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of concrete for each test considered questionable. Location of cores shall be as directed by the Owner to least impair the strength of the pavement. Damaged cores shall be replaced. b. Cores shall be obtained and tested in accordance with ASTM C42 except that if concrete in the structure will be dry under service conditions the cores shall be air dried (temperature 60 degrees F to 80 degrees F, and relative humidity less than 60%) for 7 days before test and shall be tested dry. If the concrete in the structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, the cores shall be immersed in water for at least 48 hours and tested wet. 3.14 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet requirements in this Section. B. Drill test cores where directed by Engineer when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with Portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material from construction traffic. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for opening section to public traffic. END OF SECTION 01269212 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 10/13 02751 - 21 341h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02764 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES Conditions and A. Expansion and contraction joints within Portland cement concrete pavement. B. Joints between Portland cement concrete and asphalt pavement. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02741 — Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving B. Section 02751 — Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 1193 — Use of Joint Sealants B. ASTM D 5249 — Backer Material for Use With Cold -and -Hot -Applied Joint Sealants in Portland Cement Concrete and Asphalt Joints C. ASTM D 1751 — Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) D. ASTM D 3405 — Joint Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements E. ASTM D 3406 — Joint Sealant, Hot Applied, Elastomeric Type, for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements F. ASTM C 920 — Elastomeric Joint Sealants G. DMS — TxDOT Departmental Material Specification. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint -sealant samples in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material snatching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From joint sealant manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint -sealant backer materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating joint sealants comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations. 01269212 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements a Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint -sealant installations with a record of successful in-service ' performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency, based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 2. Test joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods. t D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturer, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion i of joint sealants to joint substrates. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. When blowing dust conditions exist. B. Joint -Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than that allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint -Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 01269212 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 10/13 02764 - 2 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Bituminous pre -molded expansion joint shall conform to ASTM D 1751. C. Joint sealant shall be in accordance with DMS - 6300. 1. For joints between Portland cement concrete and asphalt concrete provide class 3, 4 or 5. 2. For joints in Portland cement concrete pavement. Provide Class 5 or 8. D. Mix material in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 2.2 JOINT -SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint -sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Round Backer Rod for Cold- and Hot -Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depths and prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant. C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot -Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control sealant depths, prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant. D. Round Backer Rods for Cold -Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control sealant depths and prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant. 2.3 PRIMERS A. Primers: Product recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint- sealant - substrate tests and field tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint -sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 01269212 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 3 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 01269212 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 4 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. END OF SECTION 01269212 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 5 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 02900 SEEDING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Seeding at all disturbed areas. B. Establishment of grass. C. Fertilizers. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02300 — Earthwork: Excavation, filling, rough grading, and subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products. 2. Analysis for other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable. 3. Label data substantiating that plants, trees, shrubs, and planting materials comply with specified requirements. B. Certification of grass seed from seed vendor for each grass -seed mixture stating the botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. C. Material test reports from qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following materials with requirements indicated. 1. Analysis of existing surface soil. 2. Analysis of imported topsoil. D. Planting schedule indicating anticipated dates and locations for each type of planting. E. Maintenance instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscaping during an entire year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods. 01269212 SEEDING 02900 - 1 i 10/13 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed landscaping work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful landscape establishment. 1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that landscaping is in progress. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency -submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work. C. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish a soil analysis made by a qualified independent soil -testing agency stating percentages of organic matter, inorganic matter (silt, clay, and sand), deleterious material, pH, and mineral and plant -nutrient content of topsoil. 1. Report suitability of topsoil for growth of applicable planting material. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and any limestone, aluminum sulfate, or other soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory topsoil. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site. B. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Utilities: Determine location of above grade and underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. B. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Architect before planting. 1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of planting materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material required. 1.9 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 4 ` 01269212 SEEDING 02900 - 2 10/13 t 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 1.10 MAINTENANCE A. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable stand of grass is established, but for not less than the following periods: 1. Seeded: 60 days after date of Substantial Completion. a. When full maintenance period has not elapsed before end ofplanting season, or if lawn is not fully established at that time, continue maintenance during next planting season. B. Maintain and establish grasses by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and other operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a consistent stand of grass. C. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep grass uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches. 1. Water grass at the minimum rate of 1 inch per week. D. Mow grass as soon as there is enough top growth to cut with mower set at specified height for principal species planted. Repeat mowing as required to maintain specified height without cutting more than 40 percent of the grass height. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass -leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. E. Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer to grass after first mowing and when grass is dry. 1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb. per 1000 sq. ft. of lawn area. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GRASS MATERIALS A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new -crop seed complying with the Association of Official Seed Analysts' "Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances. A 1. Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight, and minimum percentages of purity, germination, and maximum percentage of weed seed as indicated on Schedules at the end of this Section. 2.2 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, 4 percent organic material minimum, free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site. Verify suitability of surface soil to produce topsoil meeting requirements and amend when necessary. Supplement with imported topsoil when quantities are insufficient. Clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 01269212 10/13 SEEDING 02900 - 3 1� _ 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2.3 FERTILIZER A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial -grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow -release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea -form, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 11 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil -testing agency. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive landscaping for compliance with requirements and for conditions affecting performance of work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Outline areas, and secure Contracting Officer's acceptance before the start of planting work. Make minor adjustments as may be required. 3.3 PLANTING SOIL PREPARATION A. Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. B. Mix soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates indicated. Delay mixing fertilizer if planting does not follow placing of planting soil within a few days. 1. A "Planting Soil Amendments Schedule" is included at the end of this Section. C. For grass, mix planting soil either prior to planting or apply on surface of topsoil and mix thoroughly before planting. 3.4 GRASS PLANTING PREPARATION A. Limit subgrade preparation to areas that will be planted in the immediate future. B. Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1/2 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous materials. C. Spread planting soil mixture to depth required to meet thickness, grades, and elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen. 1. Place approximately 1/2 the thickness of planting soil mixture required. Work into top of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting soil mixture. D. Grade grass areas to a smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. Remove trash, debris, stones larger than 1/2 inch in any dimension, and other objects that may interfere with planting or maintenance operations. 01269212 SEEDING 02900 - 4 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue E. Moisten prepared grass areas before planting when soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow s surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. F. Restore prepared areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and before planting. 3.5 SEEDING NEW GRASSED AREAS A. Sow seed with a spreader or a seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 2 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in 2 directions at right angles to each other. 1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage. B. Rake seed lightly into top 1/4 inch of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray. 3.6 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During landscaping, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect landscaping from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property. x B. Grassed Areas: Provide soil amendments in not less than the following quantities: 9 1. Weight of commercial fertilizer per acre: 4001bs. SEED MIXTURES SCHEDULE A. Full -Sun Mixture: Provide certified grass -seed blends or mixes, proportioned by weight, as follows: PROPORTION NAME MIN. PCT. GERM. MIN. PCT. PURE SD. MAX. PCT. WEED SD. 100 pct. Green Sprangletop 0.8 85 0.50 Sideouts Grama 0.5 Plains Bristlegr 1.3 Buffalogrss 1.1 K-R Bluestem 9.0 END OF SECTION 01269212 SEEDING 02900 - 5 10/13 9 EN 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formwork for cast -in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage. B. Openings for other work. C. Form accessories. D. Form stripping. 1.3 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Supply of concrete accessories for placement by this Section. 1.4 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.5 REFERENCES A. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice For Concrete Formwork. B. PS-1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. 1.6 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints and ties. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347. 01269212 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03100 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600 — Product Requirements. B. Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039 — Coordination and Meetings. B. Coordinate this Section with other Sections of work which require attachment of components to formwork. C. If formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Engineer before proceeding. PART 2 - PRODUCTS E_ 1 2.1 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Plywood: Douglas Fir species; medium density overlaid one side grade; sound undamaged Iri sheets with clean, true edges. B. Lumber: Douglas fir species; construction grade; with grade stamp clearly visible. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS -PREFABRICATED FORMS A. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 — Product Requirements. 2.3 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Snap -off type, metal, fixed length, cone type, free of defects that could leave holes larger than one inch in concrete surface. B. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. C. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. D. Waterstops: Polyvinyl chloride, minimum 1,750 psi tensile strength, minimum 50 degrees F to plus 175 degrees F working temperature range, maximum possible lengths, ribbed profile, preformed corner sections, heat welded jointing. E. Cold Joint Waterstops: Flexible strip, bentonite waterproofing compound equal to Volcaly Waterstop-RX by American Colloid Company. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with Drawings. 01269212 10/13 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03100 - 2 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.2 EARTH FORMS A. Verify with Engineer prior to the use of earth forms in lieu of specified form material. B. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete. 3.3 ERECTION - FORMWORK A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members which are not indicated on Drawings. F. Provide chamfer strips on external corners of beams, joists, columns and walls. 3.4 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive applied coverings which are effected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. 3.5 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Install waterstops continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints watertight. F. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. G. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. 3.6 FORM CLEANING A. Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection proceeds. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean -out ports. D. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts or water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heat enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 01269212 10/13 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03100 - 3 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.7 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. B. Do not reuse wood formwork more than four times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork. 3.9 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms. END OF SECTION 01269212 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03100 - 4 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT M 71_R-1 QlI D0 D) 710 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Reinforcing steel bars, wire fabric and accessories for cast -in -place concrete. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete. C. ACI SP-66 - American Concrete Institute - Detailing Manual. D. ANSUASTM A82 - Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. E. ANSUASTM A 18 5 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ANSUAWS 131.4 - Structural Welding Code for Reinforcing Steel. G. ANSUAWS D12.1 -Reinforcing Steel Welding Code. H. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. I. AWS D12.1 - Welding Reinforcement Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction. J. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Practice. K. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice For Placing Reinforcing Bars. L. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice For Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI 63, 65 and Manual of Practice, ACI 301, ACI SP-66, ACI 318. B. Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis. 01269212 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03200 - 1 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039 — Coordination and Meetings. B. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars, plain. B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 Plain Type; in flat sheets; plain. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type. B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice. B. Weld reinforcement when approved by the Engineer in accordance with ANSI/AWS DIA. C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings, at point of minimum stress. Review location of splices with Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. D. Conform to ACI 318 for concrete cover over reinforcement. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400 — Quality Requirements. END OF SECTION 01269212 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03200 - 2 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes, but is not limited to cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures, curing, and finishes. B. Cast -in -place concrete includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Concrete Rip -rap. 2. Sign anchors. 3. ADA ramps. 4. Illumination pole foundations. 5. Inlets, headwalls, wingwalis, and aprons. 6. Utility encasements. 7. Cast -in -place manhole bases and manhole riser supports at pipe tee locations. C. Concrete for pavement, sidewalk, curb and gutter, driveways, and alleys shall meet the requirements of Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Pavement. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, curing compounds, and others if requested by Engineer. C. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. D. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, materials, steel grades, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement and methods of support. Include special reinforcing required for openings through concrete structures. E. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test. F. Formwork shop drawings: Prepared by or under supervision of a qualified Professional Engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. Design and Engineering of formwork are Contractor's responsibility. G. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicated proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal and installing and removing reshoring. 01269212 10/13 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice." 4. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 305R, "Hot Weather Concreting." 5. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 306R, "Cold Weather Concreting." 6. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 306.1, "Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting." 7. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 350R, "Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures." 8. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." B. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a testing agency acceptable to Owner to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. Agency shall be qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field test shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-I or an equivalent certification program. C. Materials and installed Work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of Work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed Work, shall be done at Contractor's expense. D. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94, "Requirements for Production Facilities and Equipment." 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, earth, or another acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. B. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. C. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snap -off metal form ties designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. 1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in the concrete surface. 01269212 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue r 2. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of the exposed surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water. Barrier plates to walls indicated to receive damp proofing or waterproofing. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 Grade 60, deformed. B. Epoxy -coated fabricated reinforcing bars ASTM A 775. C. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs and spacers for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar -type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 1. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel (CRSI, Class 2). 3. Space reinforcing supports at 5'-0" maximum in any direction. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless noted otherwise. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C. C. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, size 57. D. Water: Potable. E. Admixtures, General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. G. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. H. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G. I. Water -Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. J. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. K. Water Proofing Admixture: IPANEX (800) 523-3834. 2.4 CURING COMPOUND A. Liquid -type membrane -forming curing compound with white pigment complying with ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 1.0 pounds per square yard when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot -dip galvanized sheet steel, not less than 0.0336 inch thick with bent tab anchors. Fill slot with temporary filler or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. B. Sand Cushion: Clean, manufactured or natural sand with plasticity index of 8 or less. C. Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: Liquid -type membrane -forming curing compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 1.0 lb/sq.yd. when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal. 01269212 10/13 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 341h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue D. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base. E. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two -component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements. 2.6 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. 1. Do not use the same testing agency as Owner for field quality control testing. B. Submit written reports to Engineer of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Engineer. Do not submit mix designs for other projects or that are over 60 days of age. Do not submit concrete cylinder strength reports from other projects that are older than 45 days, or that are not of the proposed mix design. C. Standard design mix to be used unless noted otherwise, provide normal weight concrete with the following properties: 1. 3000 psi, 28-day compressive strength. 2. Type I cement. 3. Fly Ash: Allow up to 30% of cementitious material. 4. Minimum Slump: 4 inches. 5. Maximum Slump: 6 inches. 6. Maximum Water Cementitious Water Ratio:.55. 7. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 5 to 7 percent, unless otherwise indicated. D. Water related structures mix design: Provide normal weight concrete with the following properties: 1. 4500 psi, 28-day compressive strength. 2. Type I cement 3. Fly Ash: 30% of total cementitious weight. 4. Minimum slump: 6 inches 5. Maximum slump: 8 inches 6. Maximum water cementitious material ratio:.40 7. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 5 to 7 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Water proofing admixture. 9. Floor hardener admixture. E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Engineer. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Engineer before using in Work. 2.7 ADMIXTURES A. Use water -reducing admixture or high -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. B. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F. C. Use admixtures for water reduction and set accelerating or retarding in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. 01269212 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 10/13 i i� 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue D. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete required to be water tight, and concrete with a water cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. E. Limit water-soluble, chloride ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2.9 FLOWABLE FILL A. Flowable fill shall consist of a concrete mixture of pea gravel and sand with a cement content of l 2 sacks per cubic yard. Flowable fill shall be used for backfill in all utility ditches within the right of way, and other areas as specified. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder, and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. Before concrete placement operations begin, the substrate shall be fully prepared. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying that all work which will be embedded is complete and necessary inspections have been performed. Pour stops or bulkheads shall be in place and reinforcement shall be secured in proper location. 3.2 FORMS A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits: 1. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view. 2. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces. B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, linkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking. C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like for easy removal. 01269212 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033 - 00 5 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue D. Provide temporary openings for clean -outs and inspections where interior area of formwork is inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified. 1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder during reinforcement placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Engineer. D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. F. Do not weld reinforcing bars unless specifically shown. Where shown on the plans, comply with AWS D1.4. Bars to be welded shall conform to ASTM A706. 3.4 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Engineer. B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and between walls and footings. Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose may be used for slabs. C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements. D. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. E. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's printed instructions. 01269212 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6 10/13 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue F. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs -on -grade at points of contact between slabs -on -grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. G. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Construct contraction joints in slabs -on -grade to form panels of patterns as shown. 3.5 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached. B. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated on drawings. C. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. D. Ends of storm sewer pipe to be embedded in cast -in -place walls shall be in place prior to setting formwork and reinforcement, floor slab inclusive. 3.6 PREPARING FORM SURFACES A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form -coating compound before placing reinforcement. B. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in -place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions. 1. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, iust-preventative material. Rust -stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as specified. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand - spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309. 01269212 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate. E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement. F. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. G. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. H. Hot -Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305R and as specified. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time ofplacement to below 90 deg F. Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature irmnediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas. 4. Use water -reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Engineer. I. Water may be added to the concrete at the project site, subject to the following conditions: 1. Truck tickets indicate maximum amount of water that can be added without exceeding the maximum specified water/cement ratio. 2. Water is added in a manner to control volume added. 3. Concrete is properly re -mixed after addition of water. 4. Inspector is notified, if concrete placement requires inspection. 5. Site added water should be done prior to taking concrete samples for testing. 6. Do not add water to concrete after adding high range water -reducing admixtures to mix. 01269212 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8 10/13 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough -Formed Finish: Provide a rough -formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form -facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth -Formed Finish: Provide a smooth -formed finish on formed concrete surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system. This is an as -cast concrete surface obtained with selected form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed. C. Smooth -Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth -rubbed finish on scheduled concrete surfaces that have received smooth -formed finish treatment not later than 1 day after form removal. 1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo; and where indicated. 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand -floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155 . Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 2. Remove any efflorescence as soon as feasible after its appearance. If the efflorescence hardens, then remove with a mild detergent or a mild acid cleaner. B. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or another thin film -finish coating system. 1. After floating, begin first trowel -finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand -troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor flatness) and F(L) 17 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system. 01269212 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 9 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue C. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Engineer before application. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work. 3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation -control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, and moisture -retaining cover curing. D. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as follows: 1. Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 1 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray. Recoat areas subjected to rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.12 REMOVING FORMS A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form -removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. 3.13 REUSING FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form -facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form -coating compound as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Engineer. 01269212 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 10 10/13 30 Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removing forms, when acceptable to Engineer. B. Mix dry -pack mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. 1. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat the area to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. 2. For surfaces exposed to view, blend white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Engineer. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry -pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope. 1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Engineer. 4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 01269212 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 11 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements _ Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue E. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Place dry -pack before bonding agent has dried. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. If random cracks and single holes indicate weeping and leakage under adjacent hydrostatic head, seal with Avanti International Scotch Seal 5600 urethane, water -activated grout prior to dry packing. F. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Engineer for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. G. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Engineer. 3.15 HYDRAULIC LEAKAGE REPAIR A. Joints, embedments and penetrations that exhibit leakage or weeping when under adjacent hydrostatic pressure shall be sealed with Avanti International Scotch Seal 5600 water -activated urethane grout. Procedures and surface finish over urethane grout shall be as approved by the Engineer. 3.16 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement shall be performed by Contractor as follows: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. One test for each set of compressive strength cylinders cast. b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air -entrained concrete. C. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below, when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressive -strength specimens. One test for each set of compressive strength cylinders cast. d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive -strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory -cured test specimens except when field -cured test specimens are required. e. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the first 25 cu. yd. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two 1 specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. 2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch Li if fewer than five are used. 3. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three r consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no 1 individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than - 500 psi. 01269212 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 12 10/13 34`" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue it B. Test results will be reported in writing to Engineer, ready -mix producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, ' concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. ' C. Additional Tests: The Contractor will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Engineer. The Owner may require the Contractor to conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. D. Questionable Concrete 1. Concrete shall be considered "Questionable Concrete" where any of the following test evaluations occur: a. Individual test strength is below specified strength; or b. Samples of concrete for acceptance test cylinders are not representative of concrete in -place in the structure; or C. Insufficient or inadequate concrete curing; or d. Insufficient number of acceptance test cylinders for day's concreting were made for testing. 2. Except where core tests will impair the strength of the structure, core test as directed by the Owner shall be made at no cost to the Owner to resolve Questionable Concrete. If core tests fail to demonstrate the test strength required by the contract documents or structural analysis does not confirm the adequacy of the structure, the Owner may, at his discretion, reject the work or require load tests or additional construction. Should structural analysis confirm the adequacy of the structure, the Owner may, at his discretion, accept the concrete with credit for the full value of the concrete delivered to the site in accordance with the General Conditions. 3. The Contractor shall pay all costs incurred in providing the additional testing or analysis to resolve the acceptability of Questionable Concrete. 4. Core Tests a. Three representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of concrete for each test considered questionable. Location of cores shall be as directed by the Owner to least impair the strength of the structure. Damaged cores shall be replaced. b. Cores shall be obtained and tested in accordance with ASTM C42 except that if concrete in the structure will be dry under service conditions the cores shall be air dried (temperature 60 degrees F. to 80 degrees F., and relative humidity less than 60%) for 7 days before test and shall be tested dry. If the concrete in the structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, the cores shall be immersed in water for at least 48 hours and tested wet. C. Questionable concrete will be considered structurally acceptable if the average of the cores is equal to or greater than 90% of the specified strength and no single core is greater than 500 psi below specified strength. END OF SECTION - 01269212 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 13 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Ouaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 03410 PRECAST CONCRETE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes precast concrete units, used for construction of the following: 1. Manholes. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02665 — Water Works Piping, Valves and Fittings. B. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. C. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. D. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data and instructions for manufactured materials and products. Include manufacturer's certifications and laboratory test reports as required. C. Mix design reports of proposed concrete mix as specified in Part 2 of this Section. D. Shop drawings prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer, showing complete information for fabrication and installation ofprecast concrete units. Indicate member dimensions and cross-section; location, size, and type of reinforcement, including special reinforcement; and lifting devices necessary for handling and erection. 1. Indicate layout and dimensions, and identify each precast unit corresponding to sequence and procedure of installation. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail inserts, connections, and joints, including accessories and construction at openings in precast units. 2. Provide location and details of anchorage devices that are to be embedded in other construction. Furnish templates, if required, for accurate placement. E. Test reports as required by provisions of this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications and standards, except as otherwise indicated: 1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code: Steel." 01269212 PRECAST CONCRETE 03410 - 1 10/13 30 Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue i` 4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice." 5. Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI) MNL 116, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants - and Production of Precast Concrete Products." 6. PCI MNL 120 "Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete (3rd Edition). B. Design by Fabricator: Design precast units to support superimposed dead loads and live loads as required for compliance with local governing code requirements. C. Fabrication Qualifications: Produce precast concrete units at fabricating plant engaged ` primarily in manufacturing of similar units, unless plant fabrication or delivery to Project site is impractical. 1. If units are not produced at precast concrete fabricating plant, maintain procedures and conditions for quality control that are equivalent to plant production. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver the amount of precast concrete units needed in a timely manner to the Project site to ensure installation continuity. B. Store and handle the units at the Project site to prevent cracking, distortion, staining, or other physical damage, and so that markings are visible. Lift and support units at designated lift points. C. Deliver anchorage items that are to be embedded in other construction before starting such work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. Provide forms and, where required, form facing materials of metal, plastic, wood, or another acceptable material that is nonreactive with concrete and will produce required finish surfaces. B. Accurately construct forms, mortar -tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete placing operations, temperature changes, and for prestressed, pre -tensioning, and detensioning operations. Maintain formwork to provide completed precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified in PCI MNL 116. C. Manhole frames and covers shall be of cast iron of the types shown on the drawings. All castings shall be made from superior quality gray cast iron conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 48. Drawings of all manhole frames and covers proposed for use shall be submitted for approval before items are shipped. D. Resilient materials for connectors and filler rings shall be manufactured of natural or synthetic rubber and shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 1 of ASTM C923. E. All joints shall be tongue and groove except for the grade rings and all joints shall be watertight. ConSeal CS-102 flexible plastic gaskets or approved equal shall be used in all joints. All joints shall be primed prior to the application of the joint sealing material. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold -drawn steel. C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. 01269212 PRECAST CONCRETE 03410 - 2 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue D. Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497. E. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing, complying with CRSI recommendations. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III. B. Use only one brand and type of cement throughout Project, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner's representative. C. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, and as specified here. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 1. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33, but that have shown by special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability, may be used when acceptable to the Owner's representative. D. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330. E. Water: Potable. F. Admixtures, General: Provide admixtures for concrete that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. G. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. H. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, or other Type approved for fabricator's units. 2.4 GROUT MATERIALS A. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150 (Type I), and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 2.5 MIX PROPORTION AND DESIGN A. Prepare design mixes for each type of concrete required. B. Design mixes may be prepared by independent testing facility or by qualified precast manufacturing plant personnel at precast manufacturer's option. C. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods using materials to be employed on the Project for each type of concrete required complying with ACI 318. 1. Produce standard -weight concrete consisting of specified portland cement, aggregates, admixtures, and water to produce the following properties: a. Compressive strength--5000 psi minimum at 28 days. b. Release strength for prestressed units--3500 psi. 2. Cure compression test cylinders using same methods as for precast concrete work. D. Submit written reports to Owner of proposed mix for each type of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of precast unit production. Do not begin concrete production until mixes and evaluations have been reviewed by Owner. E. Adjusting Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. Laboratory test data for revised mix designs and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Owner's representative before using in the Work. 01269212 PRECAST CONCRETE 03410 - 3 10/13 34`" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue r F. Admixtures: Use air -entraining admixture in concrete, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use water -reducing admixtures in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. Admixtures to increase cement dispersion, or provide increased workability for low -slump concrete, may be used subject to Owner's acceptance. 2. Use amounts as recommended by admixture manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at time of placing. Adjust quantities of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate precast concrete units complying with manufacturing and testing procedures, quality control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances of PCI MNL-116 and as specified for types of units required. B. A shorter mixing time than that specified in ASTM C 94 maybe required during hot weather or under conditions contributing to rapidly setting concrete. 1. When the air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes. When air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. C. Cast -in openings larger than 12 inches in diameter or 12 inches square in accordance with final shop drawings. Other smaller holes may be field cut by trades requiring them, as acceptable to Owner's representative. D. Coat surfaces of forms with bond -breaking compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formula form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy the bond with concrete. F. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcement by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. G. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. H. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast units, complying with requirements of ACI 304. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items. 1. Identify pick-up points and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on final shop drawings. Imprint casting date on each precast unit on a surface that will not show in the finished structure. J. Cure by low-pressure steam, steam vapor, radiant heat and moisture, or another similar process to accelerate concrete hardening and to reduce curing time. K. Finish formed surfaces of precast concrete as indicated for each type of unit, and as follows: 1. Standard Finish: Normal plant -run finish produced in forms that impart a smooth finish to concrete. Small surface holes caused by air bubbles, normal color variations and form joint marks, and minor chips and spalls will be tolerated. Major or unsightly imperfections, honeycomb, or structural defects are not permitted. 01269212 PRECAST CONCRETE 03410 - 4 10/13 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner may employ an independent testing laboratory to evaluate precast manufacturer's quality control and testing methods. B. The precast manufacturer shall allow Owner's testing facility access to materials storage areas, concrete production equipment, and concrete placement and curing facilities. Cooperate with Owner's testing laboratory and provide samples of materials and concrete mixes as may be requested for additional testing and evaluation. C. Dimensional Tolerances: Units having dimensions smaller or greater than required and outside specified tolerance limits may be subject to additional testing as specified here. D. Precast units having dimensions greater than required will be rejected if the appearance or function of the structure is adversely affected or if larger dimensions interfere with other construction. Repair or remove and replace rejected units, as required, to meet construction conditions. E. Strength of precast concrete units will be considered potentially deficient if the manufacturing processes fail to comply with any of the requirements that may affect the strength of the precast units, including the following conditions: 1. Failure to meet compressive strength tests requirements. 2. Concrete curing, and protection of precast units against extremes in temperature not as specified. 3. Precast units damaged during handling and erection. F. Defective Work: Remove precast concrete units that do not conform to specified requirements, including strength, tolerances, and finishes. Replace with precast concrete units that meet requirements of this section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Erection Tolerances: Install precast units without exceeding tolerance limits specified in PCI MNL-127, "Recommended Practice for Erection of Precast Concrete." 1. Grouting Connections and Joints: After precast concrete units have been placed and secured, grout open spaces at connection and joints as follows: 2. Cement grout consisting of 1 part Portland cement, 2-1/2 parts sand, and only enough water to properly mix and hydrate. 3. Provide forms or other acceptable method to retain grout in place until sufficiently hard to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, plumb, and level with adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it hardens. B. Precast Reinforced Concrete Manholes 1. After the excavation has been completed, the concrete base or bottom shall be poured in accordance with the details shown on the plans. 2. The pipe shall be laid through the manholes and, upon completion of the invert, the top half of the pipe shall be removed. Where there is a change in direction of the main, and where lateral lines enter the manhole, the inverts shall be neatly formed with concrete. The inverts shall have a true curve of as large a radius as the size of the manhole will permit and shall be given a smooth trowel finish. 01269212 PRECAST CONCRETE 03410 - 5 10/13 34`h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 3. When the concrete bottom has properly cured for not less than 24-hours, the precast manhole shall be installed. ConSeal CS-102 flexible plastic gaskets or equal shall be used in the tongue and groove joints and the joint between the manhole bottom section and the manhole base. The bottom ring shall be grouted in as shown on the plans. Concrete grade rings shall be used to adjust the manhole frame to the proper grades; the maximum extension of the top section shall not exceed 12-inches. C. Manhole Testing A leakage test shall be performed on each manhole installed in this project. The manhole leakage test shall not be performed until a backfill around the manhole has been in place in for at least 48 hours. Manhole leakage tests may be performed by one of two methods: 1. A hydrostatic exfiltration test or 2. A vacuum test. a. Manhole Hydrostatic Exfiltration Test 1) All wastewater lines entering the manhole shall be temporarily plugged with an internal pipe plug. The manhole shall be filled with water to the manhole ring and allowed to stand for 24 hours in order to allow saturation of the concrete. Following the 24-hour saturation period, the manhole shall be refilled with water to the manhole ring and the test period begun. The contractor shall provide test equipment in which the volume of water lost can be accurately metered or measured. The minimum test period shall be one hour. The maximum allowable loss rate shall not be greater than 0.025 gallons per foot of manhole diameter per foot of manhole depth per hour. 2) The exfiltration test shall only be performed in the presence of the Owner's representative. Any manhole which fails the hydrostatic exfiltration test shall be repaired, reworked or replaced as applicable at the Contractor's expense until the manhole passes the required test. b. Manhole Vacuum Test 1) The manhole vacuum test shall be equal to that offered and described by Cheme Industries Inc., 5700 Lincoln Drive, Minneapolis, MN 55436, telephone (612) 933-5501, or equivalent. Manufacturer's literature, procedures and recommendations shall be submitted to the Engineer. 2) Any manhole which fails the vacuum test shall be repaired, reworked or replaced as applicable at the Contractor's expense until the manhole passes the required test. Manhole vacuum tests shall only be performed in the presence of the Engineer. Contact the Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of testing activities. END OF SECTION 01269212 PRECAST CONCRETE 03410 - 6 10/13 I__' 341" Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 03412 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install reinforced concrete pipe, materials for precast concrete pipe culverts, or precast concrete storm drain mains, laterals, stubs, and inlet leads. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02317 — Excavation And Backfill For Structures. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FABRICATION A. Provide precast reinforced concrete pipe that conforms to the design shown on the plans and to the following: 1. ASTM C 76 or ASTM C 655 B. Provide precast concrete pipe that is machine -made or cast by a process that will provide for uniform placement of the concrete in the form and compaction by mechanical devices that will assure a dense concrete. Mix concrete in a central batch plant or other approved hatching facility where the quality and uniformity of the concrete is assured. Do not use transit -mixed concrete for precast concrete pipe. When sulfate -resistant concrete is required, do not use Class C fly ash. C. Do not place more than 2 holes for lifting and placing in the top section of precast pipe. Cast, cut, or drill the lifting holes in the wall of the pipe. The maximum hole diameter is 3 in. at the inside surface of the pipe wall and 4 in. at the outside surface. Do not cut more than 1 longitudinal wire or 2 circumferential wires per layer of reinforcing steel when locating lift holes. 01269212 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE 03412 - 1 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2.3 2.4 2.5 DESIGN A. Provide precast concrete pipe with the D-Load shown in Table 1. Table 1 Circular Pipe ASTM C 76 & ASTM C 655 Class D-Load I 800 II 1,000 III 1,350 IV 2,000 V 3,000 B. Physical Test Requirements. Acceptance of the pipe will be determined by the results of the following tests: 1. Material tests required in ASTM C 76, C 655, C 506, or C 507. 2. Absorption tests in accordance with ASTM C 497. 3. Three -edge bearing tests in accordance with ASTM C 497 (Perform 3-edge bearing tests on 1 pipe for each 300 pipes or fraction thereof for each design or shape, size, class, or D-load produced within 30 calendar days. Test for the load to produce a 0.01-in. crack or 15% in excess of the required D-load, whichever is less. 4. Inspection of the finished pipe to determine its conformance with the required design and its freedom from defects. MARKING A. Clearly mark the following information on each section of pipe: 1. Class or D-load of pipe, 2. ASTM designation, 3. Date of manufacture, 4. Name or trademark of the manufacturer. INSPECTION A. Provide facilities and access to allow for inspection regarding the quality of materials, the process of manufacture, and the finished pipe at the pipe manufacturing plant. In addition, provide access for inspection of the finished pipe at the project site before and during installation. CAUSES FOR REJECTION A. Individual sections of pipe may be rejected for any of the following: 1. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell, with the exception of a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint; 2. Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning, mixing, and molding; 3. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture; 4. Damaged ends where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint; 5. Any continuous crack having a surface width of 0.01 in. or more and extending for a length of 12 in. or more. 01269212 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE 03412 - 2 10/13 34"' Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue 2.6 REPAIRS A. Make repairs if necessary because of occasional imperfections in manufacture or accidental damage during handling. The Engineer may accept pipe with repairs that are sound, properly finished, and cured in conformance with pertinent specifications. 2.7 REJECTIONS A. Allow access for the marking of rejected pipe. Remove the rejected pipe from the project and replace with pipe meeting the requirements of this Section. 2.8 JOINTING MATERIALS A. Use mortar composed of 1 part (by volume) Portland cement and 2 parts mortar sand and enough water to make a plastic mix. Mortar which has not been used after 45 minutes of having water added shall be discarded. Mortar may not be retempered by having water added. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION, SHAPING, BEDDING, AND BACKFILL A. Excavate, shape, bed, and backfill in accordance with Section 02317 - Excavation and Backfill for Structures. Take special precautions in placing and compacting the backfill to avoid any movement of the pipe or damage to the joints. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or permitted in writing, do not use heavy earth -moving equipment to haul over the structure until a minimum of 4 ft. of permanent or temporary compacted fill has been placed over the structure. Remove and replace pipe damaged by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. 3.2 LAYING PIPE A. Unless otherwise authorized, start the laying of pipe on the bedding at the outlet end with the spigot or tongue end pointing downstream, and proceed toward the inlet end with the abutting sections properly matched, true to the established lines and grades. Fit, match, and lay the pipe to form a smooth, uniform conduit. Where bell -and -spigot pipe is used, cut cross trenches in the foundation to allow the barrel of the pipe to rest firmly upon the bedding. Do not cut cross trenches more than 2 in. larger than the bell ends of the pipe. Lower sections of pipe into the trench without damaging the pipe or disturbing the bedding and the sides of the trench. Carefully clean the ends of the pipe before the pipe is placed. Prevent the earth or bedding material from entering the pipe as it is laid. Remove and re- lay, without extra compensation, pipe that is not in alignment or that shows excessive settlement after laying. Provide a minimum of 9 inches clear space on the sides of the pipe. 3.3 JOINTING A. Make available an appropriate rolling device similar to an automobile mechanic's "creeper" for conveyance through small -size pipe structures. B. Use mortar consisting of 1 part cement, 2 parts sand, and enough water to make a plastic mix. Clean and wet the pipe ends before making the joint. Plaster the lower half of the bell or groove and the upper half of the tongue or spigot with mortar. After the pipes are tightly 01269212 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE 03412 - 3 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue I jointed, pack mortar into the joint from both inside and outside the pipe. Finish the inside smooth and flush with adjacent joints of pipe. For tongue -and -groove joints, form a bead of semicircular cross section over the joint outside the pipe, extending at least I in. on each side of the joint. For bell -and -spigot joints, form the mortar to a 45' fillet between the outer edge of the bell and the spigot. Cure mortar joints by keeping the joints wet for at least 48 hr. or until the backfill has been completed, whichever comes first. When mortar joints are used, do not place fill or backfill until the jointing material has cured for at least 6 hr. Do not conduct jointing when the atmospheric temperature is at or below 40°F. Protect mortared joints against freezing by backfilling or other approved methods for at least 24 hr. 3.4 CONNECTIONS AND STUB ENDS A. Make connections of concrete pipe to existing pipes, pipe storm drains, or storm drain appurtenances as shown on the plans. B. Mortar or concrete the bottom of existing structures if necessary to eliminate any drainage pockets created by the connections. Repair any damage to the existing structure resulting from making the connections. C. Fill lift holes with concrete, mortar, or precast concrete plugs after the pipe is in place. END OF SECTION - 01269212 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE 03412 - 4 10/13 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue SECTION 03414 _a INLETS AND JUNCTION BOXES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Inlets and junctions boxes. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02317— Excavation and Backfill for Structures B. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. C. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. D. Section 03410 — Precast Concrete. E. TxDOT Item 401 — Flowable Backfill 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01330 — Submittal Procedures. B. Submit shop drawings for prefabricated inlets. Include plans, elevations, sections and connection details. C. For junction boxes, submit drawings indicating size, connections, and steel reinforcement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Materials: Precast inlets, extensions and appurtenances are acceptable unless otherwise shown. Alternate designs for precast items must be acceptable to the Engineer and not deviate from the functional dimensions given. Alternate designs are to be designed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer. B. Concrete. Furnish Class A concrete for cast -in -place junction boxes and inlets unless otherwise shown on the plans. Furnish Class A concrete or concrete meeting ASTM C 478 for precast manholes and inlets. Air -entrained concrete will not be required in precast concrete members. C. Jointing Materials. Use mortar composed of one part (by volume) Portland Cement and two parts mortar sand and enough water to make a plastic mix. Hydrated lime or lime putty may be added to the mix to a maximum of 10% by weight of the total dry mix. Mortar which has not been used after 45 minutes of having water added shall be discarded. Mortar may not be reteinpered by having water added. D. Other Materials. Commercial -type hardware of other materials may be used with prior approval. g- i 01269212 INLETS AND JUNCTION BOXES 03414 - 1 i 10/13 It 1-- 341h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Inlets and junction boxes may be built in stages to facilitate construction sequencing. For inlets designed to match the final roadway surface, do not complete the inlet until the pavement structure is substantially complete, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. B. Where inlets or junction boxes are constructed in stages, furnish and install a temporary cover to prevent runoff from entering the structure. Once construction of an inlet is complete, furnish and install any frames, grates, rings and covers to complete the structure. 3.2 INLETS AND JUNCTION BOXES FOR PRECAST CONCRETE PIPE SEWERS A. Construct inlets and junction boxes for precast concrete pipe sewers as soon as is practical after sewer lines are completed. Neatly cut all pipe at the inside face of the walls of the inlet or junction box and joint with mortar. 3.3 INVERTS A. Shape and route floor inverts passing out or through the inlet or junction box as shown on the plans. Shape by adding and shaping mortar or concrete after the base is cast or by placing the required additional material with the base. A. Backfill to original ground elevation in accordance with Section 02317 — Excavation and Backfill for Structures. Areas around inlets or structures not large enough for mechanical compaction shall be backfilled with flowable fill. END OF SECTION 01269212 INLETS AND JUNCTION BOXES 03414 - 2 10/13 APPENDIX A TxDOT SPECIFICATIONS 34'h Street Paving Improvements Quaker Avenue to Indiana Avenue NOTICE TO CONTRACTOR The following contains Specifications taken directly from the Texas Department of Transportation's Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges, adopted by TxDOT on June 1, 2004; provided for ease of reference and selected as being applicable to this project. In some cases, the provided TxDOT specifications may reference other TxDOT specifications that are not provided here. In the event that the TxDOT specifications provided here contain a reference to TxDOT specifications not provided here, the Contractor should utilize the 2004 version of the Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges. �A & COOP .`� ``• FJ KYLE W. JACK 0. 10/07/13 01269212 TXDOT SPECIFICATIONS 10/13 ITEM 300 ASPHALTS, OILS, AND EMULSIONS 300.1. Description. Provide asphalt cements, cutback and emulsified asphalts, performance -graded asphalt binders, and other miscellaneous asphalt materials as specified on the plans. 300.2. Materials. Provide asphalt materials that meet the stated requirements when tested in accordance with the referenced Department, AASHTO, and ASTM test methods. Refer to the Material Inspection Guide (maintained by the Construction Division), Section 11. "Asphalt Inspection, Quality Control and Quality Assurance," for sampling and testing requirements. Acronyms used in this Item are defined in Table 1. Table 1 Acronvms Acronym I Deflnition est Procedure Des. ations _ ___ T------------- - Tex Department T or R AASHTO D ASTM PolymerModiferDesipnations P polymer -modified SBR or L styrene-butadiene rubber (latex) SBS styrene-butadiene-styrene block co -polymer TR tire rubber (from ambient temperature grinding of truck and passenger tires) AC asphalt cement AE asphalt emulsion AE-P asphalt emulsion prime A-R asphalt -rubber C cationic EAP&T emulsified asphalt prime and tack H-suffix harder residue (lower penetration HF high float MC medium -curing Table 1 (continued) Aernnvms Acronym Definition MS medium-settin PCE prime, cure, and erosion control PG perrormance grade RC rapid -curing RS rapid -setting S-suffix stockpile usage SCM special cutback material SS slow -setting A. Asphalt Cement. Asphalt cement must be homogeneous, water -free, and nonfoaming when heated to 347°F, and must meet Table 2 ` requirements. [[ Table 2 1 Asnhnit Cement Test VI cosity Grade AC-0.6 AC-1.5 AC-3 AC-5 AC-10 Property Procedure Min Max Min Max Min:Max Min Max Mini Max Viscosity T 202 ' 140°F, poise 40 80 100:200 250:350 400: 600 800 1,200 2751Epoise 0.4: — 0.7: — I .l : — l A j — 1.9: — Penetration,77°F, 100g, T49 350: — 250: — 210: — 135: — 85 — 5 sec. Flash point, C.O.C., °F T 48 425: — 425: — 425; — 425: — 450: — Solubility in T 44 99.0� — 99.0; — 99.0� — 99.0'. — 9.a — trichloroeth lene : ; ; Spot test Tex-509-C Neg. Neg. Neg. Neg. Neg. Tests on residue from ' Thin -Film Oven Test: T 179 ' Viscosity, 140°F, poise T 202 — ;1$0 — ; 450 — ; 900 — ;1,500 — :3,000 Ductility',77°F T51 1001 — 1o0, — 100: — loo: — Ioo; — 5 cm/min., cm 1. 1t AC-U.6 or AC-i .5 ductility at 77-F is less than IOU cm, material is acceptable if ductility at 60°F is more than 100 cm. B. Polymer -Modified Asphalt Cement. Polymer -modified asphalt cement must be smooth and homogeneous, and comply with the requirements of Table 3. If requested, supply samples of the base asphalt cement and polymer additives. Table 3 PoWmer-IMIndirietl Et,gnh!mlt rpmpnt Property Test Procedure Poi mer-Modified Viscosity Grade AC-5 w/2 /o SBR Ao -10 w/2 /* SBR AC-15P AC-20-STR Min ; Max Min ; Max Min ; Max Min ; Max Polymer SBR SBR SBS TR Polymer content, % solids basis Tex-533-C 2.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 Dynamic shear, G*/sin S 64°C, I0 rad/s, kPa T 315 — — — — — Viscosity 140*F, poise 275*F poise T 202 T 202 700 — 7.0 I,300 — ; 8.0 1,500 — 8.0 2,000 — 10.0 Penetration 77°F, 100 g, 5 sec. T 49 120 — 8Q — I00 . I50 75 115 Ductility, 5cm/min., 39.2°F, cm T 51 70 — 60 — — ; — — — Elastic recovery, 50°F, % Tex-539-C — — — — 55 — 55 — Softening point, °F T 53 — — — — — — 120 Polymer separation, 48 hr. Tex-540-C None None None None Flash point, C.Q.C., OF T 48 425 — 425 — 425 — 425 — Tests on residue from Thin -Film Oven Test: Retained penetration ratio, 77°F T 179 T 49 — — — — ; 0.60 1.00 0.60 1.00 Tests on residue from RTFOT aging and pressure aging: Creep stiffness S, -18°C, MPa m-value, -18°C Tex-541-C and R28 T 313 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 300 0.300 — - C. Cutback Asphalt. Cutback asphalt must meet the requirements of Tables 4, 5, and 6 for the specified type and grade. If requested, supply samples of the base asphalt cement and polymer additives. Table 4 Rapid -Curing Cutback Asphalt Test Type —Grade RC-250 RC-800 RC-3000 Property Procedure Min Max Min , Max MIn , Max Kinematic viscosity, NOT cSt T 201 250 400 800 11,600 3 000 T 6 000 Water, % T 55 —,0.2 — 0.2 0.2 Flash point, T.O.C. °F T 79 80 80 80 ' Distillation test: T 78 ; Distillate, percentage by volume of total distillate to 680°F ; to 437°F 40 75 35 70 20 55 to 500°F 65 90 55 85 45 75 to 600°F 85 — 80 — 70 — Residue from distillation volume % 70 75 82 Tests on distillation residue: Penetration, 100 g, 5 sec., 77°F T 49 80 120 80 120 80 120 Ductility, 5 cm/min., 77°F, cm T 51 100 — 100 — 100 — Solubility in trichloroethylene, % T 44 99.0 ; — 99.0 ; — 99.0 Spot test Tex-509-C Neg. Neg. Neg. Table 5 Medium -Curing Cutback Asphalt Test TV rade MC-30 MC-250 MC-800 MC-3000 Property Procedure Min : Max Min : Max Min : Max Min ;Max Kinematic viscosity, I40°F, cSt T 201 30 - 60 250 - 500 800 11 600 3,000 :6.000 Water, % T 55 — ' 0.2 — 0.2 0.2 — 0.2 Flash point, T.O.C. °F T 79 100 ' — 150 ' — 150 ' — 150 — Distillation test: T 78 ' Distillate, percentage by volume of ; total distillate to 680"17 ; to 437°F — 25 — 10 — — — to 500°F 40 70 15 55 — 35 — 15 to 600°F 75 93 60 87 45 80 15 75 Residue from distillation volume % 50 — 67 — 75 — 80 Tests on distillation residue: Penetration, 100 g, 5 sec., 77°F T 49 120 :1 250 120 -250 120 250 120 ; 250 Ductility, 5 cm/min., 777, cm' T 51 100 : — 100 ; — 100 ; — I00 — Solubility in trichloroethylene, % T 44 99.0: — 99.0 — 99.0: — 99,0 ; Spot test Tex-509-C Neg. Neg. Ne . Neg. I. If the penetration of residue is more than 200 and the ductility at 77�F is less than 100 cm, the material is acceptable if its ductility at 60°F is more than 100 cm. Table 6 S ecial-Use Cutback Asphalt Test Type -Grade MC-2400L SCM 1 SCM 11 Property Procedure Min . Max Min Max Min Max Kinematic viscosity,140°F cSt T 201 2,400 4,800 500 1000 1 000 2,0� Water, % T 55 0.2 0.2 0.2 Flash point, T.O.C., °F T 79 150 ; - 175 ; - 175 ; - Distillation lost: T 78 ; Distillate, percentage by volume of total distillate to 680°F to 437°F - - - to S00°F - 35 - 0.5 - 0.5 to 600°F 35 80 20 60 15 50 Residue from distillation volume % 78 76 82 ' Tests on distillation residue: Polymer SBR - - Polymer content, % (solids basis) Tex-533-C 2.0 ; - - ; - - ; - Penetration, 100 g, 5 sec., 77°F T 49 150 300 180 - 180 ; - Ductility, 5 cm/min., 39.2°F, cm T Sl 50 - - - - - Solubility in trichloroeth lene, % I T 44 99.0 99.0 99.0 D. Emulsified Asphalt. Emulsified asphalt must be homogeneous, not separate after thorough mixing, and meet the requirements for the specified type and grade in Tables 7, 8, 9, and 10. a Table 7 Emulsified Asphalt Type —Grade Rapid Setting Medium -Setting Slow -Setting Property Test Procedure HFRS-2 MS-2 AES-300 SS-1 SS-1H Min Max Min; Max Min,- Max Min Max Min; Max Viscosity, Saybolt Furol T 72 77°F, sec. — — — — 75 ; 400 20 100 20 100 122°F, sec. 150 400 .100: 300 — — — — — — Sieve test, % T 59 — 0.1 — 0.1 — 0.1 — 0.1 — 0.1 Miscibility T 59 — — — Pass Pass Cement mixing, % T 59 — — — — — — — 2.0 — 2.0 Coating ability and water resistance: T 59 dry aggregate/after spray — — Good/Fair — — wet aggregate/after spray — — Fair/Fair — — Demulsibility, 35 ml of 0.02 N CaCI , % T 59 50 — — 30 — — — — — Storage stability, 1 da , % T 59 — 1 — 1 — I Freezing test, 3cycles' T 59 — Pass — Pass Pass Distillation test: T 59 Residue by distillation, % by wt. 65 — 65 ; — 65 — 60 — 60 — Oil distillate, % by volume of emulsion — 0.5 — 0.5 1 — 5 — 0.5 — 0.5 Tests on residue from distillation: Penetration, 77°F, 100 g, 5 sec. T 49 100 ; 140 120; 160 300 ; — 120 ; 160 70 100 Solubility in trichloroethylene, % T 44 97.5 ; — 97.5; 97.5 ; — 97.5 ; — 97.5 ; — Ductility, 77°F, 5 cm/min., cm T 51 100.1 — 100; — — 100 — 80 — Float test, 140°F, sec. T 50 1,200; — — 1,200: — — — — — I. Applies only when the Engineer designates material for winter use. Table 8 Cntinnie Rmsakii:nri Acnhsalt Type —Grade Property Test Ra id-Settin Medium -Setting Slow -Setting CRS-2 CRS-2H CMS-2 CMS-2S CSS-i CSS-IH Procedure Min: Max Min; Max Min: Max Min; Max Min; Max Min; Max Viscosity, Saybolt Furol T 72 77°F, sec. — — — — — — — — 20 ; 100 20 ; 100 122°F sec. 150: 400 150: 400 100: 300 100: 300 — — — — Sieve test % T 59 — 0.1 — 0.1 — 0.1 — 0.I — 0.1 0.1 Cement mixing, % T 59 — — — — — — — — — ' 2.0 — : 2.0 Coating ability and water resistance: T 59 dry aggregate/after spray — — Good/Fair Good/Fair — — wet aggregate/after spray — Fair/Fair Fair/Fair — Demulsibility, 35 ml of0.8%sodium T 59 ; dioctyl sulfosuccinate % 70 ; — 70 Storage stability, i day, % T 59 Particle charge T 59 Positive Positive Positive Positive Positive Positive Distillation test: T 59 : Residue by distillation, % by wt. 65 ; — 65 : — 65 : — 65 : — 60 60 ; — Oil distillate, % by volume of emulsion — 0.5 — 0.5 — 7 — 5 — 0.5 — 0.5 Tests on residue from distillation: Penetration, 77°F, 100 g, 5 sec. T 49 120: 160 70 110 120: 200 300, — 120: 160 70 : 110 Solubility in trichioroethylene, % T44 97.5; — 97.5: — 97.5: — 97.5; — 97.5; — 97.5; — Ductility, 77°F, 5 cm/min., cm I T 5I 100 : — 80 : — 100: — I — — l00 : — 80 : — M.... ...,µMS , .. ,.. ,,.,, ;w, Table 9 Pol trier -Modified Emulsified Asphalt Type —Grade Property Test Rapid -Setting Medium -Setting Slow-Settin RS-rP HFRS-2P AES-150P AES300P AES-300S SS-1P Procedure min: Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min —.Max Min Max Viscosity, Saybolt Furol T 72 , 77°F,sec. 75 400 75 400 75 400 30 100 122°F sec. 50 200 150 400 Sieve test % T 59 0.1 — 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Miscibility T 59 — — — — — Pass Coating ability and water resistance: T 59 dry aggregate/after spray — — Good/Fair Good/Fair Crood/Fair — wet a te/after Fair/Fair FaidFair Fair/Fair Demulsibilitv. 35 mt of 0.02 N CaC12, % T 59 60 50 Storage stability, I day, % T 59 — — Breaking index Tex-542-C — i 80 — — Distillation test:'T 59 Residue by distillation, % by wt. 65 — 65 — 65 — 65 — 65 — 60 Oil distillate, % ty volume ofemulsion — 3 0.5 — 3 5 7 0.5 Tests on residue from distillation: Polymer content, wt. % (solids basis) Tex-533-C — — 3.0 — — — — — — — 3.0 — Penetration, 77°F, 100 g, 5 sec. T 49 225 ! 300 90 140 150 300 300 — 300 — 100 140 Solubility in trichloroethylene, % T 44 97.0 ; — 97.0 — 97.0 ; — 97.0 ; — 97.0 ; — 97.0 ; — Viscosity,140°F, poise T 202 — — 1,500 ; — — ; — — — — — 1,300 ; — Float test, 140°F, sec. T 50 — — 1,200 — 1,200 ; — 1,200 ; — 1,200 ; — — — Ductilit?, 39.2°F, 5 cmfram., cm T S I — — 50 — — — — _ _ — S0 _ Elastic recov 50°F. % Tex-539-C 55 — 55 ; Tests on RTFO curing ofdistiilation residue Tex-541 C 1 Elastic reco 50°F % Tcx-539 C 50 50 30 ... �N,,,,,, W , .,7. a,,,,a r,� rcmperamre an «te lower tnermometer slowly to 35u-r ttu" 1% Maintain at this temperature for 20 min. Complete total distillation in 60 t5 rain. from the first application of heat. 2. HFRS-2P must meet one of either the ductility or elastic recovery requirements. Table 10 Polymer -Modified Cationic Emulsified Asphalt Type -Grade Test Rapid -Setting Slow - Setting Property Procedure CRS-IP CRS-2P CSS-IP Min: Max Min ; Max Min ; Max Viscosity, Saybolt Furol T 72 ' 20 100 770F, sec. — — — — 122°F, sec. 50 150 150 400 --- Sieve test, % T 59 — 0.1 — 0.1 — 0.1 Demulsibility, 35 ml of 0.8% sodium T 59 60 — 70 — — — ' dioct I sulfosuccinate, % storage stability, I da , % T 59 — I — i — 1 Breaking index, S Tex-542-C — ; 80 — — — — Particle charge T 59 Positive Positive Positive Distillation test: T 59 ' Residue by distillation, % by weight 65 — 65 — 62 — Oil distillate, %by volume of — 3 — 0.5 — 0.5 emulsion Tests on residue from distillation: ; Polymer content, wt. % (solids Tex-533-C — ; — 3.0 ; — 3.0 — basis) Penetration, 77°F, 100 g, 5 sec. T 49 225 ; 300 90 150 55 ; 90 Viscosity, 140°F, poise T 202 — — 1,300, — — — Solubility in trichiotoethylene, % T 44 97.0 ; — 97.0 ; — 97.0 — 135 — Softening point, °F T 53 — ; Ductility, 77°F, 5 cm/min., cm T 51 — — — — 70 — Ductility", 39.2°F, 5 cm/min., cm T 51 — — 50 — — — Elastic recovery', 50°F, % Tex-539-C 1 45 — 55 1. Exception to T 59: Bring the temperature on the lower thermometer slowly to s3u-1, *U-r. Maintain at this temperature for 20 min. Complete total distillation in 60 +5 min. from the first application of heat. 2. CRS-2P must meet one of either the ductility or elastic recovery requirements. E. Specialty Emulsions. Specialty emulsions may be either asphalt -based or resin -based and must meet the requirements of Table 11. Table 11 Specialty Emulsions T "rade Medium -Setting Slow - settin Property Test AE—P EAP&T PCE Procedure Min -Max Min, Max Min N1ax Viscosity. Saybott Furol T 72 77°F.see. — — — — 10 100 122°F.sec. 15 ' I50 — — — — Sieve test % T 59 — ' 0.1 — 0.1 — 0.1 Miscibilit T 59 Pass ; Pass ; Dermilsibility, 35 call of 0.10 N CaC12, % T 59 — 70 — — Storage stability, i day, % T 59 , 1 — I — — Particle size', % by volume < 2.5 pro Tex- 238-F — — 90 ' — 90 . — Asphalt emulsion distillation to 500°F followed ; by Cutback asphalt distillation of residue to T 59 & T 78 ' 680°F: Residue alter both distillations, % by wt. 40 — — — — — Total oil distillate from both distillations, % by 25 40 — — — — volume of emulsion Residue §1 distillation % by wt. T 59 — — 60 — Residue by evaporation, % by wt. T 59 — — — — 60 ' Tests on residue oiler all distillation(s): ' Viscosity, 140°F, poise T 202 — — 800 ; — — — Kinematic viscosityr,140°F, cSt T 201 — ; — — — 100 ; 350 Flash point C.O.C., °F T 48 — — — — 400 ; — Solubility in trichloroethylene, % T 44 97.5 — — — —. — Float test 122°F see. I T 50 1 50 200 — — 1. Supply with each shipment of PCE: a) a copy of a lab report from an approved analytical lab, signed by a lab official, indicating the PCE formulation does not meet any characteristics of a Resource Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA) hazardous waste; b) a certification from the producer that the formulation supplied does not differ from the one tested and that no listed RCRA hazardous wastes or PCBs have been mixed with the product; and c) a Material Safety Data Shect. 2. Exception to T 59: In dilution, use 350 m1 of distilled or deionized water and a 1,000-ml beaker. 3. Use Tex-238-F, beginning at "Particle Size Analysis by Laser Diffraction," with distilled or deionized water as a medium and no dispersant, or use another approved method. 4. Exception to T 59: Leave sample in the oven until foaming ceases, then cool and weigh. 5. PCE must meet either the kinematic viscosity requirement or the particle size requirement. F. Recycling Agent. Recycling agent and emulsified recycling agent must meet the requirements in Table 12. Additionally, recycling agent and residue from emulsified recycling agent, when added in the specified proportions to the recycled asphalt, must meet the properties specified on the plans. ___ Table 12 Reevclinsa Aizent and Emulsified Recycling Agent Recycling Emulsified Test Agent Recycling Property Age nt Procedure Min Ma Min Ma x x Viscosity, Saybolt Furol, 77°F, T 72 — — 15 100 sec. Sieve test, % T 59 — — — 0.1 MiscibilityT 59 — No coagulation Residue by evaporation, % by T 59 — — 60 — wt. Tests on recycling agent or residue from evaporation: Flash point, C.O.C., °F T 48 400 — 400 — Kinematic viscosity, T 201 1400F,cSt 75 200 75 200 2750F,cSt ; 10.0 10.0 1. Exception to T 59: Use 0.02 N CaC12 solution in place of water. 2. Exception to T 59: Maintain sample at 300OF until foaming ceases, then cool and weigh. G. Crumb Rubber Modifier. Crumb rubber modifier (CRM) consists of automobile and truck tires processed by ambient temperature grinding. CRM must be: • free from contaminants including fabric, metal, and mineral and other nonrubber substances; • free -flowing; and • nonfoaming when added to hot asphalt binder. When tested in accordance with Tex-200-F, Part 1, using a 50-g sample, the rubber gradation must meet the requirements of the grades in Table 13. Table 13 f RM f_rnrlatinnc Sieve Size Grade A Grade B Grade C Grade D Grade E Passing) Min Max Min Max Min Max As shown on the plans As approved #8 100 — — — — — #10 95 100 100 — — — #16 — — 70 100 100 — #30 — — 25 60 90 100 #40 — — — — 45 100 #50 0 10 1 — — — — #200 - - 1 0 5 — — r. H. Crack Sealer. Polymer modified asphalt -emulsion crack sealer must meet the requirements of Table 14. Rubber -asphalt crack sealer must meet the requirements of Table 15. Table 14 Pnivmar-Mnrltrtad Aenhalt F.mnletnn t'rnrk .Ciealer Property Test Procedure Min I Max Rotational viscosity, 77°F, cP D 2196, Method A 10,000 25,000 Sieve test, % T 59 — 0.1 Storage stability, 1 day, % T 59 — 1 Evaporation Tex-543-C Residue by evaporation, % by wt. 65 — Tests on residue from evaporation: Penetration, 77°F, 100 g, 5 sec. T 49 35 75 Softening point, OF T 53 140 — Ductility, 39.2°F, 5 cm/min., can T 51 100 — Table 15 Rubber -Asphalt Crack Sealer Property Test Class A Class B Procedu Min Ma Min Ma re x x CRM content, Grade A or B, % Tex-544- 22 26 — — by wt. C CRM content, Grade B, % by wt. Tex-544- — — 13 17 C Virgin rubber content, % by wt. — — 2 — Flash poine, COC, IF T 48 400 — 400 — Penetration3, 77°F, 150 g, 5 sec. T 49 30 50 30 50 Penetration, 32°F, 200 g, 60 sec. T 49 12 — 12 — Softenine point. IF T 53 — — 170 — 1. Provide certitication that the min, % virgin rubber was aadeo. 2. Before passing the test flame over the cup, agitate the sealing compound with a 3/8- to 1/2-in. (9.5- to 12.7-mm) wide, square -end metal spatula in a manner so as to bring the material on the bottom of the cup to the surface, i.e., turn the material over. Start at one side of the thermometer, move around to the other, and then return to the starting point using 8 to 10 rapid circular strokes. Accomplish agitation in 3 to 4 sec. Pass the test flame over the cup immediately after stirring is completed. 3. Exception to T 49: Substitute the cone specified in ASTM D 217 for the penetration needle. 4. No crack in the crack scaling materials or break in the bond between the sealer and the mortar blocks over 1/4 in. deep for any specimen after completion of the test. I. Asphalt -Rubber Binders. Asphalt -rubber (A-R) binders are mixtures of asphalt binder and CRM, which have been reacted at elevated temperatures. The A-R binders meet D 6114 and contain a minimum of 15% CRM by weight. Types I or 11, containing CRM Grade C, are used 3 for hot mixed aggregate mixtures. Types 11 or III, containing CRM Grade B, are used for surface treatment binder. Table 16 describes required binder properties. Table 16 A-R Binders Binder Type Property Test T e I_ Tyke 11 Type III Procedure Min I Max Min Max Min Max Apparent viscosity, 347°F, eP D 2196, Method A 1,500 5,000 1,500 5,000 1,500 5,000 Penetration, 77°F, 100 g, 5 sec. T 49 25 75 25 75 50 100 Penetration, 39.2°F, 200 g, T 49 10 — 15 — 25 — 60 sec. Softening point, °F T 53 135 — 130 — 125 — Resilience, 77°F, % D 5329 25 — 20 — 10 — Flash point, C.O.C., °F T 48 450 — 450 — 450 — Tests on residue from Thin -Film T 179 Oven Test: Retained penetration ratio, 39.2°F, 200 g, 60 sec., % of T 49 75 — 75 — 75 — original J. Performance -Graded Binders. PG binders must be smooth and homogeneous, show no separation when tested in accordance with Tex-540-C, and meet Table 17 requirements. Separation testing is not required if. • a modifier is introduced separately at the mix plant either by injection in the asphalt line or mixer, • the binder is blended on site in continuously agitated tanks, or • binder acceptance is based on field samples taken from an in -line sampling port at the hot mix plant after the addition of modifiers. Table 17 Dnrfnnmonna_(-`rntlatl Rinttare Property and Test Method Performance Grade PG 58 PG 64 PG 70 PG 76 PG 82 .22 1 -28 1 -34 -16 1 .22 -28 -34 -16 -22 1 -28 -34 -16 -22 1 .28 -34 -16 -22 28 Average 7-day mnx pavement design temperature, .CI < 58 < 64 < 70 < 76 < 82 Min pavement design temerature °CI >722 >-28 3-34 1 >-16 1 >-22 1 >-28 3-34 >-16 >•22 >-28 >-34 >-l6 >-22 >.28 >-34 ORIGINAL BINDER Flush point. T 48 Min °C 230 Viscosity, T M Max 3.0 Pa-s test tem erature, °C 135 Dynamic shear, T 31 G°/siu(8), Min,1.00 kPa Test temperature @ 10 rad/sec.. °C 58 64 70 76 82 Elastic recovery, D 6084, 50°F % Min — 30 — — 30 50 — 30 50 60 30 50 60 70 50 60 70 ROLLING THIN-FILM OVEN Tex-54I-C Mass loss Tex-54I-C Max, % 1.0 Dynamic shear, T 315: G°lsin(S), Min, 2.20 kPa Test temperature (a 10 md/sec. °C 58 64 70 76 82 PRESSURE AGING VESSEL PAY RESIDUE R 28 PAV aging temperature, T1t)0 uynamic snear, -► .S LI: LJ LL I7 Lb LJ LL IV LO LJ LA J 7 Lo <.I L< G°lsin(S), Max, 5000 kPa Test temperature r+ 10 mdlsec., °C Table 17 Property and Test Method — _ Performance Grade PG 58 PG 64 PG 70 PG 76 PG 82 -22 -28 -34 .16 -22 •28 -34 -16 -22 -28 -34 -16 -22 .28 -34 -16 -22 -28 Average 7 day max pavement design temperature < 58 < 64 < 70 < 76 < 82 Min pavement -deli rem ture °C >-22 >-28 >-34 >-16 >•22 >-28 >-34 >-16 >-22 >-28 >•34 >-16 >-22 >-28 >•34 >-16 > 22 > 28 S, max, 300 MPa 12 18 24 12 18 24 12 18 24 12 18 24 12 18 in -value, min, 0.300 Test temperature Qa 60 sec., °C Direct tension, T 314. - - -6 - - - -6 - - -6 - - -6 - Failure strain, min,1.0% 12 18 24 12 l8 24 12 18 24 12 18 24 12 18 Test temperature (a') 1.0 min/min., °C I. Pavement temperatures are estimated from air temperatures using an algorithm contained in a Department -supplied computer program, may be provided by the Department, or by following the procedures outlined in AASHTO MP 2 and PP 28. 2. This requirement may be waived at the Department's discretion if the supplier warrants that the asphalt binder can be adequately pumped, mixed, and compacted at temperatures that meet all applicable safety, environmental, and constructability requirements. At test temperatures where the binder is a Newtonian fluid, any suitable standard means of viscosity measurement may be used, including capillary (T 201 or T 202) or rotational viscometry (T 316). 3. Viscosity at 135°C is an indicator of mixing and compaction temperatures that can be expected in the tab and field. High values may indicate high mixing and compaction temperatures. Additionally, significant variation can occur from batch to batch. Contractors should be aware that variation could significantly impact their mixing and compaction operations. Contractors are therefore responsible for addressing any constructability issues that may arise. 4. For quality control of unmodified asphalt binder production, measurement of the viscosity of the original asphalt binder may be substituted for dynamic shear measurements of G°/sin(S) at test temperatures where the asphalt is a Newtonian fluid. Any suitable standard means of viscosity measurement may be used, including capillary (T 201 or T 202) or rotational viscometry (T 316). 5. Silicone beam molds, as described in AASHTO TP 1-93, are acceptable for use. 6, if creep stiffness is below 300 MPa, direct tension test is not required. Ifcreep stiffness is between 300 and 600 MPa, the direct tension failure strain requirement can be used instead of the creep stiffness requirement. The m-value requirement must be satisfied in both cases. r 300.3. Equipment. Provide all equipment necessary to transport, store, sample, heat, apply, and incorporate asphalts, oils, and emulsions. 300.4. Construction. A. Typical Material Use. Table 18 shows typical materials used for specific applications. These are typical uses only. Circumstances may require use of other material. Table 18 Tvnieal Material Use Material Application Typically Used Materials Hot -mixed hol-laid asphalt mixtures PG binders A-R binders Types 1 and it Surface treatment AC-5, AC-10, AC-5 w/2% SBR, AC-10,6v/2% SBR, AC-15P, AC-20-5TR, HFRS-2, MS-2, CRS-2, CRS-21i, HFRS-2P, CRS-2P A-R binders Types It and III Surface treatment (cool weather) RS-IP, CRS-1 P, RC-250, RC-800, RC-3000, MC-250, MC-800, MC-3000 MC-2400L Precoatin AC-5, AC-10 PG 64-22, SS-1 SS-IH, CSS-1, CSS-IH Tack coat PGBinders SS-1H CSS-IH EAP&T Fog seal SS-1 SS-IH CSS-1 CSS-IH Hot -mixed cold -laid asphalt mixtures AC-0.6 AC-1.5 AC-3 AES-300 AES-300P, CMS-2, CMS-2S Patching mix MC-800 SCM 1, SCM It, AES-300S Recycling AC-0.6, AC-1.5, AC-3, AES-1501', AES-300P, recycling agent, emulsified recycling agent Crack sealing SS -I P, polymer mod AE crack sealant, rubber asphalt crack scalers Class Class B Microsurfacin CSs-i P Prime MC-30 AE-P. EAP&T PCE Curing membrane SS-1. SS-1 H CSS-i CSS-I H. PCE Erosion control I SS- I.SS- IH CSS-I CSS-IH PCE B. Storage and Application Temperatures. Use storage and application temperatures in accordance with Table 19. Store and apply materials at the lowest temperature yielding satisfactory results. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for any agitation requirements in storage. Manufacturer's instructions regarding recommended application and storage temperatures supercede those of Table 19. Table 19 Storage and Annlication Temneratures Application Storage Recommended Maximum Type —Grade Maximum Range, °F Allowable (OF) F AC-0.6, AC-1.5, AC-3 200-300 350 350 AC-5, AC-10 275-350 350 350 AC-5 w/2% SBR, AC-10 w/2% SBR, 300-375 375 360 AC- 15P, AC-20-5TR RC-250 125-180 200 200 RC-800 170-230 260 260 RC-3000 215-275 285 285 MC-30, AE-P 70-150 175 175 MC-250 125-210 240 240 MC-800, SCM 1, SCM 11 175-260 275 275 MC-3000, MC-2400L 225-275 290 290 HFRS-2, MS-2, CRS-2, CRS-2H, HFRS-2P, CRS-2P, CMS-2, CMS-2S, 120-160 180 180 AES-300, AES-300S, AES-150P, AES-300P SS-1, SS- IH, CSS-1, CSS-IH, PCE, EAP&T, SS- 1P, RS-IP, CRS-IP, CSS-1 P, recycling agent, emulsified 50-130 140 140 recycling agent, polymer mod AE crack sealant PG binders 275-350 350 350 Rubber asphalt crack sealers (Class A, I Class B) 350-375 400 - A-K binders Types 1, 11, and 111 325-425 425 425 300.5. Measurement and Payment. The work performed, materials furnished, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals will not be measured or paid for directly, but is subsidiary or is included in payment for other bid Items. ITEM 401 FLOWABLE BACKFILL 401.1. Description. Furnish and place flowable backfill for trench, hole, or other void. 401.2. Materials. A. Cement. Furnish cement conforming to DMS-4600, "Hydraulic Cement." B. Fly Ash. Furnish fly ash conforming to DMS-4610, "Fly Ash." C. Chemical Admixtures. Furnish chemical admixtures conforming to DMS-4640, "Chemical Admixtures for Concrete." D. Fine Aggregate. Provide fine aggregate that will stay in suspension in the mortar to the extent required for proper flow and that meets the gradation requirements of Table 1. Table 1 Aggregate Gradation Chart Sieve Size Percent Passing 3/4 in. 100 No. 200 0-30 Test fine aggregate gradation in accordance with Tex-401-A. Plasticity Index (PI) must not exceed 6 when tested in accordance with Tex- 106-A. E. Mixing Water. Use mixing water conforming to the requirements of Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete." 401.3. Construction. Submit a construction method and plan, including mix design and shrinkage characteristics of the mix, for approval. Provide a means of filling the entire void area, and be able to demonstrate that this has been accomplished. Prevent the movement of any inserted structure from its designated location. If voids are found in the fill or if any of the requirements are not met as shown on the plans, remove and replace or correct the problem without additional cost to the Department. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, furnish a mix meeting the requirements of Sections 401.3.A, "Strength," and 401.3.13, "Consistency." A. Strength. The 28-day compressive strength range, when tested in accordance with Tex-418-A, must be between 80 psi and 150 psi unless otherwise directed. Two specimens are required for a strength test, and the compressive strength is defined as the average of the breaking strength of the 2 cylinders. B. Consistency. Design the mix to be placed without consolidation and to fill all intended voids. Fill an open-ended, 3-in.-diameter-by-6-in.-high cylinder to the top to test the consistency. Immediately pull the cylinder straight up. The correct consistency of the mix must produce a minimum 8-in.-diameter circular spread with no segregation. When necessary, use specialty type admixtures to enhance the flowability, reduce shrinkage, and reduce segregation by maintaining solids in suspension. All admixtures must be used and proportioned in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. r' Mix the flowable fill using a central -mixed concrete plant, ready -mix concrete truck, pug mill, or other approved method. Furnish all labor, equipment, tools, containers, and molds required for sampling, making, transporting, .3 curing, removal, and disposal of test specimens. Furnish test molds meeting the requirements of Tex-447-A. Transport, strip, and cure the test specimens as scheduled at the designated location. Cure test specimens in accordance with Tex-447-A. The Engineer will sample, make, and test all specimens. Dispose of used, broken specimens in an approved location and manner. The frequency of job control testing will be at the direction of the Engineer. q Item 401 - 1 i 401.4. Measurement. This Item will be measured by the cubic yard of material placed. Measurement will not include additional volume caused by slips, slides, or cave-ins resulting from the Contractor's operations. 401.5. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Flowable Backfll." This price is full compensation for furnishing, hauling, and placing materials and for equipment, tools, labor, and incidentals. Item 401 - 2 ITEM 416 DRILLED SHAFT FOUNDATIONS 416.1. Description. Construct foundations consisting of reinforced or non -reinforced concrete drilled shafts with or without bell footings. 416.2. Materials. Use materials that meet the requirements of the following Items: • Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete" • Item 440, "Reinforcing Steel' • Item 448, "Structural Field Welding" Unless otherwise shown on the plans, use concrete for drilled shafts that meets the requirements of Table 1. Table 1 Concrete for Drilled Shafts Drilled Shaft Type Concrete Non -reinforced Class A Reinforced Class C Slurry and underwater concrete placement Class SS Use coarse aggregate Grade 4, 5, or 6 for drilled shaft concrete in reinforced drilled shafts. Grade 2 or 3 may be used if the shaft is dry and reinforcing steel has a 5-in. minimum clear spacing. Use a water -reducing, retarding admixture in accordance with DMS-4640, "Chemical Admixtures for Concrete," in all concrete when using casing that will be pulled or when placing shafts underwater or under slurry. Use concrete with slump that meets the requirements of Table 2 as determined by Tex-415-A. Table 2 Slump Requirements Minimum Recommended Maximum Placement Type Acceptable Design and Acceptable Placement Placement Placement Slump, in. Slump, in. Slump, in. Dry 5-1/2 6-1/2 7-1/2 Underwater and 7 8 9 under slurry When casing is to be pulled or when concrete is to be placed underwater or under slurry, perform a slump loss test in accordance with Tex-430-A before beginning work. Provide concrete that will maintain a slump of at least 4 in. throughout the entire anticipated time of concrete placement. Time of concrete placement is described in Sections 416.3.17, "Concrete," and 416.3.G, "Additional Requirements for Slurry Displacement or Underwater Concrete Placement Methods." Note the temperature of the concrete mix at the beginning of the slump loss test. If concrete temperature at the time of placement into the drilled shaft is more than 10' higher than the slump loss test temperature, do not place the concrete. Use ice or other concrete cooling ingredients to lower concrete temperature, or run additional slump loss tests at the higher temperatures. Slump loss testing will be waived if anticipated time of concrete placement is less than 90 minutes. Use drilling slurry that meets the requirements of Table 3, as determined by Tex- 130-E. Table 3 Slurry Requirements Before Introduction Sampled from the Bottom of the into the Excavation Excavation before Concreting Specific Sand Specific Viscosity Sand Gravity Content Gravity (seconds) Content <1.10 <1% <1.15 <45 <6% Item 416 - 1 Use mineral slurry consisting of processed bentonite or attapulgite clays mixed with clean fresh water. Do not use PHPA (partially hydrolized polyacrylamide) polymeric slurry or any other fluid composed primarily of a polymer-' solution. , Before placing concrete, sample slurry from the bottom of the hole, and test it in accordance with Tex-130-E. Use a pump or air lift to remove slurry that does not meet the requirements of Table 3 while adding fresh clean slurry to the top of the hole to maintain the slurry level. Continue this operation until the slurry sampled from the bottom of the hole meets the requirements. 416.3. Construction. Place the shaft to within the following tolerances. • Vertical plumbness — 1 in. per 10 ft. of depth. • Center of shaft located under column — 1 in. of horizontal plan position. • Center of shaft located under footing — 3 in. of horizontal plan position. Complete the embankment at bridge ends before installing drilled shafts that pass through the fill. Refer to Item 423, "Retaining Walls," for provisions for drilled shafts passing through the structural volume of retaining walls. A. Excavation. The plans indicate the expected depths and elevations for encountering satisfactory bearing material. Excavate as required for the shafts and bell footings through all materials encountered to the dimensions and elevations shown on the plans or required by the site conditions. Removal of man-made obstructions not shown on the plans will be paid for in accordance with Article 9.4, "Payment for Extra Work." If satisfactory founding material is not encountered at plan elevation, adjust the bottom of the shaft or alter the foundation, as determined by the Engineer, to satisfactorily comply with design requirements. Blasting is not allowed for excavations. If caving conditions are encountered, stop drilling and adopt a construction method that stabilizes the shaft walls. Do not excavate a shaft within 2 shaft diameters (clear) of an open shaft excavation, or one in which concrete has been placed in the preceding 24 hours. Dispose of material excavated from shafts and bells and not incorporated into the finished project. Dispose of excavated material in accordance with the plans and with federal, state, and local laws. Provide suitable access, lighting, and equipment for proper inspection of the completed excavation and for checking the dimensions and alignment of shafts and bell excavation., B. Core Holes. If directed, take cores to determine the character of the supporting materials. Use a method that will result in recovery of an intact sample adequate for judging the character of the founding material. Such cores should be at least 5 ft. deeper than the proposed founding grade or a depth equal to the diameter of the shaft, whichever is greater. Take these cores when the excavation is approximately complete. C. Casing. Use casing when necessary to prevent caving of the material or to exclude ground water. Provide casing with an outside diameter not less than the specified diameter of the shaft. Use casing strong enough to withstand handling stresses and pressures of concrete and of the surrounding earth or water, and that is watertight, smooth, clean, and free of accumulations of hardened concrete. Drill the portion of the shaft below the casing as close as possible to the specified shaft diameter. The portion of shaft below the casing may be as much as 2 in. smaller than the specified shaft diameter. Use construction methods that result in a minimal amount of disturbed soil being trapped outside the casing. This does not apply to temporary undersized casings used to protect workers inside shafts or to drilled shafts designed for point bearing only. Do not leave any casing in place unless authorized or shown on the plans. Do not extract casing until after placing the concrete to an appropriate level. Maintain sufficient concrete in the casing at all times to counteract soil and water pressure. Before and during concrete placement, rotate or move the casing up or down a few inches if necessary to facilitate extraction of the casing. D. Requirements for Slurry Displacement Method. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the slurry displacement method may be used to construct drilled shafts. Use this method to support the sides of the excavation with processed mineral slurry that is then displaced by concrete to form a continuous concrete shaft. Do not use casing other than surface casing. Do not use surface casing longer than 20 ft. without approval. Do not extract the surface casing until after placing the concrete. Item 416 - 2 f� For slurry mixed at the project site, pre -mix it in a reservoir of sufficient capacity to fill the excavation and for 4 recovery of the slurry during concrete placement. Do not mix slurry in the shaft excavation or other hole. Allow adequate time for hydration of the slurry prior to introduction into the excavation. During and after drilling maintain a head of slurry in the shaft excavation at or near ground level or higher as necessary to counteract ground water pressure. Just before placing reinforcing steel, use an air lift or proper size cleanout bucket to remove any material that may have fallen from the sides of the excavation or accumulated on the bottom after the completion of drilling. Use a cleanout bucket if material is too large to be picked up with an air lift. If concrete placement is not started within 4 hours of the completion of the shaft excavation, reprocess the hole with the auger as directed. Then clean the bottom with an air lift or cleanout bucket, and check the slurry at the bottom of the hole for compliance with the slurry requirements of Article 416.2, "Materials." If the slurry forms a gel before concrete placement, agitate the congealed slurry to liquefaction just before concrete placement and whenever directed. Recover and dispose of all slurry as approved by the Engineer, and in accordance with all federal, state, and local laws. Do not discharge slurry into or in close proximity to streams or other bodies of water. E. Reinforcing Steel. Completely assemble the cage of reinforcing steel, and place it as a unit immediately before concrete placement. The cage consists of longitudinal bars and lateral reinforcement (spiral reinforcement, lateral ties, or horizontal bands). If overhead obstacles prevent placement of the cage as a single unit, connect individual segments with couplers or by lapping steel as approved. If the shaft is lengthened beyond plan length, extend the reinforcing steel cage as follows, unless directed otherwise: • For shafts supporting structures other than bridges, extend the cage to the bottom. • For bridge shafts with plan lengths of less than 25 ft., extend the cage to 25 ft. or to the bottom, whichever is shorter. • For bridge shafts with plan lengths at least 25 ft. that are lengthened less than 33% of plan length, extending the cage is not necessary. • For bridge shafts with plan lengths at least 25 ft. that are lengthened more than 33% of plan length, extend the cage as directed. If the cage does not reach the bottom of the shaft, it may be suspended, or a portion of the longitudinal steel may be extended to support the cage on the bottom of the shaft. Bars used to extend or support the cage may be lap spliced or welded by a qualified welder. Place the extension at the bottom of the shaft. If using spiral reinforcement, tie it to the longitudinal bars at a spacing of at most 24 in., or as required for a stable cage. Do not weld lateral reinforcement to longitudinal bars unless otherwise shown on the plans. Center the reinforcing steel cage in the excavation using approved centering devices. Use enough devices to hold the cage in position along its entire length. Do not use square concrete spacer blocks in cased shafts. Support or hold down the cage to control vertical displacement during concrete placement or extraction of the casing. Use support that is concentric with the cage to prevent racking and distortion of the steel. Check the elevation of the top of the steel cage before and after concrete placement or after casing extraction when casing is used. Downward movement of the steel up to 6 in. per 20 ft. of shaft length and upward movement of the steel up to 6 in. total are acceptable. Maintain the minimum length of steel required for lap with column steel. Use dowel bars if the proper lap length is provided both into the shaft and into the column. Locate and tie all dowel bars into the cage before placing concrete or insert dowel bars into fresh, workable concrete. Locate and tie anchor bolts when required prior to placement of concrete. Use templates or other devices to assure accurate placement of anchor bolts. F. Concrete. Perform all work in accordance with requirements of Item 420, "Concrete Structures." Mass concrete placement requirements do not apply to drilled shafts. Form portions of drilled shaft that project above natural ground. Remove loose material and accumulated seep water from the bottom of the excavation before placing concrete. If water cannot be removed, place concrete using underwater placement methods. Item 416 - 3 Place concrete as soon as possible after all excavation is complete and reinforcing steel is placed. Provide workable concrete that does not require vibrating or rodding. Vibrate formed portions of drilled shafts. Place concrete continuously for the entire length of the shaft. For dry shafts of 24 in. or smaller diameter, limit free fall of concrete to 25 ft. Use a suitable tube or tremie to prevent segregation of materials. Use a tube or tremie in sections to provide proper discharge and to permit raising as the placement progresses. For dry shafts over 24 in. diameter, concrete can be allowed to free fall an unlimited distance if it does not strike the reinforcing cage or sides of the hole during placement. When free fall is used, provide a hopper with a minimum 3-ft.-long drop tube at the top of the shaft to direct concrete vertically down the center of the shaft. Do not use a shovel or other means to simply deflect the concrete discharge from the truck. For cased shafts, maintain a sufficient head of concrete at all times above the bottom of the casing to overcome hydrostatic pressure. Extract casing at a slow, uniform rate with the pull in line with the axis of the shaft. Monitor the concrete level in the casing during extraction. Stop the extraction and add concrete to the casing as required to ensure a completely full hole upon casing removal. The elapsed time from the mixing of the first concrete placed into the cased portion of the shaft until the completion of extraction of the casing must not exceed the time for which the concrete maintains a slump of over 4 in. in accordance with Article 416.2, "Materials." If the elapsed time is exceeded, modify the concrete mix, the construction procedures, or both for subsequent shafts. Cure the top surface and treat any construction joint area in accordance with Item 420, "Concrete Structures." G. Additional Requirements for Slurry Displacement or Underwater Concrete Placement Methods. Place concrete on the same day that the shaft is excavated and as soon as possible after all excavation is complete and reinforcing steel is placed. Use an air lift or cleanout bucket of the proper size to clean the bottom of the excavation prior to placing the reinforcing steel cage and concrete. Place concrete through a closed tremie or pump it to the bottom of the excavation. Initially seal the tremie or pump line to positively separate the concrete from the slurry or water. Place concrete continuously from the beginning of placement until the shaft is completed. If using a tremie, keep it full of concrete and well submerged in the previously placed concrete at all times. Raise the tremie as necessary to maintain the free flow of concrete and the stability of any casing used. If using a pump, keep the discharge tube submerged in the previously placed concrete at all times. Place additional concrete to ensure the removal of any contaminated concrete at the top of the shaft. At the completion of the pour, allow the top portion of concrete to flush completely from the hole until there is no evidence of slurry or water contamination. Do not attempt to remove this concrete with shovels, pumps or other means. Level the top of shaft with hand tools as necessary. Use a sump or other approved method to channel displaced fluid and concrete away from the shaft excavation. Recover slurry and dispose of it as approved. Do not discharge displaced fluids into or in close proximity to streams or other bodies of water. For pours over water, provide a collar or other means of capturing slurry and the top portion of concrete flushed from the shaft. If concrete placement is interrupted due to withdrawal of the submerged end of the tremie or pump discharge tube before completion, remove the tube, reseal it at the bottom, penetrate with the tube into the concrete already placed by at least 5 ft., and recharge it before continuing. The elapsed time from the mixing of the first concrete placed until the completion of concrete placement, including extraction of the casing, must not exceed the time for which the concrete maintains a slump of over 4 in. in accordance with Article 416.2, "Materials." If the elapsed time is exceeded, modify the concrete mix, the construction procedures, or both for subsequent shafts. H. Test Load. If required, test load shafts in accordance with Item 405, "Foundation Test Load." Item 416 - 4 ITEM 421 HYDRAULIC CEMENT CONCRETE 421.1. Description. Furnish hydraulic cement concrete for concrete pavements, concrete structures, and other concrete construction. 421.2. Materials. A. Cement. Furnish cement conforming to DMS-4600, "Hydraulic Cement." B. Supplementary Cementing Materials (SCM). 1. Fly Ash. Furnish fly ash conforming to DMS-4610, "Fly Ash." 2. Ultra -Fine Fly Ash (UFFA). Furnish UFFA conforming to DMS-4610, "Fly Ash." 3. Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag (GGBFS). Furnish GGBFS conforming to DMS-4620, "Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag," Grade 100 or 120. 4. Silica Fume. Furnish silica fume conforming to DMS-4630, "Silica Fume." 5. Metakaolin. Furnish metakaolin conforming to DMS-4635, "Metakaolin." C. Chemical Admixtures. Furnish admixtures conforming to DMS-4640, "Chemical Admixtures for Concrete." Do not use calcium chloride. D. Water. Furnish mixing and curing water that is free from oils, acids, organic matter, or other deleterious substances. Water from municipal supplies approved by the Texas Department of Health will not require testing. When using water from other sources, provide test reports showing compliance with Table 1 before use. Water that is a blend of concrete wash water and other acceptable water sources, certified by the concrete producer as complying with the requirements of both Table 1 and Table 2, may be used as mix water. Test the blended water weekly for 4 weeks for compliance with Table 1 and Table 2 or provide previous test results. Then test every month for compliance. Provide water test results upon request. Table 1 Chemical Limits for Mix Water Maximum Contaminant Test Method Concentration ( m) Chloride (C1) ASTM D 512 Prestressed concrete 500 Bridge decks & superstructure 500 All other concrete 1,000 Sulfate SO4) ASTM D 516 1,000 Alkalies (Na2O + 0.658K20) ASTM D 4191 & 600 ASTM D 4192 Total solids AASHTO T 26 50,000 Table 2 Aceentance. Criteria far nnestiannhle Water Cunnlies Property Test Method Limits Compressive strength, min % control at 7 days ASTM C 1091 90 Time of set, deviation from control, ASTM C 1911 from 60 early Min. to 90 later 1. Base comparisons on Mixed proportions and the same volume of test water compared to the control mix using city water or distilled water. Item 421 - 1 Do not use mix water that has an adverse effect on the air -entraining agent, on any other chemical admixture, or on strength or time of set of the concrete. When using white hydraulic cement, use mixing and curing water free of iron and other impurities that may cause staining or discoloration., E. Aggregate. Supply aggregates that meet the definitions in Tex-100-E. Provide coarse and fine aggregates from sources listed in the Department's Concrete Rated Source Quality Catalog (CRSQC). Provide aggregate from non -listed sources only when tested and approved by the Engineer before use. Allow 30 calendar days for the Engineer to sample, test, and report results for non -listed sources. Do not combine approved material with unapproved material. 1. Coarse Aggregate. Provide coarse aggregate consisting of durable particles of gravel, crushed blast furnace slag, recycled crushed hydraulic cement concrete, crushed stone, or combinations thereof that are free from frozen material and from injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material, either free or as an adherent coating. Provide coarse aggregate of uniform quality throughout. Provide coarse aggregate that, when tested in accordance with Tex-413-A, has: • at most 0.25% by weight of clay lumps, • at most 1.0% by weight of shale, and • at most 5.0% by weight of laminated and friable particles. Wear must not be more than 40% when tested in accordance with Tex-410-A. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, provide coarse aggregate with a 5-cycle magnesium sulfate soundness of not more than 18% when tested in accordance with Tex-411-A. Crushed recycled hydraulic cement concrete is not subject to the 5-cycle soundness test. The loss by decantation as tested in accordance with Tex-406-A, plus the allowable weight of clay lumps, must not exceed 1.0% or the value shown on the plans, whichever is smaller. In the case of aggregates made primarily from crushing stone, if the material finer than the No. 200 sieve is established to be the dust of fracture and essentially free from clay or shale as established by Tex-406-A, Part 1I1, the limit may be increased to 1.5%. When crushed limestone coarse aggregate is used in concrete pavements, the decant may exceed 1.0% but not more than 3.0% if the material finer than the No. 200 sieve is determined to be at least 67% calcium carbonate in accordance with Tex-406-A, Part III. Unless otherwise specified, provide aggregate conforming to the gradation requirements shown in Table 3 when tested in accordance with Tex-40l-A. Table 3 Coarse Aggregate Gradation Chart Aggregate Noe Nominal Size Percent Passing on Each Sieve 2-1/2" 2" 1-1/2" i" 3/4" 1/2" 3/8" No.4 No.8 1 2" 100 80-100 50-85 20-40 0-5 2 467 1-1/2" 100 95-100 35-70 10-30 0-5 3 1-1/2" 100 95-100 60-90 25-60 0-5 4 (57) 1" 100 95-100 25-60 0-10 0-5 5 67 3/4" 100 90-100 20-55 0-10 0-5 6 7 1/2" 100 90-100 40-70 0-15 0-5 7 3/8" 100 70-95 0-25 8 3/8" 100 95-100 20-65 0-10 1. Corresponding ASTM C 33 gradation shown in parentheses. 2. Fine Aggregate. Provide fine aggregate consisting of clean, hard, durable particles of natural or manufactured sand or a combination thereof with or without mineral filler. Provide fine aggregate free from frozen material and from injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material, and containing no more than 0.5% clay lumps by weight in accordance with Tex-413-A. Provide fine aggregate that does not show a color darker than standard when subjected to the color test for organic impurities in accordance with Tex-408-A. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, use fine aggregate with an acid insoluble residue of at least 60% by weight when tested in accordance with Tex-6124 in all concrete subject to direct traffic. Item 421 - 2 i rt: Unless otherwise shown on the plans, when necessary, blend the fine aggregate to meet the acid insoluble residue requirement. When blending, use the following equation: Acid Insoluble (%) _ {(AI)(PI)+(A2)(P2)}/100 where: AI = acid insoluble (%) of aggregate 1 A2 = acid insoluble (%) of aggregate 2 P1 = percent by weight of Al of the fine aggregate blend .' P2 = percent by weight of A2 of the fine aggregate blend Provide fine aggregate or combinations of aggregates, including mineral filler, conforming to the gradation requirements shown in Table 4 when tested in accordance with Tex-401-A unless otherwise specified. Table 4 Fine Aggregate Gradation Chart (Grade 1) Sieve Size Percent Passing 3/8 in. 100 No. 4 95-100 No. 8 80-100 No. 16 50-85 No. 30 25-65 No. 50 10-35 No. 100 0-10 No. 200 0-3 1.6-35 when sand equivalent value is greater than 85. 2. 0-6 for manufactured sand. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, provide fine aggregate with a sand equivalent of at least 80 in accordance with Tex-203-F. For all classes of concrete except Class K, provide fine aggregate with a fineness modulus between 2.30 and 3.10 as determined by Tex-402-A. For Class K concrete, provide a fine aggregate with a fineness modulus between 2.60 to 2.80 unless otherwise shown on the plans. 3. Mineral Filler. Provide mineral filler consisting of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material with 100% passing the No. 30 sieve and 65 to 100% passing the No. 200 sieve when tested in accordance with Tex-401-A. F. Mortar and Grout. When required or shown on the plans, provide mortar and grout consisting of 1 part hydraulic cement, 2 parts sand, and sufficient water to provide the desired consistency. Provide mortar with a consistency such that the mortar can be easily handled and spread by trowel. Provide grout of a consistency that will flow into and completely fill all voids. 421.3. Equipment. A. Concrete Plants and Mixing Equipment. Except for volumetric mixers (auger/mixer), each plant and truck mixer must be currently certified by the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA) or have an inspection report signed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer showing that concrete measuring, mixing, and delivery equipment meets all requirements of ASTM C 94. A new certification or signed and sealed report is required every time a plant is moved. Plants with a licensed engineer's inspection require reinspection every 2 years. Provide a copy of the certification or the signed and sealed inspection report to the Engineer. When equipment or facilities fail to meet specification requirements, remove them from service until corrected. 1. Scales. Check all scales prior to beginning of operations, after each move, or whenever their accuracy or adequacy is questioned, and at least once every 6 mo. Immediately correct deficiencies, and recalibrate. Provide a record of calibration showing scales in compliance with ASTM C 94 requirements. Check batching accuracy of volumetric water batching devices and admixture dispensing devices at least every 90 days. Perform daily checks as necessary to ensure measuring accuracy. 2. Volumetric Mixers. Provide volumetric mixers with rating plates defining the capacity and the performance of the mixer in accordance with the Volumetric Mixer Manufacturers Bureau or equivalent. Item 421 - 3 Provide volumetric mixers that comply with ASTM C 685. Provide test data showing mixers meet the uniformity test requirements of Tex-472-A. 3. Agitators and Truck and Stationary Mixers. Inspect and furnish inspection reports on truck mixers and agitators annually. If an inspection within 12 mo. is not practical, a 2-mo. grace period (for a maximum of 14 mo. between inspections) is permitted. Include in the report the condition of blades and fins and their percent wear from the original manufacturer's design. Repair mixing equipment exhibiting 10% or more wear before use. Provide truck mixers and agitators equipped with means to readily verify the number of revolutions of the drum, blades, or paddles. Provide stationary and truck mixers capable of combining the ingredients of the concrete within the specified time or the number of revolutions specified into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and capable of discharging the concrete so that at least 5 of the 6 requirements of Tex-472-A are met. As directed, to resolve issues of mix uniformity and mixer performance, perform concrete uniformity tests on mixers or agitators in accordance with Tex-472-A. Perform the mixer or agitator uniformity test at the full rated capacity of the equipment and within the maximum mixing time or maximum number of revolutions. Remove from service all equipment that fails the uniformity test. Inspect and maintain mixers and agitators. Keep them reasonably free of concrete buildup, and repair or replace worn or damaged blades or fins. Ensure all mixers have a plate affixed showing manufacturer's recommended operating speed and rated capacity for mixing and agitating. B. Hauling Equipment. Provide hauling equipment capable of maintaining the mixed concrete in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and of discharging the concrete with a satisfactory degree of uniformity. When using non -agitating equipment for transporting concrete, provide equipment with smooth, mortar -tight metal containers equipped with gates that prevent accidental discharge of the concrete. C. Testing Equipment. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or specified, in accordance with the pertinent test procedure, furnish and maintain: • test molds, • curing facilities, • maturity meters if used, and • wheelbarrow or other container acceptable for the sampling of the concrete. Provide strength -testing equipment in accordance with the Contract controlling test unless shown otherwise. 421.4. Construction. A. Classification and Mix Design. Furnish mix designs using ACI 211, "Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete," or other approved procedures for the classes of concrete required in accordance with Table 5. Do not exceed the maximum water-to-cementitious-material ratio. A higher -strength class of concrete with equal or lower water-to-cementitious-material ratio may be substituted for the specified class of concrete. To account for prodli-:lion variability and ensure minimum compressive strength requirements are met, over - design the mix in accordance with Table 6. 1. Cementitious Materials. Use cementitious materials from prequalified sources; otherwise, request sampling and testing for approval before use. Unless otherwise specified or approved, limit cementitious material content to no more than 700 lb. per cubic yard. When supplementary cementing materials are used, "cement" is defined as "cement plus supplementary cementing material." Use Type III cement only in precast concrete or when specified or permitted. t.j For monolithic placements, use cement of the same type and from the same source. t When sulfate -resistant concrete is required, use mix design options 1, 2, 3, or 4 given in Section 421.4.A.6, "Mix Design Options," using Type UII, II, V, IP, or IS cement. Do not use Class C fly ash in sulfate- resistant concrete. f� Item 421 - 4 F� Do not use supplementary cementing materials when white hydraulic cement is specified. Table 5 Concrete Classes Design Class of Strength, Min. Maximum Coarse Aggregate General Usage a Concrete 28-day f W/C Ratio` Grades (psi) Inlets, manholes, curb, gutter, curb & A 3,000 0.60 1-4, 8 gutter, cone. retards, sidewalks, driveways, backup walls, anchors B 2,000 0.60 2-7 Ri ra , small roadside signs, and anchors Drilled shafts, bridge substructure, bridge railing, culverts except top slab of direct CS 3,600 0.45 1-6 traffic culverts, headwalls, wing walls, approach slabs, concrete traffic barrier (cast -in -place) D 1,500 0.60 2-7 Ri ra E 3,000 0.50 2-5 Seal concrete F 5 Note 6 0.45 2-5 Railroad structures; occasionally for bridge iers, columns, or bents W Note 6 0.45 3-6 Prestressed concrete beams, boxes, piling, and concrete traffic barrier (precast) S5 4,000 0.45 2-5 Bridge slabs, top slabs of direct traffic culverts P See 0.45 2-3 Concrete pavement Item 360 DC 5,500 1 0.40 6 Dense cone. overlay col 4,600 0.40 6 Cone. overlay LMC1 4,000 0.40 6-8 Latex -modified concrete overlay SS, Note 7 0.45 4-6 Slurry displacement shafts, underwater drilled shafts K Note 6 0.45 Note 6 Note 6 HES Note 6 0.45 Note 6 Note 6 1. Maximum water -cement or water-cementitious ratio by weight. 2. Unless otherwise permitted, do not use Grade 1 coarse aggregate except in massive foundations with 4-in. minimum clear spacing between reinforcing steel bars. Do not use Grade I aggregate in drilled shafts. 3. Unless otherwise approved, use Grade 8 aggregate in extruded curbs. 4. For information only. 5. Structural concrete classes. 6. As shown on the plans or specified. 7. Cementitious material content shall be minimum 6581b/cy of concrete. Item 421 - 5 s Table 6 Over Design to Meet Compressive Strength Requirements' No. of TestS2'3 Standard Deviation, psi 300 400 500 600 700 15 470 620 850 1,120 1,390 20 430 580 760 1,010 1,260 30 or more 400 530 670 900 1,130 1. When designing the mix, add the tabulated amounts to the minimum design strength in Table 5. 2. Number of tests of a concrete mixture used to estimate the standard deviation of a concrete production facility. Test of another mix within 1,000 psi of the specified strength may be used. 3. If less than 15 prior tests are available, the overdesign should be 1,000 psi for specified strength less than 3,000 psi, 1,200 psi for specified strengths from 3,000 to 5,000 psi and 1,400 psi for specified strengths greater than 5,000 psi. 2. Aggregates. Limit the use of recycled crushed hydraulic cement concrete as a coarse or fine aggregate to Class A, B, D, E, and P concrete. Limit recycled crushed concrete fine aggregate to a maximum of 20% of the fine aggregate. When white hydraulic cement is specified, use light-colored aggregates. 3. Chemical Admixtures. Use only preapproved concrete chemical admixtures from the list of prequalified concrete admixtures maintained by the Construction Division. Submit non-preapproved admixtures for testing to the Engineer for approval. Do not use high -range water -reducing admixtures (Type F or G) or accelerating admixtures (Type C or E) in bridge deck concrete. 4. Air Entrainment. Air -entrain all concrete except for Class B in accordance with Table 7 unless otherwise shown on the plans. Use moderate exposure values unless otherwise specified. If the air content is more than 1-1/2 percentage points below or 3 percentage points above the required air, the load of concrete will be rejected. If the air content is more than 1-1/2 but less than 3 percentage points above the required air, the concrete may be accepted based on strength tests. Table 7 Air Entrainment Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size, in. % Air' Moderate Ex osure Severe Exposure 3/8 (Grades 7 & 8) 1/2 (Grade 6) 6 5-1/2 7-1/2 7 3/4 (Grade 5) 5 6 1 (Grade 4) 4-1/2 6 1-1/2 (Grades 2 & 3) 4-1/2 5-1/2 2 (Grade 1) 4 5 1. For specified concrete strengths above 5,000 psi a reduction of 1 percentage point is permitted. 5. Slump. Unless otherwise specified, provide concrete slump in accordance with Table 8 using the lowest slump possible that can be placed and finished efficiently without segregation or honeycombing. Concrete that exceeds the maximum acceptable placement slump at time of delivery will be rejected. When approved, the slump of a given concrete mix may be increased above the values shown in Table 8 using chemical admixtures, provided that the admixture -treated concrete has the same or lower water — cement or water--cementitious-material ratio and does not exhibit segregation or excessive bleeding. Request approval for the mix design sufficiently in advance for proper evaluation by the Engineer. Item 421 - 6 Table 8 SI nip Requirements Recommended Design Maximum Acceptable Concrete Designation and Placement Slump, placement Slump, in. in. Drilled shafts See Item 416 See Item 416 Thin walled section 4 6-1/2 (9 in. or less Approach slabs, concrete overlays, caps, columns, piers, 3 5 wall sections (over 9 in.) Bridge slabs 4 5-1/2 Prestressed concrete members' 4 6-1/2 Concrete traffic barrier, 4 6-1/2 concrete bridge railing Dense concrete overlay 3/4 2 Latex -modified cone. for 3 7-1/2 bridge deck overlays Concrete placed underwater 6 8-1/2 Concrete pavement (slip- 1-1/2 3 formed Concrete pavement formed 4 6-1/2 Riprap, curb, gutter, slip- As approved As approved formed, and extruded concrete 1. If a high -range water reducer (HRWR) is used, maximum acceptable placement slump will be 9 in. 6. Mix Design Options. For structural concrete identified in Table 5 and any other class of concrete designed using more than 520 lb. of cementitious material per cubic yard, use one of the mix design Options 1-8 shown below. For concrete classes not identified as structural concrete and designed using less than 520 lb. of cementitious material per cubic yard, use one of the mix design Options 1-8 shown in Table 5, except that Class C fly ash may be used instead of Class F fly ash for Options 1, 3, and 4 unless sulfate -resistant concrete is required. a. Option 1. Replace 20 to 35% of the cement with Class F fly ash. b. Option 2. Replace 35 to 50% of the cement with GGBFS. c. Option 3. Replace 35 to 50% of the cement with a combination of Class F fly ash, GGBFS, or silica fume. However, no more than 35% may be fly ash, and no more than 10% may be silica fume. d. Option 4. Use Type IP or Type IS cement. (Up to 10% of a Type IP or Type IS cement may be replaced with Class F fly ash, GGBFS, or silica fume.) e. Option 5. Replace 35 to 50% of the cement with a combination of Class C fly ash and at least 6% of silica fume, UFFA, or metakaolin. However, no more than 35% may be Class C fly ash, and no more than 10% may be silica fume. f. Option 6. Use a lithium nitrate admixture at a minimum dosage of 0.55 gal. of 30% lithium nitrate solution per pound of alkalis present in the hydraulic cement. g. Option 7. When using hydraulic cement only, ensure that the total alkali contribution from the cement in the concrete does not exceed 4.00 lb. per cubic yard. of concrete when calculated as follows: lb. alkali per cu. yd. _ (lb. cement per cu. yd.)x (% Na20 equivalent in cement �. 100 In the above calculation, use the maximum cement alkali content reported on the cement mill certificate. h. Option 8. For any deviations from Options 1-7, perform the following: Item 421 - 7 Test both coarse and fine aggregate separately in accordance with ASTM C 1260, using 440 g of the proposed cementitious material in the same proportions of hydraulic cement to supplementary cementing material to be used in the mix. Before use of the mix, provide the certified test report signed and sealed by a licensed professional engineer demonstrating that the ASTM C 1260 test result for each aggregate does not exceed 0.10% expansion. B. Trial Batches. Perform all preliminary trial batches and testing necessary to substantiate the proposed mix designs, and provide documentation including mix design, material proportions, and test results substantiating that the mix design conforms to specification requirements. Make all final trial batches using the proposed ingredients in a mixer that is representative of the mixers to be used on the job. Make the batch size at least 50% of the mixer's rated capacity. Perform fresh concrete tests for air and slump, and make, cure, and test strength specimens for compliance with specification requirements. Test at least 3 sets of design strength specimens with 2 specimens per set in accordance with Tex-418-A or Tex-448-A for each test age. Before placing, provide the Engineer the option of witnessing final trial batches, including the testing of the concrete. If not provided this option, the Engineer may require additional trial batches, including testing, before the concrete is placed. Establish 7-day compressive strength target values using the following formula for each concrete mix to be used: Target value = Minimum design strength x 7 - day avg. trial batch strength 28 - day avg. trial batch strength When there are changes in aggregates or in type, brand, or source of cement, SCM, or chemical admixtures, reevaluate the mix as a new mix design. A change in vendor does not necessarily constitute a change in materials or source. When only the brand or source of cement is changed and there is a prior record of satisfactory performance of the cement with the ingredients, new trial batches may be waived by the Engineer. When the maturity method is specified or permitted, establish the strength —maturity relationship in accordance with Tex-426-A. When using the maturity method any changes in any of the ingredients, including changes in proportions, will require the development of a new strength —maturity relationship for the mix. C. Storage of Materials. 1. Cement, Supplementary Cementing Materials, and Mineral Filler. Store all cement, supplementary cementing materials, and mineral filler in weatherproof enclosures that will protect them from dampness or absorption of moisture. When permitted, small quantities of sacked cement may be stored in the open, on a raised platform, and under waterproof covering for up to 48 hours. 2. Aggregates. Handle and store concrete aggregates in a manner that prevents contamination with foreign materials. If the aggregates are stored on the ground, clear the sites for the stockpiles of all vegetation, level the sites, and do not use the bottom 6-in. layer of aggregate without cleaning the aggregate before use. When conditions require the use of 2 or more grades of coarse aggregates, maintain separate stockpiles and prevent intermixing. Where space is limited, separate the stockpiles using physical barriers. Store r 1 aggregates from different sources in different stockpiles unless the Engineer authorizes pre -blending of the aggregates. Minimize segregation in stockpiles. Remix and test stockpiles when segregation is apparent. Sprinkle stockpiles to control moisture and temperature as necessary. Maintain reasonably uniform moisture content in aggregate stockpiles. 3. Admixtures. Store admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and prevent admixtures from freezing. D. Measurement of Materials. Except for volumetric mixers, measure concrete materials by weight. Measure 1 mixing water, consisting of water added to the batch, ice added to the batch, water occurring as surface moisture t_1 on the aggregates, and water introduced in the form of admixtures, by volume or weight. Measure ice by weight. Measure cement and supplementary cementing materials in a weigh hopper and on a separate scale t } from those used for other materials. Measure the cement first when measuring the cumulative weight. Measure r� Item 421 - 8 concrete chemical admixtures in powdered form by weight. Measure concrete chemical admixtures in liquid form by weight or volume. Measure batch materials within the tolerances of Table 9. Table 9 Measurement Tolerances — Non -Volumetric Mixers Material Tolerance Cement, wt. f 1 Mineral admixture, wt. f 1 Cement + SCM cumulative weighing), wt. f 1 Water, wt. or volume t3 Fine aggregate, wt. f2 Coarse aggregate, wt. ±2 Fine + coarse aggregate cumulative weighing), wt. f 1 Chemical admixtures, wt. or volume t3 When measuring cementitious materials at less than 30% of scale capacity, ensure that the quantity measured is accurate to not less than the required amount and not more than 4% in excess. When measuring aggregates in a cumulative weigh batcher at less than 30% of the scale capacity, ensure that the cumulative quantity is measured accurate to f0.3% of scale capacity or f3% of the required cumulative weight, whichever is less. For volumetric mixers, base tolerances on volume —weight relationship established by calibration, and measure the various ingredients within the tolerances of Table 10. Correct batch weight measurements for moisture. When approved, under special circumstances, measure cement in bags of standard weight. Weighing of sacked cement is not required. Do not use fractional bags except for small hand -mixed batches of approximately 5 cu. ft. or less and when an approved method of volumetric or weight measurement is used. Table 10 Measurement Tolerances — Volumetric Mixers Material Tolerance Cement, wt. % 0 to +4 SCM, wt. % 0 to +4 Fine aggregate, wt. % f2 Coarse aggregate, wt. % f2 Admixtures, wt. or volume % f3 Water, wt. or volume % tl E. Mixing and Delivering Concrete. Mix and deliver concrete by means of one of the following operations: • central -mixed, • shrink -mixed, • truck -mixed, • volumetric mixer -mixed, or • hand -mixed. Operate mixers and agitators within the limits of the rated capacity and speed of rotation for mixing and agitation as designated by the manufacturer of the equipment. For shrink -mixed and truck -mixed concrete, when there is a reason to suspect the uniformity of concrete delivered using a truck mixer or truck agitator, conduct slump tests of 2 individual samples taken after discharging approximately 15% and 85% of the load as a quick check of the probable degree of uniformity. Take the 2 samples within an elapsed time of at most 15 min. If the slumps of the 2 samples differ by more than the values shown in Table 11, investigate the causes and take corrective actions including adjusting the hatching sequence at the plant and the mixing time and number of revolutions. Delivery vehicles that fail to meet the mixing uniformity requirements must not be used until the condition is corrected. g Item 421 - 9 i Table 11 Slump Tolerance' Average Slump Slump Tolerance2 4 in. or less 1.0 in. 4 to 6 in. 1.5 in. 1. Do not apply these tolerances to the required slumps in Table 8. 2. Maximum permissible difference in results of test of samples from 2 locations in the concrete batch. Re -tempering or adding concrete chemical admixtures is only permitted at the job site when concrete is delivered in a truck mixer. Do not add water after the introduction of mixing water at the batch plant except on arrival at the job site, with approval, to adjust the slump of the concrete. When this water is added, do not exceed the mix design water—cementitious-material ratio. Turn the drum or blades at least 30 additional revolutions at mixing speed to ensure thorough and uniform mixing of the concrete. Do not add water or chemical admixtures to the batch after any concrete has been discharged. Maintain concrete delivery and placement rates sufficient to prevent cold joints. Before unloading, furnish the delivery ticket for the batch of concrete containing the information required on Department Form 596, "Concrete Batch Ticket." When the concrete contains silica fume, adjust mixing times and hatching operations as necessary to ensure the material is completely and uniformly dispersed in the mix. The dispersion of the silica fume within the mix will be verified by the Construction Division, Materials and Pavements Section, using cylinders made from trial batches. If uniform dispersion is not achieved, make necessary changes to the hatching operations until uniform and complete dispersion of the silica fume is achieved. 1. Central -Mixed Concrete. Provide concrete that is mixed completely in a stationary mixer. Mix concrete for a period of 1 min. for 1 cu. yd. and 15 sec. for each additional cu. yd. of rated capacity of the mixer unless mixer performance test data demonstrate that shorter mixing times can be used to obtain a uniform mix in accordance with Tex-472-A. Count the mixing time from the time all the solid materials are in the drum. Charge the mixer so that some water will enter before the cement and aggregate. Ensure that all water is in the drum by the end of the first 1/4 of the specified mixing time. Adjust the mixing time if necessary to achieve a uniform mix. Concrete mixed completely in a stationary mixer must be delivered to the project in a truck mixer, truck agitator, or non -agitating delivery vehicle. When a truck mixer or truck agitator is used for transporting concrete, use the manufacturer's designated agitating speed for any turning during transportation. Non -agitating delivery vehicles must be clean and free of built-up concrete with adequate means to control concrete discharge. Deliver the concrete to the project in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass, and discharge the concrete with a satisfactory degree of uniformity. Resolve questions regarding the uniformity of the concrete by testing when directed by the Engineer in accordance with Tex-472-A. 2. Shrink -Mixed Concrete. Provide concrete that is first partially mixed in a stationary mixer and then mixed completely in a truck mixer. Partially mix for the minimum time required to intermingle the ingredients in the stationary mixer, and then transfer to a truck mixer and mix the concrete at the manufacturer's designated mixing speed for an adequate amount of time to produce thoroughly mixed concrete. Deliver the concrete to the project in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass, and discharge the concrete with a satisfactory degree of uniformity. 3. Truck -Mixed Concrete. Mix the concrete in a truck mixer from 70 to 100 revolutions at the mixing speed designated by the manufacturer to produce a uniform concrete mix. Deliver the concrete to the project in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and discharge the concrete with a satisfactory degree of uniformity. Additional mixing at the job site at the mixing speed designated by the manufacturer is allowed as long as concrete is discharged before the drum has revolved a total of 300 revolutions after the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and the aggregates. 4. Volumetric Mixer -Mixed Concrete. Unless otherwise specified or permitted, perform all mixing operations in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures. Provide an accurate method of measuring all ingredients by volume, and calibrate equipment to assure correct measurement of materials within the specified tolerances. Item 421 - 10 y �l 5. Hand -Mixed Concrete. When permitted, for small placements of less than 2 cu. yd., mix up to a 2-sack batch of concrete by hand methods or in a small motor -driven mixer. For such placements, proportion the mix by volume or weight. F. Placing, Finishing, and Curing Concrete. Place, finish, and cure concrete in accordance with the pertinent Items. G. Sampling and Testing of Concrete. Unless otherwise specified, all fresh and hardened concrete is subject to testing as follows: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete. Provide all material to be tested. Fresh concrete will be sampled for testing at the discharge end if using belt conveyors or pumps. When it is impractical to sample at the discharge end, a sample will be taken at the time of discharge from the delivery equipment and correlation testing will be performed and documented to ensure specification requirements are met at the discharge end. 2. Testing of Fresh Concrete. a. Air Content. Tex-414-A or Tex-416-A. b. Slump. Tex-415-A. c. Temperature. Tex-422-A. d. Making and Curing Strength Specimens. Tex-447-A. 3. Testing of Hardened Concrete. Only compressive strength testing will be used unless otherwise specified or shown on the plans. a. Compressive Strength. Tex-418-A. b. Flexural Strength. Tex-448-A. e. Maturity. Tex-426-a. 4. Certification of Testing Personnel. Contractor personnel performing testing must be either ACI-certified or qualified by a Department -recognized equivalent written and performance testing program for the tests being performed. Personnel performing these tests are subject to Department approval. Use of a commercial laboratory is permitted. All personnel performing testing using the maturity method must be qualified by a training program recognized by the Department before using this method on the job. 5. Adequacy and Acceptance of Concrete. The Engineer will sample and test the fresh and hardened concrete for acceptance. The test results will be reported to the Contractor and the concrete supplier. For any concrete that fails to meet the required strengths as outlined below, investigate the quality of the materials, the concrete production operations, and other possible problem areas to determine the cause. Take necessary actions to correct the problem including redesign of the concrete mix. The Owner may suspend all concrete operations under the pertinent Items if the Contractor is unable to identify, document, and correct the cause of the low strengths in a timely manner. Resume concrete operations only after obtaining approval for any proposed corrective actions. a. Structural Concrete. For concrete classes identified as structural concrete in Table 5, the Engineer will make and test 7-day and 28-day specimens. Acceptance will be based on the design strength given in Table 5. The Engineer will evaluate the adequacy of the concrete by comparing 7-day test results to the target value established in accordance with Section 421.4.13, "Trial Batches." b. All Other Concrete. For concrete classes not identified as structural concrete in Table 5, the Engineer will snake and test 7-day specimens. The Engineer will base acceptance on the 7-day target value established in accordance with Section 421.4.13, "Trial Batches." 6. Test Sample Handling. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed, remove forms and deliver department test specimens to curing facilities, in accordance with pertinent test procedures. Clean and prepare forms for reuse. 421.5. Measurement and Payment. The work performed, materials furnished, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals will not be measured or paid for directly but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. Item 421 - 11 t__ ITEM 432 1719M 432.1. Description. Furnish and place concrete, stone, cement -stabilized, or special riprap. 432.2. Materials. Furnish materials in accordance with the following: • Item 420, "Concrete Structures" • Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete" • Item 431, "Pneumatically Placed Concrete" • Item 440, "Reinforcing Steel' • DMS-6200, "Filter Fabric." A. Concrete Riprap. Use Class B Concrete unless otherwise shown on the plans. B. Pneumatically Placed Concrete Riprap. Use Class II concrete that meets Item 431, "Pneumatically Placed Concrete," unless otherwise shown. C. Stone Riprap. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, use durable natural stone with a minimum bulk specific gravity of 2.40 as determined by Tex-403-A. Provide stone that, when tested in accordance with Tex-411-A, has a maximum weight loss of 18% after 5 cycles of magnesium sulfate solution and 14% after 5 cycles of sodium sulfate solution. For all types of stone riprap perform a size verification test on the first 5,000 sq. yd. of finished riprap stone at a location determined by the Engineer. Weigh each stone in a square test area with the length of each side of the square equal to 3 times the specified riprap thickness. The weight of the stones, excluding spalls, should be as specified below. Additional tests may be required. Do not place additional riprap until the initial 5,000 sq. yd. of riprap has been approved. When specified, provide grout or mortar in accordance with Item 421,"Hydraulic Cement Concrete." Provide grout with a consistency that will flow into and fill all voids. Provide filter fabric in accordance with DMS-6200, "Filter Fabric." For protection stone riprap, provide Type 2 filter fabric unless otherwise shown on the plans. For Type R, F, or Common stone riprap, provide Type 2 filter fabric when shown on the plans. 1. Type R. Use stones between 50 and 250 lb. with a minimum of 50% of the stones heavier than 100 lb. 2. Type F. Use stones between 50 and 250 lb. with a minimum of 40% of the stones heavier than 100 lb. Use stones with at least 1 broad flat surface. 3. Common. Use stones between 50 and 250 lb. Use stones that are at least 3 in. in their least dimension. Use stones that are at least twice as wide as they are thick. When shown on the plans or approved, material may consist of broken concrete removed under the Contract or fiom other approved sources. Before placement of each piece of broken concrete, cut exposed reinforcement flush with all surfaces. 4. Protection. Use boulders or quarried rock that meets the gradation requirements of Table 1. Both the width and the thickness of each piece of riprap must be at least 1/3 of the length. When shown on the plans or as approved, material may consist of broken concrete removed under the Contract or from other approved sources. Before placement of each piece of broken concrete, cut exposed reinforcement flush with all surfaces. Determine gradation of the finished, in -place, riprap stone under the direct supervision of the Engineer in accordance with Tex-411-A, Part II. Item 432 - 1 t i Table 1 In -Place Protection Riprap Gradation Requirements Thickness Maximum Size lb. 90% Size1 b. 50% Size' lb. 8% Sizei, Minimum lb. 12in. 200 80-180 30-75 3 15in. 320 170-300 60-165 20 18 in. 530 290-475 105-220 22 21 in. 800 460-720 175-300 25 24 in. 1,000 550-850 200-325 30 30 in. 2,600 1,150-2,250 400-900 40 1. As defined in Tex-401-A, Part II. Provide bedding stone that in -place meets the gradation requirements shown in Table 2 or as otherwise shown on the plans. Determine size distribution in accordance with Tex-401-A, Part I. Table 2 Protection Riprap Bedding Material Gradation Requirements Sieve Size (Sq. Mesh % by Weight Passing 3 in. 100 1-1/2 in. 50-80 3/4 in. 20-60 No. 4 0-15 No. 10 0-5 D. Cement -Stabilized Riprap. Provide aggregate that meets Item 247, "Flexible Base," for the type and grade shown on plans. Use cement -stabilized riprap with 7% hydraulic cement by dry weight of the aggregate. E. Special Riprap. Furnish materials for special riprap according to the plans. 432.3. Construction. Dress slopes and protected areas to the line and grade shown on the plans before the placement of riprap. Place riprap and toe walls according to details and dimensions shown on the plans or as directed. A. Concrete Riprap. Reinforce concrete riprap with 6 x 6 — W2.9 x W2.9 welded wire fabric or with No. 3 or No. 4 reinforcing bars spaced at a maximum of 18 in. in each direction unless otherwise shown. Alternative styles of welded wire fabric that provide at least 0.058 sq. in. of steel per foot in both directions may be used if approved. A combination of welded wire fabric and reinforcing bars may be provided when both are permitted. Provide a minimum 6-in. lap at all splices. At the edge of the riprap, provide a minimum horizontal cover of 1 in. and a maximum cover of 3 in. Place the first parallel bar at most 6 in. from the edge of concrete. Use approved supports to hold the reinforcement approximately equidistant from the top and bottom surface of the slab. Adjust reinforcement during concrete placement to maintain correct position. As directed, sprinkle or sprinkle and consolidate the subgrade before the concrete is placed. All surfaces must be moist when concrete is placed. After placing the concrete, compact and shape it to conform to the dimensions shown on plans. After it has set sufficiently to avoid slumping, finish the surface with a wood float to secure a smooth surface or broom finish as approved. Immediately after the finishing operation, cure the riprap according to Item 420, "Concrete Strictures." B. Stone Riprap. Provide the following types of stone riprap when shown on the plans: • Dry Riprap. Dry riprap is stone riprap with voids filled with only spalls or small stones. • Grouted Riprap. Grouted riprap is Type R, F, or Common stone riprap with voids grouted after all the stones are in place. • Mortared Riprap. Mortared riprap is Type F stone riprap laid and mortared as each stone is placed. Use spalls and small stones lighter than 25 lb. to fill open joints and voids in stone riprap, and place to a tight fit. Item 432 - 2 Do not place mortar or grout when the air temperature is below 35°F. Protect work from rapid drying for at least 3 days after placement. Unless otherwise approved, place filter fabric with the length running up and down the slope. Ensure fabric has a minimum overlap of 2 ft. Secure fabric with nails or pins. Use nails at least 2 in. long with washers or U-shaped pins with legs at least 9 in. long. Space nails or pins at a maximum of 10 ft. in each direction and 5 ft. along the seams. Alternative anchorage and spacing may be used when approved. 1. Type R. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 1 and as shown on the plans. Place stones in a single layer with close joints so that most of their weight is carried by the earth and not by the adjacent stones. Place the upright axis of the stones at an angle of approximately 90' to the embankment slope. Place each course from the bottom of the embankment upward with the larger stones in the lower courses. Fill open joints between stones with spalls. Place stones to create a uniform finished top surface. Do not exceed a 6-in. variation between the tops of adjacent stones. Replace, embed deeper, or chip away stones that project more than the allowable amount above the finished surface. When the plans require Type R stone riprap to be grouted, prevent earth, sand, or foreign material from filling the spaces between the stones. After the stones are in place, wet the stones thoroughly, fill the spaces between the stones with grout, and pack. Sweep the surface of the riprap with a stiff broom after grouting. E 2. Type F. Grout when specified s. NN Slope of embankment Upright axes of stone perpendicular to slope T-6" min Figure 1 Type R stone riprap, dry or grouted. a. Dry Placement. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 2. Set the flat surface on a prepared horizontal earth bed, and overlap the underlying course to secure a lapped surface. Place the large stones first, roughly arranged in close contact. Fill the spaces between the large stones with suitably sized stones placed to leave the surface evenly stepped and conforming to the contour required. Place stone to drain water down the face of the slope. Item 432 - 3 Mortar when specified s. �A to min Slope of embankment 1'-6" min Figure 2 Type F stone riprap, dry or mortared. b. Grouting. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 3. Size, shape, and lay large flat -surfaced stones to produce an even surface with minimal voids. Place stones with the flat surface facing upward parallel to the slope. Place the largest stones near the base of the slope. Fill spaces between the larger stones with stones of suitable size, leaving the surface smooth, tight, and conforming to the contour required. Place the stones to create a plane surface with a maximum variation of 6 in. in 10 ft. from true plane. Provide the same degree of accuracy for warped and curved surfaces. Prevent earth, sand or foreign material from filling the spaces between the stones. After the stones are in place, wet them thoroughly, fill the spaces between them with grout, and pack. Sweep the surface with a stiff broom after grouting. Item 432 - 4 Is Grout when specified Flat side up Slope of embankment V-6" min Figure 3 Type F stone riprap, grouted. c. Mortaring. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 2. Lap courses as described for dry placement. Before placing mortar, wet the stones thoroughly. As the larger stones are placed, bed them in fresh mortar and shove adjacent stones into contact with one another. After completing the work, spread all excess mortar forced out during placement of the stones uniformly over them to fill all voids completely. Point up all joints roughly either with flush joints or with shallow, smooth -raked joints as directed. 3. Common. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 4. Place stones on a bed excavated for the base course. Bed the base course of stone well into the ground with the edges in contact. Bed and place each succeeding course in even contact with the preceding course. Use spalls and small stones to fill any open joints and voids in the riprap. Ensure the finished surface presents an even, tight surface, true to the line and grades of the typical sections. When the plans require grouting common stone riprap, prevent earth, sand, or foreign material from filling the spaces between the stones. After the stones are in place, wet them thoroughly, fill the spaces between them with grout, and pack. Sweep the surface with a stiff broom after grouting. Item 432 - 5 Grout when specified Multiple layers A (more than one rock depth) r� iI--I "v —Slope of embankment e V-V min Figure 4 Common stone riprap, dry or grouted. 4. Protection. Construct riprap as shown in Figure 5. Place riprap stone on the slopes within the limits shown on the plans. Place stone for riprap on the bedding material to produce a reasonably well -graded mass of riprap with the minimum practicable percentage of voids. Construct the riprap to the lines and grades shown on the plans or staked in the field. A tolerance of +6 in. and -0 in. from the slope line and grades shown on the plans is allowed in the finished surface of the riprap. Place riprap to its full thickness in a single operation. Avoid displacing the bedding material. Ensure that the entire mass of stones in their final position is free from objectionable pockets of small stones and clusters of larger stones. Do not place riprap in layers, and do not place it by dumping it into chutes, dumping it from the top of the slope, pushing it from the top of the slope, or any method likely to cause segregation of the various sizes. Obtain the desired distribution of the various sizes of stones throughout the mass by selective loading of material at the quarry or other source or by other methods of placement that will produce the specified results. Rearrange individual stones by mechanical equipment or by hand if necessary to obtain a reasonably well - graded distribution of stone sizes. Item 432 - 6 �N lope of AFitter fabric ?ffiti Figure 5 Protection stone riprap. C. Pneumatically Placed Concrete Riprap, Class II. Meet Item 431, "Pneumatically Placed Concrete." Provide reinforcement following the details on the plans and Item 440, "Reinforcing Steel." Support reinforcement with approved supports throughout placement of concrete. Give the surface a wood -float finish or a gun finish as directed. Immediately after the finishing operation, cure the riprap with membrane -curing compound in accordance with Item 420, "Concrete Structures." D. Cement -Stabilized Riprap. Follow the requirements of the plans and the provisions for concrete riprap except when reinforcement is not required. The Engineer will approve the design and mixing of the cement -stabilized riprap. E. Special Riprap. Construct special riprap according to the plans. 432.4. Measurement. This Item will be measured by the cubic yard of material complete in place. Volume will be computed on the basis of the measured area in place and the thickness and toe wall width shown on the plans. For stone riprap for protection, the quantity of the bedding material to be paid for will be measured by the cubic yard as computed from the measured area in place and the bedding thickness shown on the plans. 432.5. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Riprap" of the type, thickness, and void -filling technique (Dry, Grout, Mortar) specified, as applicable. This price is full compensation for furnishing, hauling, and placing riprap and for filter fabric, expansion joint material, concrete and reinforcing steel, grout and mortar, scales, test weights, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Payment for excavation of toe wall trenches, for all necessary excavation below natural ground or bottom of excavated channel, and for shaping of slopes for riprap will be included in the unit price bid per cubic yard of riprap. When bedding is required for protection stone riprap, payment will be made at the unit price for "Bedding Material' of the thickness specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing, hauling, placing, and maintaining the bedding material until placement of the riprap cover is completed and accepted; excavation required for placement of bedding material; and equipment, scales, test weights, labor, tools, and incidentals. No payment will be made for excess thickness of bedding nor for material required to replace embankment material lost by rain wash, wind erosion, or otherwise. Item 432 - 7 ITEM 585 RIDE QUALITY FOR PAVEMENT SURFACES 585.1. Description. Measure and evaluate the ride quality of pavement surfaces. 585.2. Equipment. A. Surface Test Type A. Provide a 10-ft. straightedge. B. Surface Test Type B. Provide a high-speed or lightweight inertial profiler, certified at the Texas Transportation Institute. Provide the Engineer with equipment certification documentation. Display a current decal on the equipment indicating the certification expiration date. Use a certified profiler operator from the Construction Division's approved list. When requested, furnish the Engineer documentation for the person certified to operate the profiler. C. Diamond Grinding Equipment. When grinding is required, provide self-propelled powered grinding equipment that is specifically designed to smooth and texture pavements using circular diamond blades. Provide equipment with automatic grade control capable of grinding at least 3 ft. of width longitudinally in each pass without damaging the pavement. 585.3. Work Methods. Measure and evaluate profiles using Surface Test Types A and B on surfaces as described below unless otherwise shown on the plans. A. Transverse Profile. Measure the transverse profile of the finished riding surface in accordance with Surface Test Type A. B. Longitudinal Profile. Measure the longitudinal profile of the surface, including horizontal curves. 1. Travel Lanes. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, use Surface Test Type B on the finished riding surface of all travel lanes except as follows. a. Service Roads and Ramps. Use Surface Test Type A on service roads and ramps unless Surface Test Type B is shown on the plans. b. Short Projects. Use Surface Test Type A when project pavement length is less than 2,500 ft. unless otherwise shown on the plans. c. Bridge Structures. For span type bridge structures, approach slabs, and the 100 ft. leading into and away from such structures, measure the profile in accordance with the pertinent item or use Surface Test Type A. d. Leave -out Sections. Use Surface Test Type A for areas listed on the plans as leave -out sections. e. Ends. Use Surface Test Type A on the first and last 100 ft. of the project pavement length. 2. Shoulders and Other Areas. Use Surface Test Type A for shoulders and all other areas including intermediate pavement layers. C. Profile Measurements. Measure the finished surface in accordance with Surface Test Type A or B in accordance with Section 585.3.A, "Transverse Profile"; Section 585.3.13, "Longitudinal Profile"; and the plans. 1. Surface Test Type A. Test the surface with a 10-ft. straightedge at locations selected by the Engineer. 2. Surface Test Type B. a. Quality Control (QC) Testing. Perform QC tests on a daily basis throughout the duration of the project. Use a 10-ft. straightedge, inertial profiler, profilograph, or any other means to perform QC tests. b. Quality Assurance (QA) Testing. Perform QA tests using either a high-speed or lightweight inertial profiler. Coordinate with and obtain authorization from the Engineer before starting QA testing. Perform QA tests on the finished surface of the completed project or at the completion of a major stage of construction as approved by the Engineer. Perform QA tests within 7 days after receiving authorization. Item 585 - 1 l-- E 1 The Engineer may require QA testing to be performed at times of off-peak traffic flow. Operate the ! inertial profiler in a manner that does not unduly disrupt traffic flow as determined by the Engineer. When using a lightweight inertial profiler to measure a surface that is open to traffic, use a moving traffic control plan in accordance with Part 6 of the TMUTCD and the plans. In accordance with Tex- 1001-S, operate the inertial profiler and deliver test results to the Engineer within 24 hr. of testing. Provide all profile measurements to the Engineer in electronic data files using the format specified in Tex- 1001-S. (1) Verification Testing. Within 10 working days after the Contractor's QA testing is completed for the project or major stage of construction, the Engineer may perform ride quality verification testing. When the Department's profiler produces an overall average international roughness index (IRI) value that is more than 3.0 in. per mile higher than the value calculated using Contractor data, the Engineer will decide whether to accept the Contractor's data, use the Department's data, use an average of both party's data, or request a referee test. Referee testing is mandatory if the difference is greater than 6.0 in. per mile. (2) Referee Testing. The Construction Division will conduct referee testing, and their results are final. The Construction Division may require recertification for the Contractor's or Department's inertial profiler. D. Acceptance Plan and Pay Adjustments. The Engineer will evaluate profiles for determining acceptance, bonus, penalty, and corrective action. 1. Surface Test Type A. Use diamond grinding or other methods approved by the Engineer to correct surface areas that have more than 1/8-in. variation between any 2 contacts on a 10-ft. straightedge. For asphalt concrete pavements, fog seal the aggregate exposed from diamond grinding. Following correction, retest the area to verify compliance with this Item. 2. Surface Test Type B. The Engineer will use the QA test results and the corresponding values in Table 1 to determine pay adjustments for ride quality using Department software. IRI values will be calculated using the average of both wheel paths. When taking corrective actions to improve a deficient 0.1-mi. section, pay adjustments will be based on the data obtained from reprofiling the corrected area. a. IRI Pay Adjustment for 0.1-mi. Sections. Unless pay adjustment Schedule 1 or 2 is shown on the plans, Schedule 3 from Table 1 will be used to determine the level of bonus or penalty for each 0.1-mi. section on the project. When Schedule 3 is specified, no associated bonuses will be paid for any 0.1-mi. section that contains localized roughness. b. IRI Deficient 0.1-mi. Sections. When pay adjustment Schedule 1 or 2 is specified, use diamond grinding or other approved work methods to correct any 0.1-mi. section with an average IRI over 95.0 in. per mile (IRI deficient). Correct the deficient section to an IRI of 65 in. per mile or less when Schedule 1 is specified and to an IRI of 75 in. per mile or less when Schedule 2 is specified. After making corrections, reprofile the pavement section to verify that corrections have produced the required improvements. Associated bonuses apply when successful corrective action improves the IRI of a deficient 0.1-mi. section. (1) Hydraulic Concrete Pavement. Use diamond grinding to correct deficient 0.1-mi. sections. (2) Asphalt Concrete Pavement. For asphalt concrete pavement, the Engineer may assess a $3,000 penalty per 0.1-mi. section instead of requiring corrective action. Use diamond grinding or other approved methods to correct deficient 0.1-mi. sections. If corrective action does not produce the required improvement, the Engineer may require continued corrective action, assess the pertinent schedule penalty if the reprofiled IRI is 95 in. per mile or less, or assess the $3,000 penalty if the reprofiled IRI is greater than 95 in. per mile. Fog seal the aggregate exposed from diamond grinding or other corrective methods allowed. c. Localized Roughness. Localized roughness will be measured using an inertial profiler in accordance with Tex- 1001-S. The Engineer will determine areas of localized roughness using the average profile from both wheel paths. Item 585 - 2 The Engineer may waive localized roughness requirements for deficiencies resulting from manholes or other similar appurtenances near the wheel path. (1) Corrective Action. When Schedule 1 or 2 is specified, use diamond grinding or other approved k methods to remove localized roughness. When Schedule 3 is specified, use a 10-ft. straightedge to further evaluate areas with localized roughness, and use diamond grinding or other approved methods to correct areas that have more than 1/8-in. variation between any 2 contacts on the straightedge. For asphalt concrete pavements, fog -seal the aggregate exposed from diamond grinding. Reprofile the corrected area, and provide the Engineer the results that show the corrective action was successful. For asphalt concrete pavement, if the corrective action is not successful, the Engineer will require continued corrective action or assess a localized roughness penalty. (2) Localized Roughness Penalty Assessed. For asphalt concrete pavement, in lieu of corrective action, the Engineer may assess a penalty for each occurrence of localized roughness. No more than 1 penalty will be assessed for any 5 ft. of longitudinal distance. No localized roughness penalties will be assessed in deficient 0.1-mi. sections where the Engineer elects to asses the $3,000 penalty instead of corrective action. For Schedule 1, a localized roughness penalty of $500 per occurrence will be assessed. For Schedule 2, a localized roughness penalty of $250 per occurrence will be assessed. For Schedule 3, localized roughness penalties will not be assessed. 585.4. Measurement and Payment. The work performed, materials furnished, certification and recertification, traffic control for all testing, materials and work needed for corrective action, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals will not be measured or paid for directly but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. Sections shorter than 0.1 mi. and longer than 50 ft. will be prorated in accordance with Tex- 1001-S. Item 585 - 3 Table 1 Pay Adjustment Schedules for Ride Quality Average IRI for each 0.10 mi. of Traffic Lane (in. / mi.) Pay Adjustment $/0.10 mi. of Traffic Lane Schedule 1 Schedule 2 Schedule 3 < 30 600 600 300 30 600 600 300 31 580 580 290 32 560 560 280 33 540 540 270 34 520 520 260 35 500 500 250 36 480 480 240 37 460 460 230 38 440 440 220 39 420 420 210 40 400 400 200 41 380 380 190 42 360 360 180 43 340 340 170 44 320 320 160 45 300 300 150 46 280 280 140 47 260 260 130 48 240 240 120 49 220 220 110 50 200 200 100 51 180 180 90 52 160 160 80 53 140 140 70 54 120 120 60 55 100 100 50 56 80 80 40 57 60 60 30 58 40 40 20 59 20 20 10 60 0 0 0 61 0 0 0 Item 585 - 4 1 Table 1 (continued) Pay Adjustment Schedules for Ride Quality Average IRI for each 0.10 mi. of Traffic Lane in./mi. Pay Adjustment $/0.10 mi. of Traffic Lane Schedule 1 Schedule 2 Schedule 3 62 0 0 0 63 0 0 0 64 0 0 0 65 0 0 0 66 —20 0 0 67 —40 0 0 68 —60 0 0 69 —80 0 0 70 —100 0 0 71 —120 0 0 72 —140 0 0 73 —160 0 0 74 —180 0 0 75 —200 0 0 76 —220 —20 0 77 —240 —40 0 78 —260 —60 0 79 —280 —80 0 80 —300 —100 0 81 —320 —120 0 82 —340 —140 0 83 —360 —160 0 84 —380 —180 0 85 —400 —200 0 86 —420 —220 0 87 —440 —240 0 88 —460 —260 0 89 —480 —280 0 90 —500 —300 0 91 —520 —320 0 92 —540 —340 0 93 —560 —360 0 94 -580 -380 0 Item 585 - 5 Table 1 (continued) Pay Adjustment Schedules for Ride Quality Average IRI for Pay Adjustment each 0.10 mi. of $/0.10 mi. of Traffic Lane Traffic Lane in./mi. Schedule 1 Schedule 2 Schedule 3 95 —600 —400 0 Corrective Corrective > 95 Action Action Not Applicable Item 585 - 6 ITEM 610 ROADWAY ILLUMINATION ASSEMBLIES 610.1. Description. - • Installation. Furnish, fabricate, and erect roadway illumination assemblies. • Relocation. Remove and relocate existing roadway illumination assemblies. • Removal. Remove existing roadway illumination assemblies. 610.2. Materials. Provide new materials that comply with the details shown on the plans, the requirements of this Item, and the pertinent requirements of the following Items: • Item 441, "Steel Structures" • Item 442, "Metal for Structures" • Item 445, "Galvanizing" • Item 446, "Cleaning and Painting Steel" • Item 449, "Anchor Bolts" • Item 620, "Electrical Conductors." Furnish light fixtures from new materials that comply with DMS-11010, "Roadway Illumination Light Fixtures." Provide light fixtures from manufacturers prequalified by the Department. The Traffic Operations Division maintains a list of prequalified roadway illumination light fixture manufacturers. Provide shop drawings of the complete assembly in accordance with the plans. Hot -dip galvanize fabricated pole sections and associated parts in accordance with Item 445, "Galvanizing." Punch or drill holes in steel parts or members, when allowed, before galvanizing. Paint poles, when shown on the plans, in accordance with Item 446, "Cleaning and Painting Steel. 610.3. Construction. Perform work in accordance with the details shown on the plans and the requirements of this Item. Sample fixtures for testing in accordance with Tex- 1110-T. Use established industry and utility safety practices when installing, relocating, or removing poles or luminaires located near overhead or underground utilities. Consult with the appropriate utility company before beginning work. Prevent scarring or marring of the poles, mast arms, and fixtures. Replace damaged components. Repair damaged galvanizing in accordance with Section 445.3.1), "Repairs." Repair damaged painted areas of a roadway illumination assembly in accordance with Item 446, "Cleaning and Painting Steel." Stake, install, and align each roadway illumination assembly as shown on the plans. The Department may shift an assembly's location, if necessary, to secure a more desirable location or to avoid conflict with utilities. A. Installation. Fabricate and install roadway illumination assembly components in accordance with the details, dimensions, and requirements shown on the plans. Do not use screw -in type foundations. Install anchor bolts and coat anchor bolt threads in accordance with Item 449, "Anchor Bolts." Erect structures after foundation concrete has attained its design strength as required on the plans and Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete." Tighten anchor bolts for poles with shoe bases in accordance with Item 449, "Anchor Bolts." Do not place grout between base plate and foundation. Test installed roadway illumination assemblies in accordance with Item 616, "Performance Testing of Lighting Systems." B. Relocation. Relocate roadway illumination assembly components in accordance with the details, dimensions, and requirements shown on the plans. Do not use screw -in type foundations. Install existing structures on new foundations in accordance with Section 610.3.A, "Installation." Do not place grout between base plate and foundation. Test installed roadway illumination assemblies in accordance with Item 616, "Performance Testing of Lighting Systems." Disconnect and remove conductors from abandoned circuits. Remove abandoned conduit or ducts to a point 6 in. below final grade. Reconnect conduit, ducts, and conductors to be reused. Replace damaged conduit, ducts, and conductors. Item 610 - 1 Y- Unless otherwise shown on the plans, remove abandoned concrete foundations and replace surfacing in accordance with Section 610.3.C, "Removal." Do not remove existing concrete bridge lighting brackets. Furnish and install new internal conductors, fused and unfused connectors, and lamps. Furnish and install new transformer bases that meet AASHTO and plan requirements when relocating transformer base poles. Destroy existing transformer bases to prevent reuse. Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials and dispose of in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations. C. Removal. Remove roadway illumination assembly components in accordance with established industry and utility safety practices. Remove transformer bases from transformer base poles. Remove luminaires and mast arms from the pole shaft. Stockpile pole shafts, mast arms, and assembly hardware at a location designated by the Department. Pole shafts, mast arms, and assembly hardware will remain Department property unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed. Disconnect and remove conductors from abandoned circuits. Remove abandoned conduit and ducts to a point 6 in. below final grade. Destroy existing transformer bases to prevent reuse. Remove abandoned concrete foundations to a point 2 ft. below final grade. Backfill the hole with material that is equal in composition and density to the surrounding area. Replace surfacing material with similar material to an equivalent condition. Do not remove existing concrete bridge lighting brackets. Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials and dispose of in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations. Item 610 - 2 ITEM 618 3 81`►11111 N 618.1. Description. Fumish and place conduit. 618.2. Materials. Provide new materials that comply with the details shown on the plans, the requirements of this Item, and the pertinent requirements of Item 622, "Duct Cable." When specified in the plans, provide: • rigid metal (RM) conduit that is hot -dip galvanized inside and outside with a minimum of 1.5 oz. per square foot of a zinc coating in accordance with Item 445, "Galvanizing"; • electrical metallic tubing (EMT) and intermediate metal conduit (IMC) that is steel, galvanized on the outside, and protected on the inside with a suitable corrosion -resistant material; • polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit that meets the requirements of NEMA Standard TC-2, UL 651, and the NEC; • high -density polyethylene (HDPE) conduit without factory -installed conductors that meets the requirements of Item 622, "Duct Cable"; or • flexible conduit that is liquid -tight. Furnish conduit from new materials that comply with DMS-11030, "Conduit." Provide conduit from manufacturers prequalified by the Department. The Traffic Operations Division maintains a list of prequalified electrical conduit manufacturers. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, fabricate fittings such as junction boxes and expansion joints from a material similar to the connecting conduit. Use watertight fittings. Do not use set screw and pressure -cast fittings. Steel compression fittings are permissible. When using HDPE conduit, provide fittings that are UL-listed as electrical conduit connectors or thermally fused using an electrically heated wound wire resistance welding method. Use red 3-in. 4-mil polyethylene underground warning tape that continuously states "Caution Buried Electrical Line Below." 618.3. Construction. Place conduit in accordance with the lines, grades, details, and dimensions shown on the plans or as directed. Install conduit a minimum of 18 in. deep underground unless otherwise shown on the plans. Meet the requirements of the NEC when installing conduit. Secure and support conduit placed for concrete encasement in such a manner that the alignment will not be disturbed during placement of the concrete. Cap ends of conduit and close box openings before concrete is placed. Ream conduit to remove burrs and sharp edges. Use a standard conduit cutting die with a 3/4-in. taper per foot when conduit is threaded in the field. Fasten conduit placed on structures with conduit straps or hangers as shown on the plans or as directed. Fasten conduit within 3 ft. of each box or fitting and at other locations shown on the plans or as directed. Use metal conduit clamps that are galvanized malleable or stainless steel unless otherwise shown on the plans. Use 2-hole type clamps for 2-in. diameter or larger conduit. Fit PVC and HDPE conduit terminations with bushings or bell ends. Fit metal conduit terminations with a grounding type bushing, except conduit used for duct cable casing that does not terminate in a ground box and is not exposed at any point. Conduit terminating in threaded bossed fittings does not need a bushing. Prior to installation of conductors or final acceptance, pull a spherical template having a diameter of at least 75% of the inside diameter of the conduit through the conduit to ensure that the conduit is free from obstruction. Cap or plug empty conduit placed for future use. Perform trench excavation and backfrlling as shown on the plans or as directed and in accordance with Item 400, "Excavation and Backfill for Structures." Excavation and backfilling will be subsidiary to the installation of the conduit. Jack and bore as shown on the plans or as directed, and in accordance with Item 476, "Jacking, Boring, or Tunneling Pipe." Item 618 - 1 I t Place warning tape approximately 10 in. above trenched conduit. Where existing surfacing is removed for placing conduit, repair by backfilling with material equal in composition and density to the surrounding areas and by replacing any removed surfacing, such as asphalt pavement or concrete riprap, with like material to equivalent condition. Mark conduit locations as directed. El Item 618 - 2 ITEM 620 ELECTRICAL CONDUCTORS 620.1. Description. Furnish and place electrical conductors, except conductors specifically covered by other Items. 620.2. Materials. Provide new materials that comply with the details shown on the plans and the requirements of this Item. Use stranded insulated conductors that are rated for 600 volts; approved for wet locations; and marked in accordance with UL, NEC, and CSA requirements. Furnish electrical conductors in accordance with DMS-11040, "Electrical Conductors." Provide electrical conductors from manufacturers prequalified by the Department. The Traffic Operations Division maintains a list of prequalified electrical conductor manufacturers. Ensure that all grounding conductors size AWG No. 8 and larger are stranded, except for the grounding electrode conductor, which will be a solid conductor. Use white insulation for grounded (neutral) conductors, except that grounded conductors AWG No. 8 and larger may be black with white tape marking at every accessible location. Do not use white insulation or marking for any other conductor except control wiring specifically shown on the plans. Ensure that insulated grounding conductors are green except that insulated grounding conductors AWG No. 8 and larger may be black with green tape marking at every accessible location. Do not use green insulation or marking for any other conductor except control wiring specifically shown on the plans. 620.3. Construction. Splice conductors only injunction boxes, ground boxes, and transformer bases, and in poles and structures at the hand holes. Splice as shown on the plans. Do not exceed the manufacturer's recommended �. pulling tension. Use lubricant as recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors in accordance with the NEC. Make insulation resistance tests on the conductors prior to making final connections, and ensure that each continuous run of insulated conductor has a minimum DC resistance of 5 megohms when tested at 1,000 volts DC. The Engineer may require verification testing of all or part of the conductor system. The Engineer will witness these verification tests. Replace conductors exhibiting an insulation resistance of less than 5 megohms. Item 620 - 1 ITEM 624 GROUND BOXES 624.1. Description. Construct, furnish, and install ground boxes complete with lids. 624.2. Construction and Materials. Provide new materials that comply with the details shown on the plans and meet the following requirements: • Construct cast -in -place concrete ground boxes and aprons in accordance with Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete," and Item 440, "Reinforcing Steel." • Provide fabricated precast polymer concrete ground boxes, and precast concrete ground boxes that comply with DMS-11070, "Ground Boxes." • Construct a concrete apron, when shown on the plans, in accordance with Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete," and Item 440, "Reinforcing Steel." Provide ground boxes from manufacturers prequalified by the Department. The Traffic Operations Division maintains a list of prequalified ground box manufacturers. Item 624 - I ELECTRICAL SERVICES 628.1. Description. • Installation. Furnish and install complete and independent points of electrical service. • Removal. Remove electrical services. 628.2. Materials. Provide materials that comply with the details shown on the plans, the requirements of this Item, and the pertinent requirements of the following Items: • Item 441, "Steel Structures" • Item 445, "Galvanizing" • Item 449, "Anchor Bolts" • Item 618, "Conduit" • Item 620, "Electrical Conductors" • Item 627, "Treated Timber Poles" • Item 656, "Foundations for Traffic Control Devices." For the installation of electrical services, use new materials that meet the requirements of the NEC, UL, CSA, and NEMA, and that comply with DMS-11080, "Electrical Services." Furnish electrical services from manufacturers prequalified by the Department. The Traffic Operations Division maintains a list of prequalified electrical service manufacturers. 628.3. Construction. Perform work in accordance with the details shown on the plans and the requirements of this Item. A. Installation. Ensure components of the electrical service meet the requirements of the Electrical Detail Standards. Follow NEC and local utility company requirements when installing the electrical equipment. Coordinate the utility companies' work for providing service. B. Removal. Coordinate removal with the appropriate utility company before beginning work. Before the removal of the electrical service, disconnect and isolate any existing electrical service equipment in accordance with the utility company's requirements. Use established industry and utility safety practices while removing electrical service equipment near any overhead utilities. Remove existing electrical service support a minimum of 2 ft. below finish grade unless otherwise shown on the plans. Repair the remaining hole by backfrlling with material equal in composition and density to the surrounding area. Replace any surfacing such as asphalt pavement or concrete riprap with like material to equivalent condition. Disconnect conductors and remove them from the conduit or duct. Cut off all protruding conduit or duct 6 in. below finish grade. Abandoned conduit or duct need not be removed unless shown on the plans. Reconnect duct cable, conductors, and conduit to be reused when shown on the plans. Make all splices in ground boxes unless otherwise shown on the plans. Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials, and dispose of them in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations. Item 628 - 1 ITEM 636 ALUMINUM SIGNS 636.1. Description. • Installation. Furnish, fabricate, and erect aluminum signs. Sign supports are provided for under other Items. • Replacement. Replace existing signs on existing sign supports. • Refurbishing. Refurbish existing aluminum signs on existing sign supports. 636.2. Materials. A. Sign Blanks. Furnish sign blank substrates in accordance with DMS-7110, "Aluminum Sign Blanks," and in accordance with the types shown on the plans. Use single -piece sheet -aluminum substrates for Type A (small) signs and extruded aluminum substrates for Type G (ground -mounted) or Type O (overhead -mounted) signs. B. Sign Face Reflectorization. Reflectorize the sign faces with flat surface reflective sheeting. Furnish sheeting that meets DMS-8300, "Sign Face Materials." Use reflective sheeting from the same manufacturer for the entire face of a sign. C. Sign Messages. Fabricate sign messages to the sizes, types, and colors shown on the plans. Use sign message material from the same manufacturer for the entire message of a sign. • Ensure that the screened messages have clean, sharp edges and exhibit uniform color and reflectivity. Prevent runs, sags, and voids. Furnish screen inks in accordance with DMS-8300. • Fabricate colored, transparent film legend and reflectorized sheeting legend from materials that meet DMS-8300. • Fabricate nonreflectorized-sheeting legend from materials that meet DMS-8300. • Furnish Type A aluminum signs required as part of a message in conformance with the plans and in accordance with this Item. D. Hardware. Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or dichromate -sealed aluminum for bolts, nuts, washers, lock washers, screws, and other sign assembly hardware. Use plastic or nylon washers to avoid tearing the reflective sheeting. Furnish steel or aluminum products in accordance with DMS-7120, "Sign Hardware." When dissimilar metals are used, select or insulate metals to prevent corrosion. E. Sampling. The Engineer will sample in accordance with Tex-726-I. 636.3. Construction. A. Fabrication. 1. Sign Blanks. Furnish sign blanks to the sizes and shapes shown on the plans and that are free of buckles, warps, burrs, dents, cockles, or other defects. Do not splice individual extruded aluminum panel. Complete the fabrication of sign blanks, including the cutting and drilling or punching of holes, before cleaning and degreasing. After cleaning and degreasing, ensure that the substrate does not come into contact with grease, oils, or other contaminants before the application of the reflective sheeting. 2. Sheeting Application. Apply sheeting to sign blanks in conformance with the recommended procedures of the sheeting manufacturer. Clean and prepare the outside surface of extruded aluminum flanges in the same manner as the sign panel face. Minimize the number of splices in the sheeting. Overlap the lap -splices by at least 1/4 in. Use butt splices for Type D and Type E reflective sheeting. Provide a I -ft. minimum dimension for any piece of sheeting. Do not splice sheeting for signs fabricated with transparent screen inks or colored transparent films. 3. Sign Assembly. Assemble extruded aluminum signs in accordance with the details shown on the plans. Sign face surface variation must not exceed 1/8 in. per foot. Surface misalignment between panels in multi - panel signs must not exceed 1/16 in. at any point. 4. Decals. Code and apply sign identification decals in accordance with Item 643, "Sign Identification Decals." Item 636 - 1 B. Storage and Handling. Ship, handle, and store completed sign blanks and completed signs so that corners, edges, and faces are not damaged. Damage to the sign face that is not visible when viewed at a distance of 50 ft., night or day, will be acceptable. Replace unacceptable signs. Store all finished signs off the ground and in a vertical position until erected. Store finished signs 60 in. by 60 in. or smaller in a weatherproof building. Larger signs may be stored outside. C. Cleaning. Before shop inspection, wash completed signs with a biodegradable cleaning solution acceptable to the manufacturers of the sheeting, colored transparent film, and screen ink to remove grease, oil, dirt, smears, streaks, finger marks, and other foreign material. Wash again before final inspection after erection. D. Installation. Install signs as shown on the plans or as directed. E. Replacement. Remove the existing signs from the existing supports and replace with new signs, including mounting hardware, as shown on the plans. F. Refurbishing. Refurbish existing signs by providing and installing new messages and mounting hardware. Install new reflectorized legend and supplemental signs as shown on the plans. G. Unsalvageable Material. Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials and dispose of in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations. Item 636 - 2 ITEM 644 SMALL ROADSIDE SIGN SUPPORTS AND ASSEMBLIES 644.1. Description. Installation. Furnish, fabricate, and erect small roadside sign assemblies consisting of the signs, sign supports, foundations, and associated mounting hardware. Relocation. Relocate existing small roadside sign assemblies, and furnish and fabricate materials as required. Removal. Remove existing small roadside sign assemblies. 644.2. Materials. Furnish all materials unless otherwise shown on the plans. Furnish only new materials. Furnish and fabricate materials in accordance with the following Items and with details shown on the plans: • Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete" • Item 440, "Reinforcing Steel" • Item 441, "Steel Structures" • Item 442, "Metal for Structures" • Item 445, "Galvanizing" • Item 634, "Plywood Signs" • Item 636, "Aluminum Signs" • Item 643, "Sign Identification Decals" • Item 656, "Foundations for Traffic Control Devices." Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, dichromate sealed aluminum, or other materials shown on the plans for pipe, bolts, nuts, washers, lock washers, screws, and other sign assembly hardware. When dissimilar metals are used, select or insulate the metals to prevent corrosion. 644.3. Construction. Install foundations in accordance with Item 656, "Foundations for Traffic Control Devices." Plumb sign supports. Do not spring or rake posts to secure proper alignment. Use established safety practices when working near underground or overhead utilities. Consult the appropriate utility company before beginning work. A. Fabrication. Fabricate sign supports in accordance with Item 441, "Steel Structures." Ensure that all components fit properly. Verify the length of each post for each sign before fabrication to meet field conditions and sign -mounting heights shown on the plans. Galvanize fabricated parts in accordance with Item 445, "Galvanizing." Punch or drill any holes in steel parts or members before the parts or members are galvanized. Repair any steel part or member on which the galvanizing has been damaged during assembly, transit, erection, or welding in accordance with Section 445.3.1), "Repairs." B. Installation. Locate sign supports as shown on the plans, unless directed to shift the sign supports within design guidelines to secure a more desirable location or to avoid conflict with utilities and underground appurtenances. Stake sign -support locations for verification by the Engineer. Install stub posts of the type, spacing, orientation, and projection shown on the plans. Remove and replace posts damaged during installation at the Contractor's expense. Connect the upper post sections to the stub post sections as shown on the plans. Torque connection bolts as shown on the plans. Attach signs to support assemblies in accordance with the plans and pertinent Items. C. Relocation. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, reuse the existing supports and shorten or lengthen them as required. Obtain approval before lengthening existing supports. Furnish and install new breakaway stub posts in new foundations for relocated signs. Erect the supports on the new breakaway stub posts, and attach the signs to the supports. Attach signs to support assemblies in accordance with the plans and pertinent Items. Remove existing foundations to be abandoned in accordance with Section 644.3.1), "Removal." D. Removal. Remove existing concrete foundations that are to be abandoned to 2 ft. below finish grade. Backfill the remaining hole with material equal in composition and density to the surrounding area. Replace any surfacing with like material to equivalent condition. Item 644 - 1 t-- E. Handling and Storage. Handle and store existing signs or portions of signs removed so that they are not damaged. Prevent any damage to the various sign assembly components. Replace any portion of the sign damaged by the Contractor designated for reuse or salvage, including messages removed. Stockpile all removed sign components that will be reused or that become the property of the Department at designated locations. Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials, and dispose of them in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations. F. Cleaning. After the sign has been installed, wash the entire sign with a biodegradable cleaning solution acceptable to the sheeting and screen ink manufacturers to remove dirt, grease, oil smears, streaks, finger marks, and other foreign materials. Item 644 - 2 ITEM 662 WORK ZONE PAVEMENT MARKINGS 662.1. Description. Furnish, place, and maintain work zone pavement markings. 662.2. Materials. Provide thermoplastic, paint and beads, raised pavement markers, prefabricated pavement markings, temporary flexible reflective roadway marker tabs, or other approved materials for work zone pavement markings. Purchase all pavement marking materials on the open market. Supply materials meeting: • DMS-4200, "Pavement Markers (Reflectorized)," • DMS-4300, "Traffic Buttons," • DMS-8240, "Permanent Prefabricated Pavement Markings," • DMS-8241, "Removable Prefabricated Pavement Markings," • DMS-8242, "Temporary Flexible -Reflective Road Marker Tabs," • DMS-8200, "Traffic Paint," • DMS-8220, "Hot Applied Thermoplastic," and • DMS-8290, "Glass Traffic Beads." A. Nonremovable Markings. Use hot -applied thermoplastic or permanent prefabricated pavement markings for nonremovable markings. Paint and beads or other materials are not allowed for nonremovable markings unless shown on the plans. B. Removable and Short -Term Markings. Use raised pavement markers, removable prefabricated pavement markings, temporary flexible reflective roadway marker tabs, or other approved materials for removable and short-term markings. Do not use hot -applied thermoplastic or traffic paint for removable markings. Use removable prefabricated pavement markings on the final pavement surface when the plans specify removable markings. 662.3. Construction. Apply pavement markings in accordance with the following Items: • Item 666, "Reflectorized Pavement Markings" • Item 668, "Prefabricated Pavement Markings" • Item 672, "Raised Pavement Markers." A. Placement. Install longitudinal markings on pavement surfaces before opening to traffic. Maintain lane alignment traffic control devices and operations until markings are installed. Install markings in proper alignment in accordance with the TMUTCD and as shown on the plans. Short-term markings will be allowed when standard markings (removable or nonremovable) cannot be placed before opening to traffic, if shown on the plans or directed. When short-term markings are allowed for opening to traffic, place longitudinal standard markings no later than 14 calendar days after the placement of the surface. When inclement weather prohibits placement of markings, the 14-day period may be extended until weather permits proper application. Place standard longitudinal markings no sooner than 3 calendar days after the placement of a surface treatment, U unless otherwise shown on the plans. Apply thermoplastic markings to a minimum thickness of 0.060 in. (60 mils). When paint and beads are allowed, apply to a minimum dry thickness of 0.012 in. (12 mils). Li Place short-term markings in proper alignment with the location of the final pavement markings. Remove and replace short-term markings not in alignment at the Contractor's expense. t i For removable placements, use of raised pavement markers to simulate longitudinal markings is at the H Contractor's option. Use side -by -side raised pavement markers to simulate longitudinal lines wider than 4 in. Do not use raised pavement markers for words, symbols, shapes, or diagonal or transverse lines._, Item 662 - I B. Marking Removal. Remove markings that conflict with succeeding markings in accordance with Item 677, "Eliminating Existing Pavement Markings and Markers." Remove short-term markings that interfere or conflict with final marking placement immediately before placing final pavement markings, unless otherwise directed. Remove the remainder of the short-term markings before final acceptance. Leave as little evidence as possible of the marking when removing marking materials. C. Performance Requirements. All markings must be visible from a distance of at least 300 ft. in daylight conditions and from a distance of at least 160 ft. in nighttime conditions, illuminated by automobile low -beam headlight. Determine visibility distances using an automobile traveling on the roadway under dry conditions. Maintain the markings for 30 calendar days after installation. The end of the 30-day maintenance period does not relieve the contractor from the performance deficiencies requiring corrective action identified during the 30- day period. If markings fail to meet the requirements of this Item during the 30-day period, remove and replace them at the Contractor's expense. The 30-calendar day performance requirement will begin again after replacement of the markings. The daytime and nighttime reflected color of the markings must be distinctly white or yellow. The markings must exhibit uniform retroreflective characteristics. Item 662 - 2 ITEM 668 PREFABRICATED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 668.1. Description. Furnish and place prefabricated pavement markings. 668.2. Materials. Furnish prefabricated pavement marking materials meeting the requirements of DMS-8240, "Permanent Prefabricated Pavement Markings." Store all materials in a weatherproof enclosure and prevent damage during storage. 668.3. Construction. A. General. Obtain approval for the sequence of work and estimated daily production. Before the end of each working day, remove all waste generated from the jobsite. Establish guides to mark the lateral location of pavement markings as shown on the plans or as directed, and have guide locations verified. Use guide material that will not leave a permanent mark on the roadway. Place pavement markings in alignment with the guides without deviating from the alignment more than 1 in. per 200 ft. of roadway or more than 2 in. maximum and with no abrupt deviations. B. Placement Limitations. Do not place pavement -marking materials between September 30 and March I unless otherwise permitted. 1. Moisture. Apply material to pavement that is completely dry. Pavement will be considered dry if, on a sunny day after 15 min., no condensation occurs on the underside of a 1-ft.-square piece of clear plastic that has been placed on the pavement and weighted on the edges. 2. Temperature. Follow pavement and ambient air temperature requirements recommended by the material manufacturer. If the material manufacturer establishes no temperature requirements, do not place material if the pavement temperature is below 60°F or above 120°F. C. Dimensions. Place markings in accordance with the color, length, width, shape, and configuration shown on the plans. Locate alignment as shown on the plans or as directed. D. Methods. Place all material in accordance with the material manufacturer's instructions, unless otherwise directed. In addition to the manufacturer's instructions, place materials in accordance with the surface condition, moisture, and temperature requirements of this Item. E. Surface Preparation. Prepare surface by any approved cleaning method that effectively removes contaminants, loose materials, and conditions deleterious to proper adhesion. Abrasive or water -blast cleaning is not required unless shown on the plans. Blast -clean, when required, in accordance with Item 678, "Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings." Prepare surfaces further after cleaning by sealing or priming as recommended by the pavement marking material manufacturer or as directed. Use adhesive, when required, of the type and quality recommended by the pavement marking material manufacturer. Do not clean concrete pavement surfaces by grinding. F. Performance Requirements. 1. Adhesion. Markings do not lift, shift, smear, spread, flow, or tear by traffic action. 2. Appearance. Markings present a neat, uniform appearance that is free of excessive adhesive, ragged edges, and irregular lines or contours. 3. Visibility. Markings have uniform and distinctive retroreflectance when inspected in accordance with Tex-828-B. G. Performance Period. All markings and replacement markings must meet the requirements of this Item for at least 15 calendar days after installation. Remove all pavement markings that fail to meet requirements and replace at the Contractor's expense. Replace failing markings within 30 days of notification. Item 668 - 1 ITEM 672 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS 672.1. Description. Furnish and install raised pavement markers. s 672.2. Materials. A. Markers. Furnish raised pavement markers meeting the requirements of the following Department Material Specifications: • Jiggle Bar Tile. DMS-4100, "Jiggle Bar Tile," types I -A, II -A -A, W, and Y. 1 • Reflectorized Pavement Markers. DMS-4200, "Pavement Markers (Reflectorized)," types I -A, I-C, I-R, II -A -A, and II-C-R. • Traffic Buttons. DMS-4300, "Traffic Buttons," types I -A, I-C, I-R, II -A -A, II-C-R, W, and Y. Round or oval unless otherwise specified in the plans. • Plowable Reflectorized Pavement Markers. DMS-4210, "Pavement Markers (Plowable Reflectorized)," types I -A, I-C, I-R, II -A -A, and II-C-R. The following are descriptions for each type of raised pavement marker: t • Type I -A. Type I -A must contain an approach face that retro-reflects amber light. The body, other than the retro-reflective face must be yellow. • Type I-C. Type I-C must contain an approach face that retro-reflects white light. The body, other than the retro-reflective face must be white or silver -white. • Type I-R. Type I-R must contain a trailing face that retro-reflects red light. The body, other than the retro- reflective face must be white or silver -white. • Type II -A -A. Type II -A -A must contain two retro-reflective faces (approach and trailing) each that retro- reflect amber light. The body, other than the retro-reflective faces, must be yellow. • Type II-C-R. Type II-C-R must contain two retro-reflective faces, an approach face that retro-reflects white light and a trailing face that retro-reflects red light. The body, other than the retro-reflective faces, must be white or silver -white. • Type W. Type W has a white body and no reflective faces. • Type Y. Type Y has a yellow body and no reflective faces. "z B. Adhesives. Furnish adhesives that conform to the following requirements: • DMS-6100, "Epoxies and Adhesives." • DMS-6130, "Bituminous Adhesive for Pavement Markers." C. Sampling. The Engineer will sample in accordance with Tex-729-I. 672.3. Construction. Remove existing raised pavement markers in accordance with Item 677, "Eliminating Existing Pavement Markings and Markers" (except for measurement and payment). Furnish raised pavement markers for each class from the same manufacturer. Place raised pavement markers on the new asphaltic concrete surface or surface treatment only after the new surface has aged at least 14 days. When shown on the plans, prepare all surfaces in accordance with Item 678, "Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings." Ensure that the bond surfaces are free of dirt, curing compound, grease, oil, moisture, loose or unsound pavement markings, and any other material that would adversely affect the adhesive bond. Establish pavement marking guides to mark the lateral location of raised pavement markers as shown on the plans and as directed. Do not make permanent marks on the roadway for the guides. Place raised pavement markers in proper alignment with the guides. Acceptable placement deviations are shown on the plans. Remove raised pavement markers placed out of alignment or sequence, as shown on the plans or stated in this specification, at Contractor's expense, in accordance with Item 677, "Eliminating Existing Pavement Markings and Markers" (except for measurement and payment). Item 672 - 1 Use the following adhesive materials for placement of raised pavement markers unless otherwise shown on the plans: r� • epoxy adhesive for plowable reflectorized pavement markers. • bituminous adhesive for jiggle bar tile; reflectorized pavement markers described in DMS-4200, "Pavement Markers (Reflectorized)' ; and traffic buttons on bituminous pavements. • epoxy adhesive for jiggle bar tile, reflectorized pavement markers described in DMS-4200, and traffic buttons on hydraulic cement concrete pavements. A Apply adhesives in sufficient quantity to: • ensure that 100% of the bonding area of raised pavement markers is in contact with the adhesive, and • ensure that raised pavement markers, except for plowable markers, are seated on a continuous layer of adhesive and not in contact with the pavement surface. Apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise required by this Article. Apply bituminous adhesive only when pavement temperature and raised pavement marker temperature are 40T or higher. Do not heat bituminous adhesive above 400T. Agitate bituminous adhesive to ensure even heat distribution. Machine -mix epoxy adhesive. Furnish raised pavement markers free of rust, scale, dirt, oil, grease, moisture, and contaminants that might adversely affect the adhesive bond. Place raised pavement markers immediately after the adhesive is applied and ensure proper bonding. Do not use adhesives or any other material that impairs the functional retro-reflectivity of the raised pavement markers. in L f Li Item 672 - 2